LS9-16/32 Owner`s Manual
LS9-16/LS9-32
Owner’s Manual
EN
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not
occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by turning
the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem
by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of
America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your
authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded
cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used.
Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product
in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for
Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your
use of this product in a residential environment will not
result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,
Calif. 90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
Model Name : LS9-16, LS9-32
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN
: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol
or colored GREEN or
GREEN-and-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
• This applies only to products distributed by
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(Perchlorate)
This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains
a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material
may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal information in the United States, refer to
the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:
www.eiae.org
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
2
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
(mercury)
(3 wires)
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
The above warning is located on the rear or side of the unit.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11
12
13
14
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer,
or sold with the apparatus. When
a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
(98-6500)
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri
tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan
suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
(lithium caution)
NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS
• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.
• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.
• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het
moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve
dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in
uw land.
• For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end
of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in
your country.
• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical
waste.
(lithium disposal)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from
electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the device.
• Use only the included power cord.
If you intend to use the device in an area other than in the one you
purchased, the included power cord may not be compatible. Please check
with your Yamaha dealer.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,
or roll anything over it.
• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding
connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
If you notice any abnormality
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the
power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the
device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not open
• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have
it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or
damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Location
• When transporting or moving the device, do not hold the display.
Improper transportation can result in injury or damage to the device itself.
• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn
off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the
power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the
minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make
sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
(5)-4
4
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
• Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum.
Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause
feedback and may damage the speakers.
• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold
or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)
to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top and rear
to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular,
do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation
can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or
even fire.
• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise, both
in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it.
1/2
Connections
Backup battery
• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all
devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume
levels to minimum.
• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw is
provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock
prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect the
ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into
the mains. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord
from the AC outlet, the current scene data and library data is retained.
However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When
the backup battery is running low, the LCD display indicates “Low Battery!”
when you starting up the system (the Battery field also indicates “LOW” or
“NO” in the MISC SETUP screen.) In this case, immediately save the data
to a USB memory, then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace
the backup battery.
Handling caution
• When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the
power amplifier LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power
off, the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason.
• Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device
(vents, etc.).
• Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into
any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then
have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may
cause problems with electrical contact or fader motion.
• Do not use the device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.
If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and
avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.
The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service
personnel about replacing defective components.
(5)-4
2/2
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
5
Contents
1. Introduction
9
5. Input channel operations
53
Thank you ................................................................... 9
Signal flow for input channels.................................53
An overview of the LS9 .............................................. 9
Specifying the channel name / icon ........................55
Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 ......... 11
HA (head amp) settings............................................57
Number of INPUT channels................................. 11
Rear panel ........................................................... 11
Top panel............................................................. 12
Other.................................................................... 13
Sending the signal from
an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus......58
The LS9’s channel structure ................................... 13
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........62
Using a popup window .........................................64
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....65
About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) ................ 14
About word clock ..................................................... 14
Sending the signal from
an input channel to a MIX bus..............................62
Conventions in this manual..................................... 14
About the firmware version ..................................... 14
6. Output channel operations
67
Signal flow for output channels ..............................67
15
Specifying the channel name / icon ........................69
Top panel................................................................... 15
Sending signals from MIX channels
to the STEREO/MONO bus ...................................71
2. Parts and their function
Rear panel ................................................................. 23
Front panel ................................................................ 26
3. Basic operations on the LS9
27
Basic operations in the top panel ........................... 27
About the [HOME] key ......................................... 27
Selecting the fader layer ...................................... 27
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ........... 29
Selecting functions .............................................. 29
Sending signals from MIX channels
and STEREO/MONO channels
to MATRIX buses ...................................................75
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........75
Using a popup window .........................................77
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) .....78
7. Operations in
the SELECTED CHANNEL section
81
Viewing the display .................................................. 30
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section...............81
Constant display area .......................................... 30
Main area............................................................. 31
The on-screen user interface............................... 32
About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen ..................82
Assigning a name..................................................... 34
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ..83
8. Custom fader layer
91
Using the tool buttons ............................................. 35
About the tool buttons.......................................... 35
Using libraries ...................................................... 35
Initializing settings ............................................... 38
Copying and pasting settings .............................. 39
Comparing two sets of settings ........................... 39
About the custom fader layer ..................................91
Assigning channels to the custom fader layer ......92
9. Input/output patching
95
Changing the output patching.................................95
Changing the input patching ...................................99
4. Connections and setup
41
Inserting an external device into a channel .........101
Connections.............................................................. 41
Directly outputting an INPUT channel ..................103
Installing an option card .......................................... 44
Setup required when starting up ............................ 45
Returning the current scene to the initial state .... 45
Word clock connection and settings .................... 46
HA (head amp) settings ....................................... 47
Sending an input channel signal
to the STEREO bus.......................................... 50
10. USB memory recorder
105
About the USB memory recorder ..........................105
Assigning channels to
the input/output of the recorder.........................106
Recording to USB memory ....................................108
Playing back audio files from USB memory ........110
Editing the title list..................................................112
Linking scene recall with audio file playback ......113
6
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Contents
11. EQ and Dynamics
115
15. Talkback / Oscillator
151
About EQ and dynamics ........................................ 115
About talkback and oscillator................................151
Using EQ ................................................................. 115
Using talkback ........................................................151
Using dynamics ...................................................... 117
Using the oscillator ................................................153
Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries .......................... 120
EQ library........................................................... 120
Dynamics library ................................................ 120
12. Grouping and linking
121
About mute groups ................................................ 121
Using mute groups................................................. 121
Using the MUTE GROUP screen
to operate mute groups .................................. 121
Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen
to specify mute groups ................................... 122
Using the Mute Safe function ............................ 123
16. Meters
155
Using the METER screen .......................................155
17. Graphic EQ and effects
157
About the virtual rack .............................................157
Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack ......158
Graphic EQ operations...........................................161
The Channel Link function .................................... 124
About the graphic EQ.........................................161
Inserting a GEQ in a channel.............................161
Using the 31 Band GEQ ....................................163
Using the Flex15GEQ ........................................164
Linking the desired input channels .................... 124
About the internal effects ......................................166
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel........... 126
Using an internal effect via send/return .............167
Inserting an internal effect into a channel ..........168
Editing the internal effect parameters ................170
Using the Tap Tempo function...........................172
Using the Freeze effect ......................................173
Copying the parameters of a channel................ 126
Moving the parameters of a channel ................. 127
Initializing the parameters of a channel ............. 128
13. Scene memory
129
Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries ............174
About scene memories .......................................... 129
GEQ library ........................................................174
Effect library .......................................................174
Using scene memories .......................................... 129
Using an external head amp ..................................175
Storing a scene.................................................. 129
Recalling a scene .............................................. 131
Using user-defined keys to recall ...................... 132
Remotely controlling an external head amp.......175
Editing scene memories ........................................ 134
Sorting and renaming scene memories ............. 134
Scene memory editing ....................................... 136
Copying/pasting a scene ................................... 136
Clearing a scene................................................ 137
Cutting a scene.................................................. 138
Inserting a scene ............................................... 138
Using the Focus function ...................................... 139
Using the Recall Safe function.............................. 140
Using the Fade function......................................... 143
14. Monitor/Cue
145
About the monitor/cue functions .......................... 145
Using the Monitor function.................................... 146
Using the Cue function .......................................... 148
About cue groups .............................................. 148
Operating the Cue function................................ 149
18. MIDI
177
MIDI functionality on the LS9 ................................177
Basic MIDI settings .................................................178
Using program changes
to recall scenes and library items......................180
Using control changes to control parameters .....183
Using parameter changes
to control parameters .........................................185
Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
to operate the USB memory recorder ...............186
19. User settings (Security)
187
User Level settings .................................................187
User types and user authentication keys ...........187
Setting the Administrator password ...................188
Creating a user authentication key ....................188
Logging-in ..........................................................189
Changing the password .....................................191
Editing a user authentication key .......................192
Changing the user level .....................................192
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
Preferences ............................................................. 194
User-defined keys .................................................. 196
Console lock ........................................................... 197
Locking the console ........................................... 197
Unlocking the console ....................................... 198
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK
screen image.................................................. 198
Appendices
225
EQ Library List ........................................................ 225
DYNAMICS Library List .......................................... 227
Dynamics Parameters ............................................ 229
Effect Type List ....................................................... 232
Effects Parameters ................................................. 233
Using USB memory to save/load data.................. 199
Effects and tempo synchronization ...................... 244
Saving the LS9’s internal data
on USB memory ............................................. 199
Loading a file from USB memory....................... 200
Editing the files saved on USB memory ............ 201
Formatting USB memory media ........................ 204
Scene Memory/Effect Library
to Program Change Table .................................. 245
Parameters that can be assigned
to control changes .............................................. 249
Control change parameter assignments .............. 251
NRPN parameter assignments .............................. 253
20. Other functions
205
Mixing parameter operation applicability............. 256
About the SETUP screen ....................................... 205
Functions that can be assigned
to user-defined keys ........................................... 257
Word clock settings ............................................... 206
MIDI Data Format .................................................... 260
Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off ............. 208
Warning/Error Messages ....................................... 268
Using cascade connections .................................. 209
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 270
Operations on the cascade slave LS9 ............... 210
Operations on the cascade master LS9 ............ 212
General Specifications ........................................... 272
Basic settings for MIX buses and
MATRIX buses ..................................................... 213
Electrical characteristics ....................................... 275
Setting the date and time of the internal clock.... 215
Setting the network address ................................. 216
Specifying the brightness or
contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps......... 217
Using the Help function ......................................... 218
Loading a Help file from a USB memory ........... 218
Loading a text file from a USB memory ............. 219
Assigning the Help function to
a user-defined key.......................................... 219
Viewing Help...................................................... 220
Input/output characteristics .................................. 273
Mixer Basic Parameters ......................................... 277
Pin Assignment ...................................................... 278
Dimensions ............................................................. 279
Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit
(sold separately).................................................. 280
MIDI Implementation Chart .................................... 281
Index ........................................................................ 282
Block Diagram ..................................... End of Manual
Level Diagram ...................................... End of Manual
Initializing the LS9’s internal memory .................. 222
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ......... 223
Adjusting the input/output gain
(Calibration function).......................................... 224
• The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s manual are for instructional purposes
only, and may be different from the ones on your device.
• The bitmap fonts used in this device have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
• MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
8
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
1
Thank you
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha LS9 digital mixing console. In order to take full advantage
of the LS9’s superior functionality and enjoy years of trouble-free use, please read this manual
before you begin using the product. After you have read the manual, keep it in a safe place.
An overview of the LS9
The LS9 is a digital mixing console with the following features.
■ Mixing system that packs top-class
functionality into a compact size • • • • •
The LS9 is a full-digital mixing console designed for
installed systems or SR applications, and in spite of its
compact size, provides functionality and a channel count
comparable to large-format consoles. 24-bit linear AD/DA
converters are used to deliver up to 108 dB of dynamic
range and amazing sound quality.
As input channels, it provides 32 (LS9-16 model) or 64
(LS9-32 model) monaural INPUT channels, and four stereo ST IN channels.
As output channels, it provides 16 MIX channels, eight
MATRIX channels, a STEREO channel, and a MONO
channel. L/C/R three-channel output using the STEREO/
MONO channels is also supported.
■ Analog-feeling operability • • • • • • • • • •
Simply by pressing a key, you can select the combination
of channels (“fader layer”) to be operated from the top
panel faders. You can operate the console while quickly
switching between input channels and output channels. In
addition, you can also use a custom fader layer that lets
you specify any desired combination of channels. Since
fader/cue operations and on/off switching for all channels
can be performed from the panel, even customers using
digital consoles for the first time will find operation familiar and comfortable.
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right
of the display lets you use the knobs to control the main
parameters (gain, EQ, dynamics threshold, bus send levels, etc.) for the particular channel on which you’re focusing. This section can be operated just like a module on an
analog mixer.
Mix parameter settings, including head amp gain and
phantom power for input channels, can be stored and
recalled as “scenes.”
All faders on the panel are motorized moving faders, so
that when you recall a scene, the previous fader locations
are reproduced immediately.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
9
An overview of the LS9
■ Effects and graphic EQ that can be
patched into a desired signal path
••••
There are eight virtual racks, in which you can mount
effects or graphic EQ and then patch them into the desired
signal route. Graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 1–4,
and effects or graphic EQ can be mounted in racks 5–8.
You can simultaneously use up to four high-quality multieffects, which include reverb, delay, multi-band compressor, and various modulation-type effects. These can be
used via an internal bus, or inserted into a desired channel.
For the graphic EQ you can select either 31-band graphic
EQ or Flex 15 GEQ. These can be inserted into the desired
channel or output. The Flex 15 GEQ allows you to adjust
the gain for any fifteen of the thirty-one bands. Since two
Flex 15 GEQ units can be mounted in a single virtual rack,
a total of up to sixteen graphic EQ units can be used
simultaneously.
■ A recorder function that’s useful for
sound checks or recording mixes • • • •
A recorder function is provided, allowing you to use USB
memory to record the output of the STEREO bus or a
MIX bus, or assign an audio file in USB memory to a
desired input channel or monitor output and play it back.
Supported file formats are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
for recording, and MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio),
and MPEG-4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) for playback. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not
supported. This function is convenient when you want to
record the mix output of a specific bus, or if you want to
play back a song from the speakers during the sound
check.
■ Cascade connections in the digital
domain • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
A second LS9 console or a digital mixer such as the
Yamaha M7CL or PM5D connected via a digital I/O card
installed in a slot can be cascade-connected in the digital
domain.
Of the MIX buses, MATRIX buses, STEREO (L/R) bus,
MONO buses, and CUE (L/R) bus, the desired buses can
be merged, and all mixed bus signals can be cascaded
individually.
10
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
■ Security functions that can be specified
at user-level or system-level • • • • • • •
User levels can be distinguished into three levels (administrator, guest, user), and the functionality available to
each non-administrator user can be restricted. Passwords
can be specified for the administrator and users, preventing important settings from being changed accidentally.
Information specific to each user (user level, system settings, and user-defined key settings) can be stored on USB
memory as a “user authentication key.” By loading your
own user authentication key from USB memory, you can
instantly set up the ideal operating environment for yourself.
■ I/O card expansion
••••••••••••••
The rear panel provides one slot (LS9-16) or two slots
(LS9-32) in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can
be installed. AD cards, DA cards, or digital I/O cards can
be installed in these slots to add inputs and outputs port.
Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32
Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32
1
Introduction
The LS9 is available in two models; the LS9-16 and the LS9-32. These models differ as follows.
Number of INPUT channels
The LS9-16 has up to 32 operable INPUT channels, while the LS9-32 has up to 64. The number and structure of other channels (ST IN channels, MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO/MONO channels) are identical.
Rear panel
The LS9-16 and LS9-32 differ in the number of rear panel INPUT jacks, OMNI OUT jacks, and slots they provide.
The rear panel of the LS9-16 provides sixteen INPUT jacks, eight OMNI OUT jacks, and one slot.
OMNI OUT jacks
INPUT jacks
Slot
In contrast, the rear panel of the LS9-32 provides thirty-two INPUT jacks, sixteen OMNI OUT jacks, two slots, and one
LAMP connector.
OMNI OUT jacks
LAMP connector
INPUT jacks
Slots
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
11
Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32
Top panel
The LS9-16 and LS9-32 differ in the number of top panel channel modules and ST IN channels they provide.
The LS9-16 provides sixteen channel modules and two ST IN channels, and by switching fader layers you can operate up to
32 INPUT channels (monaural) and four ST IN channels (stereo).
Channel modules
ST IN channels
The LS9-16 provides thirty-two channel modules and four ST IN channels. By switching fader layers you can operate up to
sixty-four INPUT channels (monaural).
The four ST IN channels (stereo) can be operated from either layer (1-32 or 33-64).
Channel modules
12
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
ST IN channels
Differences between the LS9-16 and LS9-32 • The LS9’s channel structure
Other
● LS9-16
● LS9-32
LAYER [1-16] key
LAYER [17-32] key
LAYER [MASTER] key
LAYER [CUSTOM
FADER] key
LAYER [1-32] key
LAYER [33-64] key
LAYER [MASTER] key
Introduction
1
The names of the LAYER section keys differ between the LS9-16 and LS9-32.
LAYER [CUSTOM
FADER] key
In conjunction with this difference, there are also differences in the numbering of the channel modules on the panel and the
channels that are assigned to each fader layer.
HINT
• In this owner’s manual, whenever there is a difference between the LS9-16 model and the LS9-32 model, specifications that apply only to the LS9-32 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g., INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}).
• When the specifications are common to both models, the manual refers simply to the LS9.
The LS9’s channel structure
The LS9 provides the following input channels and output channels.
■ Input channels • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This section processes input signals and sends them to
various buses (STEREO, MONO, MIX). The LS9 has the
following two types of input channel.
● INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64}
These channels process monaural signals. In the initial
state, the input signals from the rear panel INPUT jacks
and the input channels of the slot(s) are assigned to these
channels.
● ST IN channels 1–4
These channels process stereo signals. In the initial state,
the outputs of virtual racks 5–8 are assigned to these channels.
Signal assignments to the input channels (input patching)
can be changed as desired.
■ Output channels • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This section mixes the signals sent from input channels
etc., and sends them to the corresponding output ports or
output buses.
There are three types of output channel, as follows.
● MIX channels 1–16
These channels process the signals sent from input channels to the MIX buses, and send them from the output
ports. These are used mainly to send signals to the monitor
system or to external effects.
The signals of MIX channels 1–16 can also be sent to the
STEREO bus, MONO bus, or MATRIX buses.
When the LS9 is in the initial state, these are assigned to
the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot(s).
● MATRIX channels 1–8
These channels process the signals that are sent from MIX
channels, STEREO channels, and MONO channel to the
MATRIX buses, and send them from the output ports.
Using the STEREO and MONO buses, different combinations of signals and mix balances can be sent out from the
console.
● STEREO channel / MONO channel
These channels process the signals that are sent from the
input channels or MIX channels, and send them to the corresponding output port. These channels are used as the
main stereo output and monaural output.
The STEREO channel and MONO channel can be used
either to output independent signals, or for three-channel L/
C/R playback.
When the LS9 is in the initial state, the STEREO channel is
assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 15/16 {31/32} and to the
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack.
Signal assignments to the output channels (output patching) can be changed as desired.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
13
About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED) • About word clock • Conventions in this manual • About the firmware version
About the MIX bus types (VARI / FIXED)
The sixteen MIX buses provided on the LS9 can be assigned either as VARI or FIXED types in
pairs of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered buses (→ p. 213). They can also be switched
between monaural/stereo for the same pairs of buses. VARI type and FIXED type buses differ as
follows.
● VARI
● FIXED
This type allows the send level of the signal sent from the
input channels to the MIX bus to be varied. The point at
which the signal is sent from the input channel to a VARI
type MIX bus can be chosen from before the EQ
(attenuator), before the fader, or after the [ON] key.
This type is used mainly for sending the signal to a monitor system or external effect.
With this type, the send level of the signal sent from the
input channels to the MIX bus is fixed. The signal from an
input channel is sent to a FIXED type MIX bus from
before Pan (if the MIX bus is monaural) or after Pan (if
the MIX bus is stereo). This type is used mainly when you
want to distribute signals to an external device with the
same mix as the STEREO/MONO buses.
About word clock
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing.
Normally, one device transmits a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive this
word clock signal and synchronize to it.
In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via the LS9’s
2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, the word
clock must be synchronized between the devices. Be aware that if the word clock is not synchronized, the signal will not be sent correctly, or there may be unpleasant noise. (For details on synchronizing the LS9’s word clock with an external device → p. 46)
Conventions in this manual
In this manual, switch-type controllers on the panel are called “keys.” Of the control knobs on the
panel, those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called “controls,” while
those that turn endlessly are called “encoders.”
Controllers located on the panel are enclosed in square
brackets [ ] (e.g., [CUE] key) in order to distinguish them
from the virtual buttons and knobs displayed in the screen.
For some controllers, the name of the section is given
before the [ ] (e.g., LAYER [MASTER] key).
Whenever there is a difference between the LS9-16 model
and the LS9-32 model, specifications that apply only to
the LS9-32 model are enclosed in curly brackets { } (e.g.,
INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}).
About the firmware version
You can view the firmware version number in the MISC SETUP screen (→ p. 206).
You can also download the most recent firmware version from the website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
14
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 2
Parts and their function
2
Parts and their function
This chapter explains the LS9’s parts and their functions.
Top panel
The LS9’s top panel is organized into the following sections.
LS9-16
m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section (p. 20)
b DISPLAY ACCESS section (p. 19)
n LAYER section (p. 19)
. Stereo meter / Cue section (p. 20)
, Display (p. 20)
⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section (p. 21)
⁄2 USB connector (side
panel, to the right of the
display) (p. 22)
⁄1 Data entry section
(p. 22)
x ST IN (stereo input)
section (p. 17)
z Channel module section (p. 17)
c STEREO MASTER section (p. 18)
v USER DEFINED KEYS section (p. 18)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
15
Top panel
LS9-32
m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section (p. 20)
⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section (p. 21)
⁄1 Data entry section
. Stereo meter / Cue section (p. 20)
(p. 22)
b DISPLAY ACCESS section (p. 19)
⁄2 USB connector
n LAYER section (p. 19)
z Channel module section (p. 17)
, Display (p. 20)
(side panel, to the
right of the display)
(p. 22)
c STEREO MASTER section (p. 18)
v USER DEFINED KEYS section (p. 18)
x ST IN (stereo input) section (p. 17)
16
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Top panel
z Channel module section • • • • • • • • • • •
x ST IN (stereo input) section
In this section you can operate the main parameters of the
input channels and output channels, as well as the monitor
output. Use the LAYER section (→ p. 19) to select the
channels that are mapped to this section.
In this section you can operate the main parameters of the
stereo ST IN channels 1–4. The function of each controller is the same as in the Channel Module section, with the
exception that the L-channel or R-channel will be alternately selected as the target of operations each time you
press the [SEL] key, and the fact that the encoder rather
than the fader is used to adjust the level.
••••••••
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
3
Parts and their function
1
2
4
5
LS9-16
1 [SEL] key
This key selects the channel to be operated. When you
press this key to make the LED light, the corresponding
channel will be selected for operations in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section or in the display. In the ST IN section,
the L-channel and R-channel will be alternately selected
as the target of operations each time you press the [SEL]
key.
B [CUE] key
This key selects the channel to be cue-monitored. When
cue is on, the LED will be lit.
C Meter LEDs
These LEDs indicate the audio signal level of the input
channel or output channel.
LS9-32
D [ON] key
This switches the channel on/off. The key LED will light
for channels that are on. In SENDS ON FADER mode,
this key is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from
that channel to the currently selected MIX bus (or from a
MIX channel, to the MATRIX bus).
E Fader/Encoder
This adjusts the signal level or monitor level of the input
channel or output channel. In SENDS ON FADER mode,
this adjusts the send level from that channel to the currently selected MIX bus (or from a MIX channel, to the
MATRIX bus).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
17
Top panel
c STEREO MASTER section
•••••••••••
v USER DEFINED KEYS section• • • • • • • • •
In this section you can operate the main parameters of the
STEREO channel.
Here you can execute the functions that are programmed
for the user-defined keys.
1
2
1
3
4
1 [SEL] key
This key selects the STEREO channel as the target of
operations. The L-channel and R-channel will be alternately selected as the target of operations each time you
press the [SEL] key.
B [CUE] key
This key cue-monitors the STEREO channel. When cue is
on, the LED will be lit.
C [ON] key
This switches the STEREO channel on/off. When on, the
key LED will light. In SENDS ON FADER mode, you can
use this as an on/off switch for MIX/MATRIX channels or
as an on/off switch for the signal sent from the STEREO
channel to the MATRIX buses, depending on the LAYER.
D Fader
This adjusts the output level of the STEREO channel. In
SENDS ON FADER mode, this adjusts the level of the
MIX/MATRIX channels or the send level from the STEREO channel to the MATRIX buses, depending on the
LAYER.
HINT
• If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER in the USER
DEFINED KEY SETUP screen, the [ON] key and fader will respectively turn MONITOR on/off and control its level.
18
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
1 User-defined keys [1]–[12]
These keys execute the functions that have been programmed for each key (e.g., switching scenes, turning
talkback or the internal oscillator on/off).
Top panel
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D [CHANNEL JOB] key
This key accesses a screen where you can make settings
for Channel Link, Mute Group, and Recall Safe functions,
and copy or move settings between channels.
E [RECORDER] key
This key accesses a screen where you can operate and
make settings for the Recorder function which records and
plays audio files.
F [METER] key
This key accesses a meter screen where you can view the
input/output levels of all channels in a single view.
G [RACK 1-4] key
This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic
EQ assigned to virtual racks 1–4. By pressing the [RACK
1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously you can
access the VIRTUAL RACK screen, where you can assign
a graphic EQ (31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ) to each virtual rack.
1 [SCENE MEMORY] key
This key accesses a screen where you can store, recall, and
edit scene memories, and make settings for the Focus
function and Fade Time function.
B [MONITOR] key
This key accesses a screen where you can make settings
for cue, monitor, oscillator, and talkback.
H [RACK 5-8] key
This key accesses a screen where you can edit the graphic
EQ or internal effect that is assigned to virtual racks 5–8,
and make settings for external head amps. By pressing the
[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously you
can access the VIRTUAL RACK screen, where you can
assign a graphic EQ (31 Band GEQ or Flex 15 GEQ) or
internal effect to each virtual rack.
C [SETUP] key
This key accesses a screen where you can set and verify
the user level, and make basic system settings.
n LAYER section
2
Parts and their function
b DISPLAY ACCESS section
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Here you can select the type of channels that will be operated from the channel module section (→ p. 17) and ST IN section
(→ p. 17).
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
LS9-16
LS9-32
1 LAYER [1-16] {LAYER [1-32]} key
B LAYER [17-32] {LAYER [33-64]} key
C LAYER [MASTER] key
These keys assign fixed preset combinations of channels to the channel module section and the ST IN
section. The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows.
For the LS9-16
LAYER key / module
1–16
ST IN 1–2
LAYER [1-16] key
CH 1–16
ST IN 1–2
LAYER [17-32] key
CH 17–32
ST IN 3–4
LAYER [MASTER] key
MIX 1–16
—
For the LS9-32
LAYER key / module
1–16
17–24
25–31
32
ST IN 1–4
LAYER [1-32] key
CH 1–16
CH 17–24
CH 25–31
CH 32
ST IN 1–4
LAYER [33-64] key
CH 33–48
CH 49–56
CH 57–63
CH 64
ST IN 1–4
LAYER [MASTER] key
MIX 1–16
MATRIX 1–8
—
MONO
—
D LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key
This key assigns the channels selected by you (the user) to the channel module section and the ST IN
section. (For the channel assignment procedure → p. 91)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
19
Top panel
m MIX/MATRIX SELECT section • • • • • • • • •
, Display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In this section you can select the MIX channel or
MATRIX channel that will be the object of operations.
In this display you can view and edit all mix parameters,
as well as various settings.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS section (→ p. 19) to select the
screen that you want to view. Then use the cursor keys of
the data entry section (→ p. 22) to move the cursor to the
desired parameter, and use the dial or the [INC][DEC]
keys to edit the value.
1 MIX/MATRIX [1]–[16] keys
These keys select the MIX channel (or if the selected
channel is a MIX/STEREO/MONO channel, the
MATRIX channel) whose send level will be adjusted by
the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The LED of the key
corresponding to the currently selected channel will light
(or blink, in the case of a MATRIX channel).
In SENDS ON FADER mode, these keys select a MIX bus
or MATRIX button as the send-destination. In this case,
the LED of the key corresponding to the currently selected
bus will blink, and the LED of keys corresponding to
selectable buses will light. For MATRIX buses, the [9]–
[16] keys will be dark and cannot be selected.
. Stereo meter / Cue section
••••••••
In this section you can view the level of the STEREO
channel or cue monitor.
1
2
3
1 Stereo meter
This is a 32-segment LED meter that indicates the L/R
channel levels of the STEREO channel.
While the [CUE] key of any channel is on, this meter will
indicate the cue monitor level.
B CUE LED
This LED will blink while the [CUE] key of any channel
is on.
C [CUE CLEAR] key
This key clears all cue monitoring that is currently active.
20
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Top panel
In this section you can operate the most important mix
parameters for the currently selected input channel or output channel.
The function of the controllers in this section will depend
on the type of channel that is selected.
● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected
The encoder will adjust the send level from that channel to the currently selected bus. (For a FIXED type
bus, the encoder will switch the send on/off.)
If the send-destination bus is stereo, this encoder will
specify the panning of the signal sent to the two buses
if an odd-numbered bus is selected, or will specify the
send level if an even-numbered bus is selected.
● When a MIX channel is selected
1
4
2
3
C [SELECTED SEND] encoder
The encoder will adjust the send level from that MIX
channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus.
● When a MATRIX channel is selected
5
The encoder will adjust the send level from the MIX
channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus.
2
Parts and their function
⁄0 SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • •
NOTE
6
J
7
8
M
• In SENDS ON FADER mode, this encoder will not do anything regardless of which channel is selected.
9
D [DYNAMICS 1] encoder
K
● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected
L
The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 1
(e.g., gate).
● When any other channel is selected
The encoder will adjust the threshold of the compressor, etc.
1 [HA GAIN] encoder
● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected
The encoder will adjust the gain of the internal head
amp or an external head amp device (AD8HR) connected to a rear panel slot.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
● When any other channel is selected
The encoder will not do anything.
B [PAN] encoder
● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected
● When a MIX channel is selected
The encoder will adjust the panning of the signal sent
to the L/R channels (or the L/C/R channels in the case
of LCR mode) of the STEREO bus. If a MIX channel
set to stereo is selected, the encoder will adjust the
output balance of the left and right channels.
● When a MATRIX channel is selected
If a monaural MATRIX channel is selected, the
encoder will not do anything. If a stereo MATRIX
channel is selected, the encoder will adjust the output
balance of the left and right channels.
● When a STEREO/MONO (C) channel is
selected
The encoder will not do anything for MONO (C)
channel. For a STEREO channel, the encoder will
adjust the output balance of the left and right channels.
E [DYNAMICS 2] encoder
● When an INPUT/ST IN channel is selected
The encoder will adjust the threshold of Dynamics 2
(e.g., compressor).
● When any other channel is selected
The encoder will not do anything.
F EQ [Q] encoder
G EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder
H EQ [GAIN] encoder
These encoders adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of the
band selected by keys 9–L.
HINT
• By simultaneously pressing the EQ [Q] encoder and the EQ
[GAIN] encoder, you can reset the gain to 0 dB for the band
selected by the keys below (9–L).
• If you have selected a LOW band or HIGH band whose type can
be changed, you can switch the type by turning the EQ [Q]
encoder while pressing it when Q is set to the maximum or minimum value.
LOW band :
• Switches to LOW shelving if you turn the encoder toward the
right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value
• Switches to high pass filter if you turn the encoder toward the
left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value (MIX,
MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO channels only)
HIGH band :
• Switches to HIGH shelving if you turn the encoder toward the
right while pressing it when Q is at the minimum value
• Switches to low pass filter if you turn the encoder toward the
left while pressing it when Q is at the maximum value
For shelving, high pass filter, and low pass filter as well, you can
switch the type by turning the encoder while pressing it.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
21
Top panel
I
J
K
L
EQ [HIGH] key
EQ [HIGH MID] key
EQ [LOW MID] key
EQ [LOW] key
These keys select the band controlled by encoders 6–8.
By simultaneously pressing the EQ [HIGH] key and EQ
[LOW] key, you can reset the gain of all four bands to 0
dB.
⁄2 USB connector (side panel, to the right
of the display)
•••••••••••••••••
This connector lets you connect USB memory.
M [HOME] key
This key returns the state of the LS9’s panel to home position. When you press this key, the panel will change as follows.
1
• The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen for the currently selected channel.
• The channel level function will be assigned to the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated).
⁄1 Data entry section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This section lets you edit specific parameters in the screen.
1
1 USB connector
USB memory can be connected here, and used to save or
load internal data. User authentication key data to define
the user level can also be saved on USB memory and used
to restrict the functionality that is available to each user.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash memory.
■ USB memory format
2
3
4
1 [DEC]/[INC] keys
These keys increment or decrement the value of the
parameter at which the cursor is located in the screen, in
steps of -1/+1.
B Cursor keys
These keys move the cursor up/down/left/right in the
screen.
C Dial
This dial continuously increments or decrements the value
of the parameter at which the cursor is located in the
screen.
D [ENTER] key
This key is used to switch a button in the screen on/off, or
to confirm a change you make.
22
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Only USB memory that is 2 GB or less in capacity
and is formatted in FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 is supported. If the USB memory is formatted in any
other way, you must reformat it in the USER SETUP
screen.
■ Write protection
Some USB memory has write protection that prevents
data from being erased inadvertently. If your USB memory
contains important data, we suggest that you use its write
protect feature to prevent accidental erasure.
Conversely, you must make sure that your USB memory’s
write protect feature is disabled before you attempt to
save data to it.
CAUTION
• The ACCESS indicator will appear in the upper part of the
screen while data is being accessed, such as during saving,
loading, or deleting. During this time, you must not disconnect the USB memory from the USB connector or power-off
the LS9. Doing so may damage your USB memory, or damage
the data in the LS9 or in the USB memory.
Rear panel
Rear panel
LS9-16
4
2
5
L
M
5
67
67
K
8
1
3
Parts and their function
2
J
LS9-32
K
L
M
J
4
2
8
9
1
3
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
23
Rear panel
1 INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}
LS9-16
LS9-32
These are balanced XLR-3-31 female input jacks for inputting analog
audio signals from line level devices or microphones. The nominal
input level is -62 dBu – +10 dBu. Resettable head amps are provided
on all jacks, and head amp settings can be stored in scene memory.
Male XLR plug
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
B OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16}
C Slots {1–2}
LS9-16
LS9-16
LS9-32
LS9-32
These are XLR-3-32 male output jacks for outputting analog audio signals. These are used mainly to output MIX/
MATRIX channel signals. The nominal output level is +4
dBu.
Female XLR plug
2 (hot)
3 (cold)
1 (ground)
NOTE
• The nominal output level of OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} is +4 dBu
(maximum level is +24 dBu), but if necessary this can be changed
by an internal switch to -2 dBu (maximum level is +18 dBu). (A fee
will be charged for this change.) For details, contact to your
Yamaha dealer listed at the end of this manual.
24
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards can be installed in
these slots to provide additional input/output ports. The
LS9-16 has one slot, and the LS9-32 has two slots. Each
slot can input/output a maximum of 16 channels of signals.
Rear panel
5
6
7
L
8
M
K
J
2
LS9-16
4
5
6
7
8
9
LS9-16
J
LS9-32
D NETWORK connector
This connector allows the LS9 to be connected to a Windows computer via a CAT3 (transfer rate: maximum 10
Mbps) or CAT5 (transfer rate: maximum 100 Mbps) compatible Ethernet cable. This is used mainly for controlling
mix parameters or editing scene memories and libraries
from the dedicated “LS9 Editor” application program.
K
Parts and their function
4
M
L
LS9-32
NOTE
• The DME-N Network Driver required for connection to the NETWORK connector, the Studio Manager required for running LS9
Editor, and the LS9 Editor itself can downloaded from the Yamaha
website listed below.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
E WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors
These are BNC connectors used to transmit and receive
word clock signals to and from an external device. The
WORD CLOCK IN connector is internally terminated by
a 75 ohm resistor.
F 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack
This is a coaxial jack that outputs the digital audio signal
of a specified channel in consumer format (IEC-60958).
This is used mainly to output STEREO/MONO channel
signals.
G 2TR IN DIGITAL jack
This is a coaxial jack that inputs a stereo digital audio signal in consumer format (IEC-60958). The signal input
from this jack can be patched to any input channel.
J AC IN connector
Connect the included power cable to this connector to supply power to the unit.
K POWER switch
This switch turns the power on/off.
L Grounding screw
To ensure safe operation, be sure to ground the LS9
securely. The included power cable has a three-conductor
plug, so if the AC outlet is grounded the LS9 will be
grounded appropriately. If the AC outlet is not grounded,
establish a secure ground connection from this screw. Correctly grounding the unit is an effective way to eliminate
hum and interference noise.
M Cooling fan vent
This is the vent for the cooling fan inside the console.
When placing the console, be careful not to block this
vent.
H MIDI IN/OUT connectors
These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI
messages to and from external MIDI devices. The MIDI
IN connector receives messages from an external device,
and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from
the LS9. These are used mainly for recording LS9 parameter operations or scene/library changes on an external
device, or for remotely operating LS9 parameters.
I LAMP connector (LS9-32 only)
This is an XLR-4-31 connector that supplies power to a
separately sold gooseneck lamp (e.g., Yamaha LA1L). The
brightness of the lamp can be adjusted in the screen.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
25
Front panel
Front panel
1
2
1 PHONES LEVEL control
This adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the
PHONES OUT jack 2.
B PHONES OUT (headphone output) jack
This is a headphone jack for monitoring the MONITOR
OUT or CUE signal.
26
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 3
Basic operations on the LS9
Basic operations in the top panel
Here we explain basic operations you’ll perform in the LS9’s top panel.
About the [HOME] key
The [HOME] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
restores the LS9’s panel to its basic state (home position).
Selecting the fader layer
3
Basic operations on the LS9
This chapter explains the various user interfaces you’ll use to operate the
LS9, and basic operations.
The channel module section of the top panel lets you
switch between combinations of channels to be controlled
(“fader layers”) so that you can control input channels,
output channels, or monitor levels.
Press the keys of the LAYER section to switch the combination of channels you want to control.
When you press the [HOME] key, the panel will change as
follows.
• The display will show the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen, where you can view all parameters of the
selected channel.
LS9-16
LS9-32
• The channel level function will be assigned to the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode will be defeated).
The [HOME] key will blink if the display is showing any
screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, or if
SENDS ON FADER mode is active. In such cases, you
will find it convenient to press the [HOME] key to restore
the panel to home position (the [HOME] key will change
to steadily lit), and then proceed with operations.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
27
Basic operations in the top panel
The combination of channels corresponding to each key is as follows.
LS9-16
LAYER section key
LAYER [1-16]
INPUT CH 1–16
STEREO
ST IN 1–2
LAYER [17-32]
INPUT CH 17–32
STEREO
ST IN 3–4
MIX 1–16
STEREO
—
Any desired channels
STEREO
Any desired channels
LAYER [MASTER]
LAYER [CUSTOM FADER]
LS9-32
LAYER section key
LAYER [1-32]
INPUT CH 1–16
INPUT CH 17–32
STEREO
ST IN 1–4
LAYER [33-64]
INPUT CH 33–48
INPUT CH 49–64
STEREO
ST IN 1–4
LAYER [MASTER]
LAYER [CUSTOM FADER]
MIX 1–16
MATRIX 1–8
—
MONO
Any desired channels
HINT
• On the LS9-16, MATRIX channels and MONO channels are not assigned to the fader layers that are preset.
If you want to use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to control the MATRIX channels or MONO channel,
you can assign them to the custom fader layer (→ p. 91).
28
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
STEREO
—
STEREO
Any desired channels
Basic operations in the top panel
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Use the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section when you
want to use functions other than mix parameters, or when
you want to change various settings.
3
Basic operations on the LS9
You can use the encoders and keys of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to directly operate the mix parameters
(EQ, pan, dynamics, etc.) of the currently selected channel
from the top panel.
Selecting functions
When you press one of the keys in the DISPLAY
ACCESS section, the corresponding screen will appear in
the display. If the screen consists of more than one page,
you can switch between pages by pressing the same key
repeatedly. For example if you press the [SCENE MEMORY] key, the SCENE MEMORY screen will appear,
where you can store or recall scene memories.
1 Make sure that the desired fader layer is
selected in the LAYER section.
2 Use the [SEL] keys of the channel module
section, STEREO section, and ST IN section
to select the channel that you want to operate.
The currently selected channel is indicated in the
upper left of the screen.
For stereo channels (STEREO channels, ST IN channels), you will alternate between the L-channel and Rchannel each time you press the [SEL] key.
HINT
• If AUTO CHANNEL SELECT is turned on in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can select a channel
simply by operating its [ON] key or fader, without having to
press its [SEL] key.
HINT
• If you press the lit DISPLAY ACCESS key while a popup
screen is displayed, the popup screen will close.
• If you press and hold down the DISPLAY ACCESS section
key, the previously displayed screen will appear.
3 Turn the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the desired parameters.
The parameter assigned to each encoder will change.
Before operating the EQ encoders, you’ll need to use
the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID],
and EQ [LOW] keys to select the band you want to
control.
HINT
• By pressing one of the SELECTED CHANNEL section’s
encoders inward, you can also access a popup window where
you can edit detailed settings for the parameter (→ p. 194).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
29
Viewing the display
Viewing the display
Here we explain the various types of information shown in the display.
Constant display area
1
2
5
D User name / status
This shows the name of the user who is currently loggedin (authenticated and permitted to operate the console).
Other indicators are shown here if oscillator or talkback is
on, or if internal memory or USB memory is being
accessed.
When oscillator is on
3
4
When talkback is on
While recording to USB memory
While playing from USB memory
1 Selected channel
This shows the number, name, and icon of the channel
currently selected by its [SEL] key for operations. (For
details on assigning a name → p. 34, For details on selecting an icon → p. 55, 69) You can also move the cursor to
this area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
change the selected channel.
B Scene memory
This shows the number and name of the scene that is currently selected for store/recall operations.
An “R” (Read Only) indication is shown for read-only
scenes or write-protected scenes. If you have modified the
parameters from their most recently stored or recalled
state, an “E” (Edited) indication is shown. Move the cursor to the scene number, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to change the scene number, and press the [ENTER]
key to recall the scene.
NOTE
• Simply changing the scene that is shown here will not execute a
store/recall operation.
While accessing internal memory when storing
USB memory or a scene
E ST IN level
This indicates the on/off status and input level of ST IN
channels 1–4. This shows a gray knob and black index
when on, or a dark gray knob and black index when off.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, this shows the on/off status
and send level of the signal sent from ST IN channels 1–4
to the MIX bus. When on, the knob will be a color corresponding to the send-destination (the same type of color
as the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section), and
the indices will be white. When off, the knob will be gray
and the indices will be black.
• To execute a store or recall operation, access the SCENE MEMORY screen and use the STORE/RECALL buttons in the screen
(→ p. 129), or press a user-defined key to which you’ve assigned
the scene store/recall operation (→ p. 132).
• You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the constant
display area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to change
the scene number. This scene number will blink if the most
recently stored or recalled scene is different than the currently
selected scene.
C MIDI
The MIDI indicator will appear when MIDI messages are
received.
30
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
HINT
• In SENDS ON FADER mode, the send-destination bus is shown
blinking at the right of the scene number.
Viewing the display
Main area
The contents of the main area will depend on the currently
selected function.
■ Popup windows
Some windows show lists or details of specific parameters
in the screen. These are called “popup windows.”
Popup window
■ SELECTED CH VIEW screen
This screen shows all mix parameters of the currently
selected channel. To access this screen, press the [HOME]
key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
By operating the knobs and buttons in a popup window,
you can edit more detailed parameters. In some popup
windows, there are several buttons called “tool buttons” in
the upper part of the window. You can use these tool buttons to recall or copy/paste library data.
■ Various function screens
These screens allow you to access functions and settings
other than channel mix parameters. To access each of
these screens, press the appropriate key of the DISPLAY
ACCESS section.
Basic operations on the LS9
3
To close the popup window and return to the previous
screen, move the cursor to the “×” symbol or the CLOSE
button, and press the [ENTER] key. (You can also close
the popup window and return to the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen by pressing the [HOME] key.)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
31
Viewing the display
The on-screen user interface
The interface shown in the screen of the LS9 includes the
following items.
■ Cursor
The blinking red and yellow frame displayed in the screen
is called the “cursor.”
The cursor is used to specify the object of your operations.
Use the cursor keys of the data entry section to move the
cursor up/down/left/right.
Cursor
■ Knobs and faders
Knobs in the screen are used to view or edit the values of
the corresponding parameters. Normally, you will move
the cursor to a knob and use the dial or [DEC]/[INC] keys
of the data entry section to edit the value. The current
value is shown in numerical form immediately below the
knob. Some knobs will move in tandem with the encoders
of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
Knob
Faders in the screen are mainly used to view or edit the
level of the corresponding channels. They will move in
tandem with the faders of the top panel. You can also
move the cursor to a fader and use the dial or [DEC]/
[INC] keys of the data entry section to edit the value. The
current value is shown in numerical form immediately
below the fader.
■ Buttons
Buttons in the screen are used to execute specific functions, to switch parameters on/off, or to select one of several choices.
To execute a button’s function, to switch it on/off, or to
select a desired item, move the cursor to the desired button
and press the [ENTER] key of the data entry section.
By moving the cursor to a button that shows the ▼ symbol
and then pressing the [Enter] key, you can open another
popup window where you can specify details.
Buttons
Fader
■ List window
A window like the following will appear when you are
selecting an item from a list, such as when selecting a
function for a user-defined key.
Within the list, the constantly-highlighted item in the center is the selected item. To scroll the list up or down, use
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
List window
32
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Viewing the display
■ Keyboard window
● CAUTION dialog box
The keyboard window shown below will appear when you
assign a name or comment to a scene or library, or when
you assign a name to a channel. To enter characters, move
the cursor to the desired character in the window and press
the [ENTER] key. (For the procedure → p. 34)
This dialog box will display a warning if a fatal error
has occurred in the operation you attempted to execute. When you move the cursor to the CLOSE button
and press the [ENTER] key, the operation will be forcibly cancelled, and the dialog box will disappear.
Keyboard window
Basic operations on the LS9
3
■ Dialog box
When you need to confirm the operation you just performed or when a problem has occurred, a dialog box will
appear, asking you to confirm the operation or displaying
a warning.
● CONFIRMATION dialog box
This dialog box will appear when confirmation is
required. Move the cursor to the OK button to execute
the operation (or to the CANCEL button to cancel it),
and press the [ENTER] key.
● ATTENTION dialog box
This dialog box will display a warning when a problem has occurred with the operation you are attempting to execute.
If you move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key, the operation will be executed in a way
that circumvents the problem. If you move the cursor
to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key,
the operation will be cancelled.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
33
Assigning a name
Assigning a name
On the LS9, you can assign a name to each input channel and output channel, and assign a title
to each scene or library data item when you save it.
To assign a name, you will use the keyboard window that is shown in the main area.
1 Access the window where you can assign a
● DEL button
name.
Deletes the character to the right of the text cursor.
The illustration below shows the SCENE STORE
popup window that is used when assigning a name to a
scene.
● BS button
Text input box
Deletes the character to the left of the text cursor.
● SHIFT LOCK button
Switches between uppercase and lowercase alphabetical characters. You’ll be able to enter uppercase characters and symbols if this button is on, and lowercase
characters and numerals if this button is off.
● ENTER button
Finalizes the name you entered. In the SCENE
STORE popup window, you can obtain the same result
by moving the cursor to the STORE button and pressing the [ENTER] key.
4 When you’ve entered the name, move the
cursor to the STORE button or the ENTER
button and press the [ENTER] key.
A yellow vertical line called the “text cursor” is shown
to indicate the current location in the box that displays
the characters that have been input.
2 Use the on-screen keyboard to enter text.
Move the cursor (the red frame) to the desired character in the keyboard window and press the [ENTER]
key; the character will be entered in the text input box,
and the text cursor (yellow vertical line) in the box will
move to the right.
3 Enter the subsequent characters in the
same way.
While entering characters, you can use the following
buttons in the keyboard window.
● COPY button
Copies the entire text string from the text box into
buffer memory.
● PASTE button
Inserts the text string copied using the COPY button at
the location of the text cursor.
● CLEAR button
Erases all characters that were entered in the text input
box.
● ← / → buttons
Moves the text cursor forward or backward in the text
input box.
● INS button
Inserts a space (blank) at the text cursor.
34
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
The name you entered will be applied.
HINT
• The basic procedure is the same in the windows that let you
assign names to channels or other types of library data. If
you’re entering a channel name, the name will be updated
immediately, without your having to use the ENTER button.
Using the tool buttons
Using the tool buttons
The title bar at the top of some popup windows and screens contains tool buttons that provide
additional functions. You can use these buttons to recall related libraries, or to copy the parameters of a channel to a different channel. Here we will explain how to use the tool buttons.
Tool buttons like the following are shown in the ATT/
HPF/EQ, DYNAMICS 1/2, GEQ, and EFFECT popup
windows and screens.
1
2
3
3
Using libraries
4
5
1 LIB (library) button
This button recalls the library that is related to the current
popup window or screen (EQ, dynamics, GEQ, or effect
library).
B DEF (default) button
This button restores the currently selected channel (EQ/
dynamics) or rack (effect) to the default state.
C COPY button
This button copies the settings of the currently selected
channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect). The copied
settings are held in buffer memory (a memory area for
temporary storage).
D PASTE button
This button pastes the settings held in buffer memory into
the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect).
Here we will explain the basic procedure for using libraries. You can use libraries to store (save) or recall (load)
the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect).
The following libraries are provided.
•
•
•
•
•
Input EQ library
Output EQ library
Dynamics library
GEQ library
Effect library
Basic operations on the LS9
About the tool buttons
The operating procedure is essentially the same for all
libraries.
● Recalling data from a library
1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons.
To access each popup window or screen, proceed as
follows.
[ ATT/HPF/EQ popup window ]
[ DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window ]
E COMPARE button
This button exchanges the settings held in buffer memory
with the settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/
dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect).
NOTE
• You cannot press the PASTE button or COMPARE button if no settings have been copied into buffer memory.
In addition, some screens have the following tool buttons.
• SET ALL ...............Turns on all of the parameters in the
screen.
• CLEAR ALL..........Turns off all of the parameters in the
screen.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
35
Using the tool buttons
In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, move the cursor
to the knob corresponding to EQ or dynamics 1/2, or
to a button that has a ▼ symbol, and press the
[ENTER] key.
[ RACK screen ]
In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press
the [RACK 1-4] or [RACK 5-8] key.
HINT
HINT
• If POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING KNOBS is turned
on in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
access the popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section encoder that corresponds to EQ or
dynamics 1/2.
• If you want to change the assignment (31BandGEQ,
Flex15GEQ, or effect) to each rack, simultaneously press the
[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] to access the VIRTUAL
RACK screen (→ p. 158).
3 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the
[ RACK screen ]
In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [RACK
1-4] or [RACK 5-8] key.
toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to
access the popup window of the corresponding library.
1
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to
recall.
The method of selecting a channel/rack will depend on
the type of popup window or screen that is currently
displayed.
[ ATT/HPF/EQ popup window ]
[ DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window ]
Press a [SEL] key on the panel, or move the cursor to
the selected channel in the constant display area of the
screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
2
1 List
This shows the settings that are saved in the library.
The highlighted line indicates the data that is selected
for operations. Read-only data is indicated by an “R”
symbol.
B RECALL button
This button recalls the settings selected in the list into
the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect).
HINT
• The right side of the list shows information about the corresponding data (the dynamics type or effect type used, etc.).
For the dynamics library, a symbol is shown to indicate
whether the data can be recalled by dynamics 1 or 2.
Selected channel
4 Move the cursor to the list, and select the
recall-source library number by using the
dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to move the
highlighted line in the list.
In some cases, the data selected as the recall-source
cannot be recalled into the currently selected channel/
rack. Each library has the following limitations.
● Dynamics library
The dynamics library holds three types of data;
Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2 for input channels, and
Dynamics 1 for output channels. Recall is not possible
if you’ve selected a type that is not supported by the
corresponding dynamics processor.
36
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using the tool buttons
The GEQ library holds two types of data; 31BandGEQ
or Flex15GEQ. Recall is not possible if you’ve
selected a type that is different than the recall-destination GEQ.
● Effect library
Effect settings whose effect type is “HQ.Pitch” or
“Freeze” can be recalled only to racks 5 or 7. They
cannot be recalled if any other rack is selected.
If you select a library item number that cannot be
recalled, the RECALL button will be disabled.
5
Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The selected data will be loaded into the channel (EQ/
dynamics) or rack (GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2.
4 Move the cursor to the list, and use the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the storedestination library number.
5 After you’ve selected the store-destination,
move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The LIBRARY STORE popup window will appear,
allowing you to assign a name to the data. For details
on entering text, refer to “Assigning a name” (→
p. 34).
6 When you’ve assigned a name to the data,
move the cursor to the STORE button in the
LIBRARY STORE popup window and press
the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
HINT
• You also have the option of displaying a dialog box that asks
you to confirm the recall operation (→ p. 194).
3
Basic operations on the LS9
● GEQ library
● Storing data in a library
1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons.
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) whose
settings you want to store, or the rack in
which the GEQ/effect whose settings you
want to store is already mounted.
3 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the
toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to
access the popup window or screen of the
corresponding library.
7 To execute the Store operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The current settings will be stored in the library number you selected in step 4. If you decide to cancel the
Store operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
HINT
• Even after you’ve stored the settings, you can edit the title of
the data by moving the cursor to the data name in the list and
pressing the [ENTER] key to access the LIBRARY TITLE
EDIT popup window. However, you can’t rename read-only
data (indicated by the “R” symbol).
NOTE
• Please be aware that if you store to a location that already
contains data, the existing data will be overwritten. (However,
you can’t overwrite read-only data.)
• Don’t turn off the power while the Store operation is in
progress. The data will not be stored correctly if you do so.
STORE button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
37
Using the tool buttons
● Erasing data from a library
1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons.
2 Move the cursor to the LIB button in the
toolbar and press the [ENTER] key to
access the popup window of the corresponding library.
Initializing settings
Here’s how you can return the EQ/dynamics settings of
the currently selected channel or the effect settings of a
rack to their initial state.
HINT
• GEQ settings can be initialized using the FLAT button in the
screen.
1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons.
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(effect) whose settings you want to initialize.
3 Move the cursor to the DEF button and
press the [ENTER] key.
1
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Initialize
operation.
1 CLEAR button
Clears (erases) the data that is selected in the list.
3 Move the cursor to the list, and use the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the library
item number that you want to clear.
4 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
5 To execute the Clear operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The data you selected in step 3 will be cleared. If you
decide to cancel the Clear operation, move the cursor
to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• You can’t clear read-only data (data indicated by an “R” symbol).
38
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
4 To execute the Initialize operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The EQ/dynamics settings of the channel you selected
in step 2 or the effect settings of the rack will be initialized. If you decide to cancel the Initialize operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button instead
of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
Using the tool buttons
Here’s how you can copy the EQ/dynamics settings of the
currently selected channel or the GEQ/effect settings of
the currently selected rack to buffer memory, and then
paste them to a different channel or rack.
Copy/paste is limited to the following combinations.
• Between EQ of input channels
• Between EQ of output channels
• Between dynamics for which the same type (GATE,
DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER) is
selected
• Between effects mounted in a rack
1
Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons.
2 Select the channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect) whose settings you want to
copy.
3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The current settings will be held in buffer memory.
4 Select the paste-destination channel or
rack.
5 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and
Comparing two sets of settings
By using the compare button in the toolbar, you can
exchange the settings held in the buffer memory with the
settings of the currently selected channel (EQ/dynamics)
or rack (GEQ/effect). This is convenient when you want to
temporarily save an interim result of your editing, and
then compare it with subsequent edits.
1 Access a popup window or screen that contains tool buttons.
2 Select a channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack
(GEQ/effect).
3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and
press the [ENTER] key to save the current
settings in the buffer memory.
This will be the first version of your settings.
3
Basic operations on the LS9
Copying and pasting settings
4 Edit the settings of the currently selected
channel (EQ/dynamics) or rack (GEQ/
effect).
This will be the second version of your settings.
NOTE
• Please note that if you copy other settings before you execute
the Compare operation, the buffer memory will be overwritten.
• After saving the first version of your settings in buffer memory,
you can also initialize the channel/rack and create the second
version of your settings from scratch.
press the [ENTER] key.
The settings of the channel (EQ/dynamics) or the rack
(GEQ/effect) you selected in step 2 will be pasted.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
39
Using the tool buttons
5 When you want to compare the first and
second versions of your settings, move the
cursor to the COMPARE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the first version of your settings. At
this time, the second version of your settings will be
saved in buffer memory.
COPY
The first set
The first set
Buffer memory
Edit the settings
(The second set)
The first set
Buffer memory
COMPARE
The first set
The second set
Buffer memory
6 With the cursor left at the COMPARE but-
ton, repeatedly press the [ENTER] key to
compare the first and second versions of
settings.
Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the current settings will be exchanged with the settings saved in
buffer memory. Unlike the Paste operation, this operation lets you return to the previous settings at any time
as long as the buffer memory has not been overwritten.
HINT
• The settings held in buffer memory can also be used by the
Paste operation.
• If you operate the tool buttons for a rack in which Flex15GEQ
(of the two types of GEQ) is selected, A and B will be individually exchanged with the buffer memory.
40
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 4
Connections and setup
This chapter explains how to connect the audio inputs and outputs, how to
perform the setup necessary when starting the LS9 for the first time, and
how to check the operation.
Connections
■ Analog input connections • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Connections and setup
4
LS9-16
LS9-32
Connect microphones or line level devices to INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}. When the LS9 is in its initial state,
the signal from each INPUT jack is patched to the following channels.
For the LS9-16
Analog input jacks
INPUT jacks 1–16
For the LS9-32
Input channels
INPUT channels 1–16
Analog input jacks
INPUT jacks 1–32
Input channels
INPUT channels 1–32
NOTE
• This patching can be changed as necessary (→ p. 99). For example if you want to connect a stereo line-level device, you can assign
two INPUT jacks to a ST IN channel so that the left and right channels can be operated in tandem for convenience.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
41
Connections
■ Analog output connections• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Monitor speakers
Power amp
LS9-16
Power amp
Power amp
Monitor speakers (foldback)
Main speakers
OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} can be connected to your main speakers, monitor speakers (foldback), or monitor speakers for the engineer.
When the LS9 is in its initial state, the signal from the following channels is patched to each OMNI OUT jack.
This patching can be changed as necessary (→ p. 95).
For the LS9-16
For the LS9-32
Analog output jacks
42
Output channels
Analog output jacks
Output channels
OMNI OUT jacks 1–6
MIX channels 1–6
OMNI OUT jacks 1–14
MIX channels 1–14
OMNI OUT jacks 7–8
STEREO L/R channel
OMNI OUT jacks 15–16
STEREO L/R channel
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Connections
■ Digital input/output connections
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
e.g., CD recorder
LS9-16
Power amp
Digital I/O card
Speaker processor
(e.g., Yamaha DME64N)
Connections and setup
4
Main speakers
Use the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks or the mini-YGDAI slot to send or receive digital audio
signals between the LS9 and external equipment. When the LS9 is in the default state, the signals of the following channels are patched to the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks and slots. This patching can
be changed as necessary (→ p. 95, 99).
For the LS9-16
Digital input/output jacks
2TR IN DIGITAL jack (L/R)
For the LS9-32
Input/output channels
Digital input/output jacks
Input/output channels
No assignment
2TR IN DIGITAL jack (L/R)
No assignment
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R)
STEREO L/R channel
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R)
STEREO L/R channel
Slot input channels 1–8
INPUT channels 17–24
Slot 1 input channels 1–8
INPUT channels 33–40
Slot input channels 9–16
INPUT channels 25–32
Slot 1 input channels 9–16
INPUT channels 41–48
Slot output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 2 input channels 1–8
INPUT channels 49–56
Slot output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 2 input channels 9–16
INPUT channels 57–64
Slot 1 output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 1 output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 2 output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 2 output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
The LS9’s 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks are used to transfer two-channel digital audio signals
to or from an external device (e.g., CD player or CD/MD recorder).
By installing a separately sold digital I/O card in a slot, you can add more input/output jacks to the LS9, or
connect a DAW system or speaker processor.
For details on the types of I/O cards that can be used, refer to the appendix at the end of this manual (→
p. 274). Check the Yamaha website for the most recent information on I/O cards.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
NOTE
• In order for digital audio signal to be transmitted or received via the 2TR IN DIGITAL/2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks
or slots, the word clock of both devices must be synchronized (→ p. 46).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
43
Installing an option card
Installing an option card
Before you install an I/O card in a slot, you must check the Yamaha website to verify whether the
LS9 supports that card and to verify the number of other Yamaha cards or third-party cards that
can be used in conjunction with it.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
4 Fasten the card using the screws attached
To install an option I/O card, proceed as follows.
1 Make sure that the power is turned off.
2 Loosen the screws that fasten the slot, and
to the card.
Be aware that damage or malfunctions may occur if
the card is not fastened.
remove the slot cover.
Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place.
CAUTION
• Before installing separately sold I/O cards into the console,
you must make sure that the console’s power switch is
turned off. Otherwise, malfunctions or electrical shock may
occur.
LS9-16
Slot cover
3 Align both edges of the card with the guide
rails inside the slot, and insert the card into
the slot.
Push the card all the way into the slot to ensure that the
contacts of the card are correctly inserted into the connector inside the slot.
LS9-16
Card
44
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Setup required when starting up
Setup required when starting up
Here we explain the setup that is required when starting the LS9 for the first time. So that you
can check whether the connections are correct, we also describe the basic procedure for getting
the input signal from an INPUT channel to be output from the STEREO bus.
3 Move the cursor to the scene list, and use
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to make
“000 Initial Data” appear in the highlighted
line in the center of the list.
We will power-on the LS9 and recall (load) the initial setting scene (scene number 000).
NOTE
• We are recalling the default setting scene here so that the remaining operations in this chapter can be performed appropriately. In
actual operation, there’s no need to recall the default setting scene
each time you start up.
1 Power-on the LS9.
When you power-on the LS9, you must turn on your
equipment in the order of the LS9 → power amp or
monitor system. (Use the opposite order when powering-off.)
4 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
Scene number “000” will be loaded, and the mix
parameters will return to their initial state.
4
Connections and setup
Returning the current scene to the
initial state
NOTE
• Be aware that when scene number “000” is loaded, the input
patch, output patch, internal effect/GEQ, and HA (head amp)
settings will also return to their initial state. (However, the
word clock source selection will not be affected.)
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key to access the
SCENE LIST screen.
In this screen you can recall or store scene memories.
1
2
1 Scene list
B RECALL button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
45
Setup required when starting up
Word clock connection and settings
“Word clock” is the clock data that provides the timing
basis for audio signals to be processed digitally.
If a digital I/O card installed in a slot is digitally connected to an external device such as a DAW system, CD
player, or HDR (hard disk recorder), and you want digital
audio signals to be transmitted or received between the
LS9 and the external device, you must synchronize the
word clock of the respective devices.
In order for this to occur, one device must be the word
clock master (transmitting device) and the other device
must be the slave (receiving device), and the slave device
must synchronize to the master device.
If you want to set the LS9 as the word clock slave so that it
will synchronize to the word clock supplied from an external device, you can either use the clock data included in
the digital audio signal received from a digital I/O card, or
provide dedicated word clock to the WORD CLOCK IN
jack located on the rear panel.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
In this screen you can make various settings that affect
the entire LS9.
1
LS9-32
1 WORD CLOCK button
2 Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK but-
Digital audio device
+
Clock data
ton in the MIXER SETUP field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear,
allowing you to select the clock source on which the
LS9 will operate.
Slot
HDR or other digital
audio device (word
clock master)
LS9 (word clock slave)
Digital audio signal
Clock data
Slot
WORDCLOCK
IN jack
Digital MTR or other
digital audio device
(word clock master)
LS9 (word clock slave)
In either case, you must use the following procedure to
specify the word clock source that the LS9 will use for
operation.
HINT
• The following procedure is not necessary if you are using the LS9
as the word clock master, or if no external devices are digitally
connected to the LS9.
46
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
LS9-32
Setup required when starting up
clock source to which the LS9 will synchronize.
● If you want the clock source to be the clock
data included in a digital audio signal from a
slot
Turn on a valid 2-channel button for the corresponding
slot.
● If you want the clock source to be the clock
data included in the digital audio signal from
the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack
Turn on the 2TR IN button.
NOTE
• If a conventional CD player or similar device is connected to
the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack, use that device as the clock master.
In some cases, noise may occur when synchronization is lost.
● If you want the word clock data from the
WORD CLOCK IN jack to be the clock source
Turn on the WC IN button.
● If you want the
LS9’s internal clock to be the
clock source
Turn on the INT48k (sampling frequency: 48 kHz) or
INT44.1k (sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz) button.
If the LS9 is correctly operating with the new clock,
the symbol located immediately above the corresponding button will turn light blue. Also, the frequency of
the selected clock source is shown in the upper left of
the window.
HA (head amp) settings
Here we explain how to adjust the HA (head amp) gain,
switch phantom power on/off, and switch the phase for
each input channel to which you’ve connected a mic or
instrument.
When setting HA-related parameters on the LS9, you can
either use the SELECTED CHANNEL section or the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen in the display to make settings for a single channel at a time, or use the popup window to make settings for eight channels at a time.
● Making HA settings for one channel at a
time
Select the channel that you want to set, and use the
SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen of the display to make HA settings.
1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is con-
4
Connections and setup
3 Use the buttons in the window to select the
nected to the INPUT jack (→ p. 41).
2 Make sure that the fader layer that contains
the desired channel is selected in the
LAYER section.
If necessary, use the keys of the LAYER section to
switch fader layers.
4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
LS9-16
LS9-32
NOTE
• The word clock setting is maintained even if you turn off the
power. If you’ve set the LS9 to synchronize to the word clock
of an external device, be aware that an error message will
appear and the system will not operate correctly if the external device is powered-off when you power-cycle the LS9 or if
the connection is disconnected.
3 Press the [SEL] key of the channel for the
INPUT jack you want to operate, so that the
LED is lit.
That channel is now selected for operations in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
1
2
1 [SEL] key
B Meter LEDs
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
47
Setup required when starting up
4 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The [HOME] key restores the LS9’s panel to its basic
state (home position). When you press this key, the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display, showing all the parameters of the channel that is
selected by its [SEL] key. Also, SENDS ON FADER
mode will be defeated, and the channel level function
will be assigned to the faders.
5 Use either of the following methods to
adjust the HA gain of the selected channel.
● Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA
GAIN] encoder. When you do so, the GAIN knob in
the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will move in tandem. (If any other screen is displayed, a small popup
window will show the value.)
● Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen
Use the cursor keys of the DATA ENTRY section to
move the cursor to the GAIN knob in the screen, and
use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the HA
gain.
In either case, the level of that channel is shown by the
meter LEDs in the channel module section.
If the meter does not move even though a signal is
being input, check whether the INPUT jack is connected appropriately, and whether the meter detection
point might have been set to POST ON (immediately
after the [ON] key) (→ p. 155).
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
6 To make HA settings for another channel,
use the [SEL] keys to select another channel and make settings in the same way.
1
1 GAIN knob
48
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Setup required when starting up
Here’s how to access a popup window where you can
make HA settings for a group of eight channels.
1 Make sure that a mic or instrument is connected to the INPUT jack (→ p. 41).
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
2
1 +48V button
B GAIN knob
C ø (phase) button
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access this popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.
5 To adjust the HA gain, move the cursor to
the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the
window, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys.
The input level of the channel is shown by the level
meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN
knob in the screen.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
4
Connections and setup
● Making HA settings for a group of eight
channels
6 To turn on phantom power for each chan-
nel, move the cursor to the +48V button in
the HA field of the screen, and press the
[ENTER] key.
1 HA popup button
B GAIN knob
3 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the
[SEL] keys of the channel module section
to select the channel for the INPUT jack you
want to control.
4 Move the cursor to the HA popup button or
GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The HA/PATCH popup window will appear, allowing
you to adjust the HA gain, switch phantom power on/
off, and switch the phase in groups of eight channels.
This popup window shows the parameters for the eight
channels that include the channel you selected in step
2.
The +48V button will turn on (red), and phantom
power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT
jack.
NOTE
• If you want to use phantom power, you must first turn ON the
+48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen.
7 To switch the phase of each channel
between normal and reverse phase, move
the cursor to the ø button in the HA field
and press the [ENTER] key.
The ø button will change from black to red, and the
phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed.
8 If you want to operate the HA of a channel
that is not currently shown in the popup
window, use the [SEL] key to select that
channel, and then make settings for it.
1
2
For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the
popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]
key will change the popup window to INPUT channels
9–16.
3
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
49
Setup required when starting up
Sending an input channel signal to
the STEREO bus
Here we explain how to adjust the level of a signal sent
from a gain-adjusted input channel to the STEREO bus,
adjust its pan (INPUT channel) or balance (ST IN channel), and monitor it from external speakers connected to
the STEREO channel. The following procedure will let
you check whether the mic, instrument, and main speakers
are connected appropriately.
When setting the level or pan/balance of a signal being
sent to the STEREO bus, you can either use the
SELECTED CHANNEL section or the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen in the display to make settings for a single
channel at a time, or use the popup window to make settings for eight channels at a time.
3 Make sure that the ST button in the screen
is on (white characters on a pink background).
The ST button is an on/off switch for the signal sent
from that channel to the STEREO bus. If this is off
(gray characters on a black background), move the
cursor to ST button and press the [ENTER] key.
4 In the STEREO MASTER section of the top
panel, make sure that the STEREO channel
[ON] key is on, and raise the STEREO channel fader to 0 dB.
● Controlling the signal sent to the STEREO bus, one channel at a time
Here’s how to select the input channel that you want to
control, and use the top panel faders/encoders, the
SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen of the display to control the level and pan/
balance.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
1
2
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
2
1 STEREO channel [ON] key
B STEREO channel fader
5 In the channel module section or the ST IN
section, make sure that the [ON] key of the
currently selected channel is turned on.
1 ST button
B PAN/BAL knob
2 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the
[SEL] keys of the channel module section
to select the channel for the INPUT jack you
want to control.
50
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Setup required when starting up
6 Raise the fader of the currently selected
channel (or the encoder for a ST IN channel) to obtain an appropriate volume.
In this state, you should hear sound from the speaker
system patched to the STEREO channel. If you don’t
hear sound, watch the stereo meter located at the right
of the display to see whether the LR meter is moving.
● Controlling the signal sent to the STEREO bus, eight channels at a time
Here’s how to access a popup window in which the level
and pan/balance of the signal sent to the STEREO bus can
be adjusted for eight channels at a time.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
1
2
4
Connections and setup
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
● If the LR meter is moving
It is possible that the output jack connected to your
speaker system is not correctly patched to the STEREO channel. Check the output port patching (→
p. 95).
● If the LR meter is not moving
It is possible that the channel’s [ON] key is off, or that
the ST button is turned off in the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen. Check the setting of the [ON] key or ST
button.
HINT
• You can also use headphones connected to the front panel
PHONES OUT jack to monitor the signal that is being output
from the STEREO channel (→ p. 146).
7 To adjust the pan/balance of the signal that
is sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus, turn the SELECTED CHANNEL
section [PAN] encoder.
When you turn the [PAN] encoder, the PAN/BAL
knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will also
move in tandem with it. You can obtain the same result
by moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
8 To control another channel, use the [SEL]
keys to select another channel and make
settings in the same way.
1 PAN popup button
B PAN/BAL knob
2 Use the keys of the LAYER section and the
[SEL] keys of the channel module section
to select the channel for the INPUT jack you
want to control.
3 Move the cursor to the PAN popup button
or PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The TO STEREO/MONO popup window will appear,
allowing you to adjust the level and pan/balance of the
signal sent to the STEREO bus, eight channels at a
time. This popup window shows the parameters for the
eight channels that include the channel you selected in
step 2.
1
2
1 ST button
B PAN/BAL knob
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
51
Setup required when starting up
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access this popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.
4 In the STEREO MASTER section of the top
panel, make sure that the STEREO channel
[ON] key is on, and raise the STEREO channel fader to 0 dB.
5 Make sure that the ST button for each channel in the window is on (white characters on
a pink background).
The ST button is an on/off switch for the signal sent
from each channel to the STEREO bus. This is the
same function as the ST button in the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen.
6 To adjust the pan (INPUT channel) or bal-
ance (ST IN channel) of the signal sent from
the input channel to the STEREO bus, move
the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob of the
desired channel in the window, and operate
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
7 In the channel module section or the ST IN
section, make sure that the [ON] key of the
channel you want to operate is turned on.
8 Raise the fader/encoder of each channel to
obtain an appropriate volume.
9 If you want to operate a channel that is not
currently shown in the popup window, use
the [SEL] key to select that channel, and
then make settings for it.
For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the
popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]
key will change the popup window to INPUT channels
9–16. If you press a [SEL] key of the ST IN section,
the L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 will be displayed together.
52
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 5
Input channel operations
This chapter explains operations for input channels (INPUT channels and ST
IN channels).
The input channel are the section that processes the signals received from the rear panel input
jacks or slot, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, and MIX buses. There are two
types of input channel, as follows.
■ INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the LS9 is in the default state, the input signals from the
rear panel INPUT jacks and the input channels of the slot(s) are assigned to these channels. For details, refer to p.99.
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
CH 1-32{64}
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CH
INSERT OUT 1-32
CH
INSERT IN 1-32
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
EQ OUT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
METER
HPF
INSERT
ATT
PRE HPF
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
INPUT PATCH
LEVEL
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ{16}
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48,49-56,57-64]POST EQ{32}
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
To MIX
PRE FADER
METER
ON
INSERT
To MIX
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
CSR
PAN LINK
ON
MIX1,3...15
ON
MIX2,4...16
POST PAN L
ON
POST PAN R
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
To MIX
VARI
STEREO
ON
PAN MODE
TO LCR
LCR
LR
POST ON
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
FIXED
FIXED
STEREO
LR MONO
LEVEL
POST ON
To MIX
POST ON
METER
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
CUE
To OUTPUT PATCH
To RECORDER IN PATCH
DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}
PAN
PRE HPF
METER
32
{64}
ON
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER
M
O
N
O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
ST
Input channel operations
5
Signal flow for input channels
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
CUE L
CUE R
■ ST IN channels 1–4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the LS9 is in the default state, the outputs of virtual racks 5–
8 are assigned to these channels.
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
BAL
ST IN 1L-4R
PRE EQ
METER
EQ OUT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE HPF
METER
HPF
8
INPUT PATCH
PRE HPF
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ
PRE FADER
METER
FIXED
STEREO
To MIX
LCR
LR
ST L
MONO(C)
TO LCR
ST R
CSR
PAN LINK
POST ON
ON
MIX1,3...15
ON
MIX2,4...16
POST PAN L
ON
POST PAN R
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
To MIX
VARI
STEREO
PAN MODE
CUE
POST ON
PRE FADER
FIXED
To MIX
LR MONO
LEVEL
ON
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
To MIX
POST ON
METER
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
M
O
N
O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
ST
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
BAL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
ON
CUE L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
CUE R
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
53
Signal flow for input channels
● INPUT PATCH
● LCR (Left/Center/Right)
This assigns input signals to the input channels.
This sends the signal of the input channel to the STEREO
bus / MONO bus as a three-channel signal that adds a C
(Center) channel to the L/R channels.
●
ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the input signal.
● HPF (High Pass Filter)
This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the
specified frequency.
● ATT (attenuator)
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID,
LOW MID, and LOW.
● DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a gating,
ducking, expander, or compressor.
● DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
● LEVEL
Adjusts the input level of the input channel.
● ON (on/off)
Turns the input channel on/off. If this is off, the corresponding channel is muted.
● PAN
This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the
INPUT channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, this pan
setting can also be applied to signals sent to two MIX
buses that are assigned as stereo.
● BALANCE
On ST IN channels, the BALANCE is used instead of
PAN. The BALANCE adjusts the volume balance of the
left/right signals sent from the ST IN channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, you can also apply this balance setting to the signal sent to two MIX buses that are assigned
as stereo.
54
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
● TO MIX ON/OFF MIX (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input
channel to MIX buses 1–16.
There are two types of MIX buses; FIXED types whose
send level is fixed, and VARI types whose send level can
be adjusted. You can switch between FIXED type and
VARI type in sets of two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MIX buses. (For details, refer to → p. 213)
● TO MIX LEVEL 1-16 (MIX send level 1–16)
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input
channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–16. The signal sent to
VARI type MIX buses can be taken from pre-EQ, prefader, or post-[ON] key as desired. The signal sent to
FIXED type MIX buses is taken pre-pan if the MIX bus is
monaural, or post-pan if the MIX bus is stereo.
● INSERT (INPUT channels 1–32 only)
This lets you patch the desired output/input ports in order
to insert an effect processor or other external device (→
p. 101). The insert-out/insert-in position can be switched
between pre-EQ and pre-fader.
● DIRECT OUT (INPUT channels only)
This lets you patch the desired output port in order to output the input signal directly (→ p. 103). The direct out signal can be taken from pre-HPF, pre-EQ, or pre-fader.
● METER
This meters the level of the input channel. You can switch
the position at which the level is detected.
Specifying the channel name / icon
Specifying the channel name / icon
On the LS9, the name and icon shown in the screen can be specified for each input channel.
Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired
4 Move the cursor to the input port select
popup button in the HA field of the screen,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The PATCH/NAME popup window will appear,
allowing you to select an input port and icon for the
input channel, and to assign a name.
fader layer.
2
3
5
Input channel operations
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
4 1
section or ST IN section to select the input
channel that you want to operate.
1
LS9-32
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Input port select popup button
1 Input port button
This indicates the currently selected input port. When
you’re selecting the icon or editing the channel name,
moving the cursor to this button and pressing the
[ENTER] key will take you back to the input port
selection screen.
B Icon button
This indicates the icon selected for that channel.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, a screen where you can select an icon
and a sample name will appear.
C Channel name input box
This indicates the name assigned to that channel.
When you move the cursor to this field and press the
[ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a name.
D Tabs
These tabs switch the items that are shown in the window.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
55
Specifying the channel name / icon
5 To select an icon for this channel, move the
cursor to the icon button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The window display will change as follows.
channel, and specify its icon and channel
name in the same way.
While the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed,
you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel that
you’re operating.
3
10 When you’ve finished entering information,
1
You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
2
1 Icon select buttons
These buttons select the icon that is used for this channel.
B Sample name select buttons
These buttons select sample names that are related to
the currently selected icon. When you press a button,
its sample name will be entered in the channel name
field.
C Icon background color select buttons
These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the
background color for the icon.
6 Use the icon select buttons and the icon
background color select buttons to select
the icon and icon color you want to use for
that channel.
The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the
upper part of the window.
7 If desired, use the sample name select but-
tons to select a sample name. The selected
sample name will be entered in the channel
name field in the upper part of the window.
HINT
• You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in
the channel name field. If you want to assign channel names
that consist of a common name plus a number, such as “Vocal
1” and “Vocal 2,” you can simply enter a sample name and
then add a number.
8 If you want to enter a channel name directly
(or edit the previously-entered sample
name), move the cursor to the channel
name field in the upper part of the window
and press the [ENTER] key.
The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of
the window, allowing you to enter or edit the text. For
details on using the keyboard window, refer to p.34.
56
9 Use the [SEL] keys to select another input
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
HA (head amp) settings
HA (head amp) settings
Here’s how to make HA (Head Amp) settings such as phantom power on/off, gain, and phase for
each input channel.
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
2
1 +48V button
B GAIN knob
C ø (phase) button
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access the above popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.
CAUTION
• If you don’t need phantom power, be sure to turn this button off.
• Before you turn phantom power on, make sure that no
devices other than phantom-powered devices, such as a
condenser microphone, are connected. Otherwise, you
risk damaging the devices.
• Do not connect or disconnect a device while phantom
power is applied. Doing so can damage the connected
device and/or the unit itself.
1 HA popup button
B GAIN knob
2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired
5
Input channel operations
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
• To protect your speaker system, leave the power amps
(powered speakers) turned off when switching the phantom power on/off. We also recommend that you set all
output level faders to the minimum position. Otherwise,
high-volume output may damage your hearing or equipment.
fader layer.
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
section or ST IN section to select the input
channel that you want to operate.
4 If you only want to adjust the HA gain for
that channel, operate the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.
You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to
the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen
and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
5 If you want to edit detailed parameters such
as phantom power on/off and phase, move
the cursor to the HA popup button or GAIN
knob in the HA field of the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the HA/PATCH popup window.
In the HA/PATCH popup window you can adjust the
HA gain, switch phantom power on/off, and switch the
phase for sets of eight channels. This popup window
shows the parameters for the eight channels that
include the channel you selected in step 3.
6 To adjust the HA gain, move the cursor to
the GAIN knob of the desired channel in the
window, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys.
The input level of the channel is shown by the level
meter located immediately to the right of the GAIN
knob in the screen.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
7 To turn on phantom power, move the cursor
to the +48V button of the desired channel in
the window, and press the [ENTER] key.
The +48V button will turn on (red), and phantom
power will be supplied to the corresponding INPUT
jack.
NOTE
• If you want to use phantom power, you must first turn ON the
+48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen.
1
2
3
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
57
HA (head amp) settings • Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus
8 To switch the phase of each channel
between normal and reverse phase, move
the cursor to the ø button of the desired
channel in the window, and press the
[ENTER] key.
10 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
The ø button will change from black to red, and the
phase of the corresponding channel will be reversed.
9 If you want to operate the HA of a channel
that is not currently shown in the popup
window, use the [SEL] key to select that
channel, and then make settings for it.
For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the
popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]
key will change the popup window to INPUT channels
9–16.
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus
Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO
bus.
The STEREO bus / MONO bus are used to output signals to the main speakers. Signals can be
sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode, and you can
choose either of these two modes for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.
■ ST/MONO mode
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
In this mode, signals are sent independently from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus.
• The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/
off independently.
• The panning of the signal sent from an INPUT channel to the STEREO bus L/R can be operated by the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen. (The signal sent to
the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob.)
• The volume balance of the signal sent from a ST IN channel to the STEREO bus left and right can be operated
by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen. (The
signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)
■ LCR mode
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
In this mode, the signal from the input channel is sent to three buses at once; STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C).
• The signals sent from the same input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/
off together.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the input
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus.
• The level of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus will
change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder or the TO ST PAN
knob / TO ST BALANCE knob in the screen.
HINT
• If you want to use headphones etc. to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus, you should
press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] key several times to access the MONITOR screen, and
select “LCR” as the monitor source (→ p. 146).
58
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus
1 Make sure that an input source is con-
nected to the input channel you’re operating, and make head amp settings for
phantom power, gain, and phase to obtain
the optimal input signal (→ p. 57).
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can
switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode in
sets of eight channels, and change the on/off status and
pan/balance settings of the signals sent from those
channels to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup
window shows the parameters for the eight channels
that include the channel you selected in step 4.
[HOME] key.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
5
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access the above popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.
Input channel operations
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
This popup window contains the following items.
1 TO ST field
B TO ST PAN knob (for a ST IN channel, the
TO ST BAL knob)
3 Use the LAYER section to select the desired
fader layer.
4 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
section or ST IN section to select the input
channel for the desired source.
5 If you only want to adjust the pan or balance for that channel, operate the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN]
encoder (→ p. 86).
You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to
the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
6 If you want to switch the on/off setting of
the signal sent from the input channel to
the STEREO/MONO bus, or if you want to
switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR
mode, move the cursor to the TO ST PAN
knob or the PAN popup button located in
the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
1 Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the number and name of the channel
you’re operating.
B MODE button
This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR
mode to as the way in which the signal will be sent to
the STEREO bus and MONO bus. This mode can be
specified individually for each channel. The setting
will alternate between the two modes each time you
press the button.
The currently selected mode is shown by the position
of the indicator (the green ◆ symbol) located immediately above the button.
C ST button
D MONO button
When the MODE button is set to ST/MONO mode,
these buttons act as individual on/off switches for the
signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus.
E TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For an INPUT channel, this acts as a PAN knob that
adjusts the left/right panning of the signal sent to the
STEREO bus.
For a ST IN channel, this acts as a BALANCE knob
that adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals
sent to the STEREO bus.
Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
59
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus
For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR
mode, the following button and knob are shown
instead of the ST button 3 and MONO button 4.
6
7
11 In the top panel channel module section or
ST IN section, make sure that the [ON] key
is turned on for the input channel you want
to operate, and raise the fader/encoder to
an appropriate position.
The following steps will differ depending on whether
you selected a ST/MONO mode channel or an LCR
mode channel in step 7.
● For a channel set to ST/MONO mode
F LCR button
This button is an on/off switch for all signals sent from
that channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If
you turn off the button, no signals will be sent from
that input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
G CSR knob
This knob adjusts the relative level of the signals sent
from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in a range of 0–100%. Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to adjust the setting.
7 Use the MODE button to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
8 The ST button and MONO button are on/off
switches for the signal sent from each
channel to the STEREO bus and MONO
bus.
9 If you want to use the STEREO bus, make
sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO channel is turned on in the top panel STEREO
MASTER section, and raise the fader of the
STEREO channel to an appropriate position.
10 If you want to use the MONO bus, make
sure that the [ON] key of the MONO channel
is turned on, and raise the fader of the
MONO channel to an appropriate position.
This operation will differ between the LS9-16 and
LS9-32.
● For the LS9-16
Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer,
press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key to access
the custom fader layer, and then operate the [ON] key
and fader of the corresponding channel module.
● For the LS9-32
Press the LAYER [MASTER] key to access the master
fader layer, and operate the [ON] key and fader of
channel module 32.
60
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
12 Use the ST button and MONO button in the
TO STEREO/MONO popup window as on/off
switches for the signal sent from the input
channel to the STEREO bus and MONO
bus.
13 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[PAN] encoder to adjust the pan/balance of
the signal sent from the input channel to
the STEREO bus.
You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST
PAN/TO ST BAL knob in the TO STEREO/MONO
popup window.
● For a channel set to LCR mode
12 Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO/
MONO popup window as an on/off switch
for the signal sent from the input channel to
the STEREO bus and MONO bus.
For a channel that is set to LCR mode, the signal sent
to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be switched
on/off in a single operation.
13 Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO/MONO
popup window to adjust the proportion
between the signal level sent from that
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the
signal level sent to the MONO (C) bus.
14 Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO/
MONO popup window to set the panning of
the signal sent from the input channel to
the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C)
bus.
If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST
PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the signal
levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C)
bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case,
the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional
PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
Signal level
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus
If a ST IN channel is selected, operating the TO ST
BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent
from the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R)
bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following
illustration.
Signal sent to the
STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (R) bus
R
TO ST PAN knob
Signal sent from the
ST IN (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
L
C
R
Signal sent from the
ST IN (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus
5
Signal sent from the
ST IN (R) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
L
L
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal level
Signal level
If a ST IN channel is selected, operating the TO ST
BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent
from the ST IN L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R)
bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following
illustration. In this case, the [PAN] encoder will operate as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal
is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
Signal sent from the
ST IN (L) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Input channel operations
C
Signal level
L
Signal sent from the
ST IN (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
R
TO ST BALANCE knob
15 If you want to operate a channel that is not
Signal level
currently shown in the popup window, use
the [SEL] key to select that channel, and
then make settings for it.
Signal sent from the
ST IN (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus
L
C
For example if INPUT channels 1–8 are shown in the
popup window, pressing the INPUT channel 9 [SEL]
key will change the popup window to INPUT channels
9–16.
16 When you’ve finished making settings,
R
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
TO ST BALANCE knob
If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the TO ST
PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in
the following illustration.
Signal level
Signal sent to the
MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (R) bus
L
C
PAN knob
R
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
61
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
Here we will explain how to send the signal of an input channel to MIX buses 1–16.
MIX buses are used mainly to send signals to on-stage foldback speakers or to external effect
processors. Signals can be sent from an input channel to a MIX bus in the following three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of
the signal sent to the MIX bus.
This method lets you control the signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses.
■ Using a popup window
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
In this method, you use the MIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus.
This method lets you control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight
channels to a specific MIX bus.
■ Using the top panel faders• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In this method, you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send
levels to the MIX bus. This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on/off switching for the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus.
1
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Here’s how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of the
signals sent from a specific input channel to each MIX
bus.
23
4
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the
signal, and that a monitor system or external effect processor etc. is connected to the
corresponding output port.
Refer to p.95 for details on assigning an output port to
a MIX bus, or to p.42 for details on connecting external equipment.
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1 TO MIX field
In this field you can switch the on/off status and adjust
the send level of the signal sent from the input channel
to the MIX bus.
B TO MIX LEVEL knob
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the
input channel to a VARI type MIX bus. To adjust the
send level in this field, move the cursor to the knob
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
C TO MIX ON/OFF button
If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, this
button is displayed instead of the knob 2. This button
is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the input
channel to a FIXED type MIX bus. To turn the signal
on/off, move the cursor to the button and press the
[ENTER] key.
62
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
3 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]
keys of the channel module section or ST
IN section to select the input channel that
you want to operate.
4 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys
to select the send-destination MIX bus.
The LED of the corresponding key will light, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination.
5 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step
4, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the
send level from that channel to the MIX bus
you selected in step 4.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the
function of the [SELECTED SEND] encoder will
change depending on which of the two adjacent keys
of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are lit.
● If the left key is lit
Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the
pan (or balance, for a ST IN channel) of the signal that
is sent from the INPUT channel to the two MIX buses.
● If the right key is lit
Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the
send level shared by the two MIX buses.
6 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to a VARI type MIX bus, move the cursor to
the TO MIX LEVEL knob in the screen and
press the [ENTER] key to accsess the MIX
SEND popup window.
5
Input channel operations
D PRE/POST indicator
This indicates the send position of the signal sent from
the input channel to a VARI type MIX bus. The signal
is being sent from the pre-EQ or pre-fader position if
this indicates PRE, or from immediately after the
[ON] key if the PRE indication is not shown. This
indicator is only for display. You cannot use this field
to change the send position of the signal.
If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey.
7 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to a FIXED type MIX bus, move the cursor to
the TO MIX ON/OFF button in the screen
and press the [ENTER] key.
If you switch this off, the knob will change to black
characters on a blue background. To turn it back on,
press the [ENTER] key once again.
8 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select
another input channel, and adjust the send
level to the selected MIX bus in the same
way.
9 Use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT
● If the send-destination MIX bus is the VARI
type
The TO MIX field in the screen shows the knob in the
same color as the corresponding key of the MIX/
MATRIX SEND section.
● If the send-destination MIX bus is the FIXED
type
The TO MIX field will show the TO MIX ON/OFF
button instead of the TO MIX LEVEL knob. In this
case, you can’t adjust the send level.
section to select another MIX bus as the
send-destination, and adjust the send level
from the input channel in the same way.
HINT
• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus, then
you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately
before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the
fader) for each MIX bus (→ p. 213).
• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL
knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213).
• If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a specific
MIX bus, select the master fader layer and press the [CUE]
key for that MIX channel.
NOTE
• If the LED of only a specific key in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT
section is blinking and the LEDs of the remaining keys are lit,
the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode (the mode in which
you can use the faders to control the send levels to the MIX
buses or MATRIX buses). Press the desired key in the MIX/
MATRIX SELECT section so that only the LED of that key is
lit.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
63
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
In this method, you use the MIX SEND popup window to
adjust the send levels from eight channels to a MIX bus.
The MIX SEND popup window shows the parameters
for the eight channels that include the channel you
selected in step 3. The contents of the window will differ depending on whether the send-destination MIX
bus is VARI type or FIXED type.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
[ For a VARI type MIX bus ]
Using a popup window
to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the
signal, and that a monitor system or external effect processor etc. is connected to the
corresponding output port.
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
5
6
1
2
3
4
1 Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the number and name of the sendsource channel.
B PRE button
This switches the position from which the signal is
sent from the send-source channel to the currently
selected MIX bus. If this button is on, the pre-EQ or
pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the
signal from immediately after the [ON] key will be
sent.
1 SEND popup button
3 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]
keys of the channel module section or ST
IN section to select the send-source input
channel.
4 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys
to select the send-destination MIX bus.
5 Move the cursor to the SEND popup button
in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MIX SEND popup window.
In the MIX SEND popup window you can control the
send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight input channels to the currently selected MIX bus.
HINT
C TO MIX ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from
the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX
bus.
D TO MIX LEVEL knob
This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the
send-source channel to the currently selected MIX
bus.
E ALL PRE button
This button selects PRE as the position from which the
signals are sent from all input channels to the VARI
type MIX bus.
F ALL POST button
This button selects POST as the position from which
the signals are sent from all input channels to the
VARI type MIX bus.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, the
screen will change as follows.
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access the above popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.
• If you want to switch the on/off status of the signal sent to a
VARI type MIX bus, you can move the cursor to the TO MIX
LEVEL knob in the screen and press the [ENTER] key to
access the above popup window.
64
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
7
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
HINT
• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MIX bus, then
you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately
before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately before the
fader) for each MIX bus (→ p. 213).
• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST BAL
knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213).
8 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to a VARI/FIXED type MIX bus, move the
cursor to the TO MIX ON/OFF button in the
screen and press the [ENTER] key.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, operation of the adjacent left/right pair of buttons is linked.
9 If you want to operate a channel that is not
currently shown in the popup window, use
the [SEL] key to select that channel, and
then make settings for it.
10 If you want to adjust the send level to
[ For a FIXED type MIX bus ]
another MIX bus, use the keys of the MIX/
MATRIX SELECT section to select another
MIX bus, and make settings in the same
way.
11 When you’ve finished making settings,
1
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
2
1 Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the number and name of the sendsource channel.
B TO MIX ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from
the send-source channel to the currently selected MIX
bus.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, on/off
operations are linked for adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MIX buses.
6 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step
4, move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL
knob in the screen, and use the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the send level
from each channel to the selected MIX bus.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, move
the cursor to the TO MIX PAN (TO MIX BALANCE)
knob and adjust the pan (or balance, for a ST IN channel) of the signal sent from each channel to the two
MIX buses.
5
Input channel operations
G TO MIX PAN/TO MIX BALANCE knob
This knob adjusts the pan (or balance, for a ST IN
channel) of the signal that is sent from the INPUT
channel to the two MIX buses.
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER
mode)
Here’s how to use the top panel faders/encoders to adjust
the send level and turn the signal on/off for the signals sent
from all input channels to a specific MIX bus.
1 Make sure that an output port is assigned
to the MIX bus to which you’re sending the
signal, and that a monitor system or external effect processor etc. is connected to the
corresponding output port.
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
7 To switch the send position of a signal sent
to a VARI type MIX bus, move the cursor to
the PRE button in the screen and press the
[ENTER] key.
If the PRE button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal
will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from immediately after the [ON] key will be sent.
HINT
• If the PRE button is on, then you will be able to select either
PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader) for each MIX bus (→ p. 213).
1 SEND popup button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
65
Sending the signal from an input channel to a MIX bus
3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys
to select the send-destination MIX bus.
The LED of the corresponding key will light, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination.
4 Press the same key of the MIX/MATRIX
SELECT section once again.
The key will change from lit to blinking, and the LEDs
of the remaining keys in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT
section will light. This indicates that the LS9 is now in
SENDS ON FADER mode (in which you can use the
faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus /
MATRIX bus).
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the function of the
channel module section’s faders and [ON] keys (the
ST IN section’s encoders and [ON] keys) will change
as follows.
● Faders/Encoders
These will adjust the send level of the signal sent from
the input channels to the currently selected MIX bus.
When you switch from normal mode to SENDS ON
FADER mode, the fader positions will move to the
value of the send levels to the currently selected MIX
bus.
● [ON] keys
These will operate as on/off switches for the signal
sent from the input channels to the currently selected
MIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to
SENDS ON FADER mode, the [ON] keys will light or
go dark according to the on/off status of the signals
being sent to the currently selected MIX bus.
● [SEL] keys
The [SEL] key of the selected channel will blink, and
the [SEL] keys of channels that are not selected will
light. However, the [SEL] keys of unassigned modules
will go dark.
5 If you selected a VARI type MIX bus in step
3, use the faders of the channel module
section and the encoders of the ST IN section to adjust the send level from the channels to the MIX bus you selected in step 3.
As necessary, switch fader layers to the layer that contains the desired send-source input channels.
6 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to a VARI/FIXED type MIX bus, press the top
panel [ON] key.
If the send-destination MIX bus is set to stereo, on/off
operations will be linked for the signal sent to the two
adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level
and switch the on/off status for other MIX
buses in the same way.
66
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
8 When you’ve finished setting the MIX send
levels, press the key that is currently blinking in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section.
The LS9 will return to normal mode.
HINT
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a userdefined key. This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON
FADER mode for a specific MIX bus, or quickly return to the
previous state.
• You can also use the [HOME] key to cancel SENDS ON
FADER mode.
In SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destination is a MIX bus), the STEREO MASTER module
will operate differently depending on the selected
fader layer.
Fader layer
Function
1-16 {1-32}/17-32
{33-64}
Send-destination MIX channel module
MASTER/CUSTOM FADER
STEREO channel (however, the fader
and [ON] key will do nothing)
NOTE
• If you switch the fader layer from 1-16 {1-32}, 17-32 {33-64},
or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER
mode (when the send-destination is a MIX bus), SENDS ON
FADER mode will be cancelled.
• You cannot operate the fader or [ON] key of a channel that is
not a send-source (a channel that does not have a MIX SEND
parameter) or of a channel that is not a send-destination bus
master.
Chapter 6
Output channel operations
This chapter explains operations for output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX
channels, STEREO channels, MONO channels).
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses,
processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channel are provided.
■ MIX channels 1–16 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
These channels process the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding
output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus. When the LS9 is in the initial state, these are assigned
to the OMNI OUT jacks or the output channels of the slot(s).
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
M
O
N
ST O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
Output channel operations
6
Signal flow for output channels
CUE
LR
MIX 1-16
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MIX
INSERT OUT 1-16
MIX
INSERT IN 1-16
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
DYNA OUT
EQ OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
ATT
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
CUE ON
LEVEL
ON
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
ON
MONO(C)
LEVEL
ON
INSERT
MIX OUT1-16
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ
POST ON
(13-16)To KEYIN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
To RECORDER IN PATCH
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
MATRIX1,3...7
ST L
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
POST ON
METER
PRE FADER
METER
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
To MATRIX
PRE FADER / POST ON
VARI
STEREO
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
TO LCR
PAN
LR MONO
LCR
ST R
POST ON
CSR
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
67
Signal flow for output channels
■ STEREO channel / MONO (C) channel
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and
send it to an output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are set to LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and
the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels.
When the LS9 is in the initial state, the STEREO channel is assigned to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack.
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
M
O
N
O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
ST
CUE
LR
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO
INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)
STEREO
INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
PRE FADER
METER
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
ATT
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
POST ON
METER
LEVEL
BAL
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
ON
INSERT
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ
To STEREO OUT L+C,R+C
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
To RECORDER IN PATCH
POST ON
CUE ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
MATRIX1,3...7
LEVEL
ON
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
ON
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
STEREO OUT L+C
STEREO OUT L
To MATRIX
PRE FADER / POST ON
To OUTPUT PATCH
To RECORDER IN PATCH
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
STEREO OUT R+C
STEREO OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To RECORDER IN PATCH
■ MATRIX channels 1–8 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
These channels process the signals sent from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses,
and send them to the corresponding output ports.
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
M
O
N
ST O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
CUE
LR
MATRIX1-8
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX
INSERT OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERTIN1-8
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ
METER
INSERT
ATT
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
CUE ON
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
LEVEL
INSERT
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
POST ON
METER
ON
MATRIX OUT 1-8
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
To RECORDER IN PATCH
POST ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
● ATT (attenuator)
● ON (on/off)
Attenuates/boosts the level of the signal.
Turns the output channel on/off. If this is off, the corresponding channel is muted.
● 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
This is a parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH
MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
● COMP/COMPANDER/EXPAND (compressor/compander/expander)
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or expander.
● LEVEL
This adjusts the output level of the channel.
● BALANCE (STEREO channel only)
Adjusts the left/right volume balance of the STEREO (L/
R) channel.
68
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
● TO MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX
channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel
to each MATRIX bus 1–8.
● TO MATRIX LEVEL 1-8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX
channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel
to each MATRIX bus 1–8. As the position from which the
signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either
pre-fader or after the [ON] key.
Signal flow for output channels • Specifying the channel name / icon
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you
can use the TO MATRIX PAN knob in the screen to adjust
the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the sendsource is the STEREO channel or a stereo MIX channel,
use the TO MATRIX BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two
MATRIX buses.
● INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an
external device such as an effect processor. You can switch
the insert-out and insert-in locations.
● METER
This meters the level of the output channel. You can
switch the position at which the level is detected.
● KEY IN (MIX channels 13–16 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 13–16 to
the dynamics processors of each channel, and use them as
key-in signals to control the dynamics.
● RACK IN PATCH
This patches the output signal of a MIX channel to an
input of the rack.
● OUTPUT PATCH
This assigns an output port to an output channel.
● MONITOR SELECT
This selects the output signal of an output channel as a
monitor source.
Specifying the channel name / icon
Here’s how to specify the channel name and icon for each output channel.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
2 Use the LAYER section to select the fader
layer that contains the desired output channel.
4 Move the cursor to the output port select
popup button in the PATCH field of the
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
Output channel operations
6
The PATCH/NAME popup window will appear,
allowing you to select an output port and icon for the
output channel, and to assign a name.
4
2
3
1
HINT
• In order to select a MATRIX channel or MONO channel on the
LS9-16, you must assign the channel to the custom fader
layer, and then select this layer.
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
section or ST IN section to select the output
channel that you want to operate.
2
1
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Output port button
This indicates the output port that is assigned to the
corresponding channel. If more than one output port is
assigned, one port will be displayed to represent them.
When you’re selecting the icon or editing the channel
name, moving the cursor to this button and pressing
the [ENTER] key will take you back to the output port
selection screen.
1 PATCH field
B Output port select popup button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
69
Specifying the channel name / icon
B Icon button
This shows the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, a screen where you can select an icon
and a sample name will appear.
C Channel name input box
This indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you move the cursor to this
field and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window
will appear, allowing you to enter a name.
D Tabs
These tabs switch the items that are shown in the window.
5 To select an icon for this channel, move the
cursor to the icon button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The window display will change as follows.
7 If desired, use the sample name select but-
tons to select a sample name. The selected
sample name will be entered in the channel
name field in the upper part of the window.
HINT
• You can add or edit the text after entering the sample name in
the channel name field. If you want to assign channel names
that consist of a common name plus a number, such as “Vocal
1” and “Vocal 2,” you can simply enter a sample name and
then add a number.
8 If you want to enter a channel name directly
(or edit the previously-entered sample
name), move the cursor to the channel
name field in the upper part of the window
and press the [ENTER] key.
The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of
the window, allowing you to enter or edit the text. For
details on using the keyboard window, refer to p.34.
9 Use the [SEL] keys to select another output
3
1
2
channel, and specify its icon and channel
name in the same way.
While the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed,
you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel that
you’re operating.
10 When you’ve finished entering information,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.
1 Icon select buttons
These buttons select the icon that is used for this channel.
B Sample name select buttons
These buttons select sample names that are related to
the currently selected icon. When you press a button,
its sample name will be entered in the channel name
field.
C Icon background color select buttons
These buttons let you choose one of eight colors as the
background color for the icon.
6 Use the icon select buttons and the icon
background color select buttons to select
the icon you want to use for that channel.
The selected icon is shown in the icon button in the
upper part of the window.
70
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
This section explains how to send the signal of a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO
bus.
Signals can be sent to the STEREO bus or MONO bus in either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode,
and you can choose either of these two modes for each MIX channel. These two modes differ as
follows.
■ ST/MONO mode• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This mode sends the signal from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.
• The panning of the signal sent from a monaural MIX channel to the STEREO bus L/R can be operated by the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST PAN knob in the screen. (The signal sent to
the MONO bus is not affected by this encoder or knob.)
• The volume balance of the signals sent from two stereo-assigned MIX channels to the STEREO bus left and
right can be operated by the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder, or by the TO ST BAL knob in
the screen. (The signal sent to the MONO bus is not affected by this knob.)
■ LCR mode
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
This mode sends the signal of the MIX channel to a total of three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) together.
• The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off
together.
6
Output channel operations
• The signals sent from the same MIX channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off
individually.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob in the screen adjusts the proportion of the signal level sent from the MIX
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus.
• The level of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus will
change according to the settings of the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder or the TO ST PAN
knob / TO ST BAL knob in the screen.
HINT
• If you want to use headphones etc. to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus, you should
press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] key several times to access the MONITOR (2/4) screen,
and select “LCR” as the monitor source (→ p. 146) before you continue with the following procedure.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
2
1 TO ST field
B TO ST PAN knob (for a stereo MIX channel,
the TO ST BAL knob)
2 In the LAYER section, press the LAYER
[MASTER] key to select the master fader
layer.
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
section to select the send-source MIX channel.
4 If you only want to adjust the pan or balance of the MIX channel, operate the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN]
encoder (→ p. 86).
You can obtain the same result by moving the cursor to
the PAN/BAL knob in the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen and operating the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
71
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
5 If you want to switch the on/off status of the
signal sent from the MIX channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus, or switch it between
ST/MONO mode and LCR mode, use either
of the following methods to access the TO
STEREO/MONO popup window.
• Move the cursor to the PAN popup button located in
the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
• Move the cursor to the TO ST PAN knob located in
the TO ST field of the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can
switch between ST/MONO mode and LCR mode in
sets of eight MIX channels, and change the on/off status and pan/balance settings of the signals sent from
those channels to the STEREO/MONO bus. This
popup window shows the parameters for the eight
channels that include the MIX channel you selected in
step 3.
C ST button
D MONO button
When the MODE button is set to ST/MONO mode,
these buttons act as individual on/off switches for the
signal sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO bus
and MONO bus.
E TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For monaural MIX channels, this acts as the PAN
knob that adjusts the left/right panning of the signal
sent to the STEREO bus.
For stereo MIX channels, this acts as the BALANCE
knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus.
Move the cursor to the knob and use the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the setting.
For channels whose MODE button is set to LCR
mode, the following button and knob are shown
instead of the ST button (3) and MONO button (4).
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access the above popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the number and name of the channel
you’re operating.
B MODE button
This button selects either ST/MONO mode or LCR
mode to specify how the signal is sent to the STEREO
bus and MONO bus. You can specify this mode individually for each MIX channel. The setting will alternate between the two modes each time you press the
button.
The currently selected mode is shown by the position
of the indicator (the green ◆ symbol) located immediately above the button.
72
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
F LCR button
This button is an on/off switch for all signals sent from
that MIX channel to the STEREO bus and MONO
bus. If you turn off the button, no signals will be sent
from that output channel to the STEREO bus or
MONO bus.
G CSR knob
This knob adjusts the proportion between the signal
level sent from that MIX channel to the STEREO (L/
R) bus and the level sent to the MONO (C) bus, over a
range of 0–100%. To adjust the setting, move the cursor to the knob, press the [ENTER] key, and use the
dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
6 Use the MODE button to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each MIX
channel.
7 The ST button and MONO button are on/off
switches for the signal sent from the MIX
channel to the STEREO bus and MONO
bus.
8 If you want to use the STEREO bus, make
sure that the [ON] key of the STEREO channel is turned on in the top panel STEREO
MASTER section, and raise the fader of the
STEREO channel to an appropriate position.
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
9 If you want to use the MONO bus, make
sure that the [ON] key of the MONO channel
is turned on, and raise the fader of the
MONO channel to an appropriate position.
13 Use the TO ST PAN knob in the TO STEREO/
MONO popup window to set the panning of
the signal sent from the MIX channel to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and the MONO (C) bus.
This operation will differ between the LS9-16 and
LS9-32.
If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST
PAN knob of a MIX channel will change the signal
levels sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C)
bus as shown in the following illustration. In this case,
the TO ST PAN knob will operate as a conventional
PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
● For the LS9-16
Assign the MONO channel to the custom fader layer,
press the LAYER [CUSTOM] key to access the custom fader layer, and then operate the [ON] key and
fader of the corresponding channel module.
10 Select the master fader layer, make sure
that the [ON] key of the desired MIX channel
is turned on, and raise the fader to an
appropriate position.
Signal sent to the
STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (R) bus
L
C
R
TO ST PAN knob
If a MIX channel set to stereo is selected, operating
the TO ST BALANCE knob will change the signal
levels sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/
R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in the following
illustration. In this case, the [PAN] encoder will operate as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal
is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
The following steps will differ depending on whether
you selected a ST/MONO mode MIX channel or an
LCR mode MIX channel in step 6.
● For a MIX channel set to ST/MONO
mode
6
Output channel operations
Press the LAYER [MASTER] key to access the master
fader layer, and operate the [ON] key and fader of
channel module 32.
Signal level
● For the LS9-32
TO STEREO/MONO popup window as on/off
switches for the signal sent from the MIX
channel to the STEREO bus and MONO
bus.
12 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Signal level
11 Use the ST button and MONO button in the
[PAN] encoder to adjust the pan/balance of
the signal sent from the MIX channel to the
STEREO bus.
Signal sent from the
odd-numbered MIX
channel to the STEREO (L) bus
L
11 Use the LCR button in the TO STEREO/
MONO popup window as an on/off switch
for the signal sent from the MIX channel to
the STEREO bus and MONO bus.
For a MIX channel that is set to LCR mode, the signal
sent to the STEREO bus and MONO bus can be
switched on/off in a single operation.
R
Signal level
You can obtain the same result by using the TO ST
PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob in the TO STEREO/
MONO popup window.
● For a MIX channel set to LCR mode
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the
even-numbered MIX
channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L
C
R
TO ST BALANCE knob
12 Use the CSR knob in the TO STEREO/MONO
popup window to adjust the proportion
between the signal level sent from that MIX
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and the
signal level sent to the MONO (C) bus.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
73
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus
If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the TO ST
PAN knob will change the signal levels sent to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus as shown in
the following illustration.
Signal level
Signal sent to the
MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the
STEREO (R) bus
L
C
PAN knob
R
If a stereo MIX channel is selected, operating the TO
ST BALANCE knob will change the signal levels sent
from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
MONO (C) bus as shown in the following illustration.
Signal level
Signal sent from the
odd-numbered MIX
channel to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent from the
odd-numbered MIX
channel to the
MONO (C) bus
L
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal level
Signal sent from the
even-numbered MIX
channel to the
MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the
even-numbered MIX
channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L
74
C
TO ST BALANCE knob
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
R
14 If you want to operate a channel that is not
currently shown in the popup window, use
the [SEL] key to select that channel, and
then make settings for it.
For example if MIX channels 1–8 are shown in the
popup window, pressing the MIX channel 9 [SEL] key
will change the popup window to MIX channels 9–16.
15 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels
to MATRIX buses
This section explains how to send the signal from a MIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel to
MATRIX buses 1–8. You can do this in any of the following three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of
the signal sent to the MATRIX bus.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
In this method, you use the MATRIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from eight channels to a
MATRIX bus.
This method lets you control the send level, on/off setting, and send point for the signals sent from a set of eight
channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
■ Using the top panel faders • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In this method, you switch the LS9 to SENDS ON FADER mode and use the top panel faders to adjust the send
levels to the MATRIX bus. This method lets you simultaneously control the send levels and on/off switching for
the signals sent from MIX, STEREO (L/R), and MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
In this method, you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the level of
the signal sent to the MATRIX bus.
You can either control the signals sent from a desired
MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to all MATRIX
buses, or control the signals sent from all MIX channels to
a specific MATRIX bus.
■ Controlling the signals sent from a MIX,
STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to all
MATRIX buses
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
6
Output channel operations
■ Using a popup window
1 TO MATRIX field
If a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is
selected, this area of the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen will show the TO MATRIX field, allowing you
to switch the on/off status and adjust the send level of
the signals sent to the MATRIX buses.
B TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs
These adjust the send level of the signals sent from the
MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel to the
MATRIX buses. These knobs are the same color as the
corresponding keys of the MIX/MATRIX SEND section.
To adjust the send level in this field, move the cursor to
the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. To
switch the on/off status of a signal sent to a MATRIX
bus, move the cursor to the corresponding knob and
press the [ENTER] key.
2 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-
nel module section [SEL] keys to select the
send-source MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO
channel.
HINT
2
• In order to select a MONO channel on the LS9-16, you must
first select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned
that MONO channel, and then press the corresponding [SEL]
key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
75
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys
HINT
to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.
• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus,
then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately
before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX buses (→ p. 213).
When a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is
selected, the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are used to select the send-destination MATRIX
bus.
When you press a key to select the send-destination
MATRIX bus, only the LED of the corresponding key
will blink, indicating that it is selected as the send-destination. The cursor will move to the corresponding
TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the TO MATRIX field
of the screen.
• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST
BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213).
• If you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to a specific
MATRIX bus, select the fader layer that includes that MATRIX
channel, and press the corresponding [CUE] key.
NOTE
• If a MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel is selected, MIX/
MATRIX SELECT section keys 9–16 are inactive.
• If the LED of only the specified key is blinking in the MIX/
MATRIX SELECT section and the LEDs of the remaining keys
are lit, the LS9 is in SENDS ON FADER mode. Press the
desired key of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section so that only
the LED of that key is blinking.
4 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the
send level from that channel to the MATRIX
bus you selected in step 3.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the function of the [SELECTED SEND] encoder will
change depending on which of the two adjacent keys
of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section are lit.
■ Controlling the signals sent from MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channels to a specific
MATRIX bus
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
2 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]
keys of the channel module section to
select the send-destination MATRIX channel.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will change as follows.
● If the left key is lit
Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the
pan (or balance, for a STEREO channel) of the signal
that is sent from that channel to the two MATRIX
buses.
1
2
● If the right key is lit
Use the [SELECTED SEND] encoder to adjust the
send level shared by the two MATRIX buses.
5 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to a MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the TO
MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen and
press the [ENTER] key.
If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. To turn
it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again.
6 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select
another channel, and adjust the send level
to the selected MATRIX bus in the same
way.
7 Use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT
section to select another MATRIX bus as
the send-destination, and adjust the send
level in the same way.
1 FROM MIX field
If a MATRIX channel is selected, this area of the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen will show the FROM
MIX field, allowing you to switch the on/off status and
adjust the send level of the signals sent from each MIX
channel to the MATRIX bus.
B FROM MIX LEVEL knobs
These knobs indicate and control the send level of the
signals sent from MIX channels 1–16 to the currently
selected MATRIX bus.
HINT
• In order to select a MATRIX channel on the LS9-16, you must
first select the custom fader layer to which you’ve assigned
that MATRIX channel, and then press the corresponding
[SEL] key.
76
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the corresponding knob of the FROM
MIX field, and operate the [SELECTED
SEND] encoder.
You can obtain the same result by operating the dial or
the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the send level to the two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX buses will be linked.
4 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
from a MIX channel to the selected MATRIX
bus, move the cursor to the corresponding
knob of the FROM MIX field and press the
[ENTER] key.
If you switch this off, the knob will turn grey. To turn
it back on, press the [ENTER] key once again.
NOTE
• When the SELECTED CH VIEW screen for MATRIX channels
is displayed, the keys of the MIX/MATRIX section will operate
as keys that select the send-destination MIX bus for the input
channels.
5 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to switch the
send-destination MATRIX channel and control the send level to a specific MATRIX bus
in the same way.
2 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-
nel module section [SEL] keys to select the
send-source MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO
channel.
3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys
to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.
Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink,
indicating that it is selected as the send-destination.
4 Move the cursor to the SEND popup button
in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MATRIX SEND popup window.
In the MATRIX SEND popup window you can view
eight MIX channels or the STEREO (L/R) and MONO
channels at once, and control the send level, on/off status, and send point for the signals sent to the MATRIX
bus.
The MATRIX SEND popup window shows the parameters for a maximum of eight channels that include the
channel you selected in step 3.
1
2
3
6
Output channel operations
3 To adjust the send level from a MIX channel
4
Using a popup window
Here’s how you can use the MATRIX SEND popup window to adjust the send levels from up to eight channels to
a MATRIX bus.
1 Channel number / Channel name
This indicates the number and name of the sendsource channel.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
B PRE button
This switches the position from which the signal is
sent from the send-source channel to the currently
selected MATRIX bus. If this button is on, the pre-EQ
or pre-fader signal will be sent; if this button is off, the
signal from immediately after the [ON] key will be
sent.
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
C TO MATRIX ON/OFF button
This is an on/off switch for the signal that is sent from
the send-source channel to the currently selected
MATRIX bus.
D TO MATRIX LEVEL knob
This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent from the
send-source channel to the currently selected
MATRIX bus.
1 SEND popup button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
77
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the screen will change as follows.
7 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to the MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the
TO MATRIX ON/OFF button in the screen
and press the [ENTER] key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
operation of the adjacent left/right pair of buttons is
linked.
5
8 If you want to operate a channel that is not
currently shown in the popup window, use
the [SEL] key to select that channel, and
then make settings for it.
E TO MATRIX PAN/TO MATRIX BALANCE
knob
This knob adjusts the panning (or the balance, if the
send-source is a STEREO channel or a MIX channel
set to stereo) of the signal sent from this channel to the
two MATRIX buses.
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access the above popup window by pressing the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.
• If PRE is selected as the send position to the MATRIX bus,
then you will also be able to select either PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER (immediately
before the fader) for each two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX buses (→ p. 213).
• If desired, the pan/balance setting of the signal sent to a stereo MATRIX bus can be linked with the TO ST PAN/TO ST
BAL knob of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 213).
5 To adjust the send level from each channel
to the selected MATRIX bus, move the cursor to a TO MATRIX LEVEL knob in the
screen, and operate the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
move the cursor to the TO MATRIX PAN (TO
MATRIX BAL) knob and adjust the pan (or balance,
for a STEREO channel or MIX channels set to stereo)
of the signal sent from each channel to the two
MATRIX buses.
9 If you want to adjust the send level to
another MATRIX bus, use the keys of the
MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select
another MATRIX bus, and make settings in
the same way.
10 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right of the window) and press the [ENTER] key.
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER
mode)
Here’s how to use the top panel faders and [ON] keys to
adjust the send level and turn the signal on/off for the signals sent from the MIX, STEREO (L/R), and MONO
channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
6 To switch the send position of a signal sent
to the MATRIX bus, move the cursor to the
PRE button in the screen and press the
[ENTER] key.
If the PRE button is on, the pre-EQ or pre-fader signal
will be sent; if this button is off, the signal from immediately after the [ON] key will be sent.
HINT
• If the PRE button is on, then you will be able to select either
PRE EQ (immediately before the attenuator) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader) for each two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses (→ p. 213).
1 SEND popup button
2 Use the LAYER section keys and the channel module section [SEL] keys to select a
MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO channel.
78
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
to select the send-destination MATRIX bus.
Only the LED of the corresponding key will blink,
indicating that it is selected as the send-destination.
4 Press the same key of the MIX/MATRIX
SELECT section once again.
The key will change from lit to blinking, and the LEDs
of the remaining keys in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT
section will light. This indicates that the LS9 is now in
SENDS ON FADER mode, allowing you to use the
faders to control the send levels to the MIX bus /
MATRIX bus.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the faders and [ON]
keys of the channel module section will change their
operation as follows.
● Faders
The faders will adjust the send level of the signal sent
from each channel to the currently selected MATRIX
bus. When you switch from normal mode to SENDS
ON FADER mode, the fader positions will move to the
value of the send levels to the currently selected
MATRIX bus.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level
and switch the on/off status for other
MATRIX buses in the same way.
8 When you’ve finished setting the MATRIX
send levels, press the key that is currently
blinking in the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section.
The LS9 will return to normal mode.
HINT
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a userdefined key. This allows you quickly switch to SENDS ON
FADER mode for a specific MATRIX bus, or quickly return to
the previous state.
• You can also use the [HOME] key to cancel SENDS ON
FADER mode.
In SENDS ON FADER mode (when the send-destination is a MATRIX bus), the STEREO MASTER module will operate differently depending on the selected
fader layer.
Fader layer
Function
1-16 {1-32}/17-32 {33-64}
Send-destination MATRIX channel
module
● [ON] keys
These keys will function as on/off switches for the signal sent from each channel to the currently selected
MATRIX bus. When you switch from normal mode to
SENDS ON FADER mode, the [ON] keys will light or
go dark according to the on/off status of the signals
being sent to the currently selected MATRIX bus.
● [SEL] keys
The [SEL] key of the selected channel will blink, and
the [SEL] keys of channels that are not selected will
light. However, the [SEL] keys of unassigned modules
will go dark.
5 Use the channel module faders to adjust
[SEL] key, [CUE] key:
STEREO channel
MASTER/
CUSTOM FADER
6
Output channel operations
3 Use the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section keys
[ON] key, fader:
Adjust the on/off status and
send level of signals sent to
MATRIX buses
NOTE
• If you switch the fader layer from 1-16 {1-32}, 17-32 {33-64},
or CUSTOM FADER to MASTER while in SENDS ON FADER
mode (when the send-destination is a MATRIX bus), SENDS
ON FADER mode will be cancelled.
• You cannot operate the fader or [ON] key of a channel that is
not a send-source (a channel that does not have a MATRIX
SEND parameter) or of a channel that is not a send-destination bus master.
the send levels from the channels to the
MATRIX bus you selected in step 3.
As necessary, switch fader layers to access the layer
that contains the desired send-source channel.
6 To switch the on/off status of a signal sent
to the MATRIX bus, press the top panel [ON]
key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
on/off operations will be linked for the signal sent to
the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
MATRIX buses.
NOTE
• While SENDS ON FADER mode is active with a MATRIX bus
as the send-destination, the faders/encoders and [ON] keys
of input channels will be disabled. If you want to operate an
input channel, you must first disable the above SENDS ON
FADER mode.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
79
80
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section
This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
and the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to control the parameters of a selected
channel.
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the right of the display corresponds to a channel
module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the currently selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that is currently selected by its [SEL] key. You
can use the encoders and keys on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain,
EQ settings, the threshold setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send
levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
For a ST IN channel or STEREO channel, either the L or the R channel is selected, and the
major parameters are linked.
LS9-16
SELECTED CHANNEL section
HINT
• If you want to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to set the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses,
use the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section located at the left of the display.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
81
About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen
About the SELECTED CH VIEW screen
When you press the [HOME] key, the SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the display.
This screen shows most of the parameters of the channel currently selected by its [SEL] key. You
can use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to check the values when operating the encoders of
the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or when you need to edit more detailed parameters.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following
items.
D PAN field
● When an INPUT channel or monaural MIX
channel is selected
1
4
23
This functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent
from that channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. Here
you can also view or edit the panning of the signal sent
to the STEREO bus.
5
● When a ST IN channel or a stereo MIX channel
6
This functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent
from that channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This
also lets you view or edit the balance of the left/right
signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus.
is selected
9
K
● When a stereo MATRIX channel is selected
This shows the balance of the signals sent from the
two MATRIX channels.
● When a STEREO channel is selected
7
8
J
L
M
1 SEND field
● When an input channel is selected
Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals
sent from that channel to each MIX bus (if the MIX
bus is set to the FIXED type), and view or edit the
send levels.
● When a MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is
selected
Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals
sent from that channel to each MATRIX bus, and view
or edit the send levels.
● When a MATRIX channel is selected
Here you can switch the on/off status of the signals
sent from each MIX channel to that MATRIX bus, and
view or edit the send levels.
B HA field (input channels only)
In this field you can view or edit the input port patched to
the input channel, the head amp gain, the phantom power
on/off status, and the phase setting. The input level OVER
indicator is also shown here.
3
C PATCH field (output channels only)
For output channels, the PATCH field is shown in the 2
area. In this field you can view and edit the output port
that is patched to the output channel. For channels to
which two or more output ports are patched, only one will
be shown as a representative.
82
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
This shows the balance of the left/right signals sent
from the STEREO channel.
E DYNA1 field
F DYNA2 field (input channels only)
Here you can view or edit the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
This also accesses the DYNAMICS 1 / DYNAMICS 2
popup windows where you can edit detailed dynamics
parameters that cannot be edited in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
G EQ field
Here you can switch the four-band EQ on/off, and view or
edit its parameters. For input channels, you can also
switch the HPF (high-pass filter) on/off, and view or
adjust its cutoff frequency.
H EQ graph field
This shows the response of the EQ/HPF.
I INSERT field (INPUT channels 1–32 and MIX/
MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only)
The signal route for insertion in the channel can be
switched on/off here.
J DIRECT field (INPUT channels only)
This is an on/off switch for the signal that is directly output from the channel. You can also view and edit the output level here.
K SAFE field
Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for that channel. If
only some of the channel parameters are set to Recall
Safe, the PARTIAL indicator will light.
L FADER field
Here you can view and edit the input/output level of the
channel, and switch the channel on/off.
M MUTE field
Here you can select the mute group to which that channel
is assigned. SAFE indicator will light if the corresponding
channel is set to Mute Safe.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
This section explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control all of the
parameters for a specific channel.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display. If you leave this screen displayed, you will
always be able to view the settings in the screen while
operating an encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
Even if a screen other than the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen is selected, the encoders of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section always affect the currently
selected channel. When you operate an encoder, a
small popup window indicating the value of that
parameter will appear in the screen.
HINT
• You can also access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen by
pressing any one of the encoders in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired
fader layer.
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
section, ST IN section, or STEREO MASTER
section to select a channel.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
will affect the channel that is currently selected by its
[SEL] key. The number and name of the currently
selected channel is shown in the upper left of the display.
4 Use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons and knobs in
the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to edit the
parameters of the selected channel.
1
2
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
7
1 Channel number
B Channel name
HINT
• In the case of ST IN channels or STEREO channels, you can
switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same
[SEL] key.
• In order to select a MATRIX/MONO channel on the LS9-16,
you must first select the custom fader layer to which you’ve
assigned that channel, and then press the corresponding
[SEL] key.
• You can also move the cursor to the selected channel in the
upper left of the display, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to change the selected channel.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
83
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Subsequent operations will differ depending on the
parameters you want to adjust.
● Adjusting the send levels from a specific channel to the MIX buses / MATRIX
buses
Use the SEND field when you want to send the signal
from an INPUT/ST IN channel to a MIX bus, or from a
MIX, STEREO, or MONO channel to a MATRIX bus.
1
To adjust the send level to a MIX bus / MATRIX bus, use
the keys of the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select
the send-destination bus, and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder. (Alternatively,
move the cursor to the TO MIX LEVEL/TO MATRIX
LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys.)
If desired, you can use the TO MIX ON/OFF buttons to
switch the signal sent to each bus on/off (if the MIX bus is
the FIXED type).
At the left side of these buttons is shown the position from
which the signal is sent from the current channel. (For
details on changing the send position → p. 213)
2
HINT
• If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a
time, use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the
popup window (→ p. 64).
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.
• You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to
the To MIX SEND knob of a VARI type, and pressing the [ENTER]
key.
• For MIX buses that are set to STEREO, the left knob indicates the
PAN of the MIX SEND, and the right knob indicates the SEND
LEVEL.
1 SEND popup button
This accesses a popup window where you can make send
level settings for eight channels at a time.
B TO MIX LEVEL (TO MATRIX LEVEL) knobs
These knobs indicate the send level of the signal sent from
that input channel to each MIX bus or MATRIX bus. If the
send-destination MIX bus / MATRIX bus is set to stereo,
the left knob of the two adjacent knobs will operate as a
PAN knob. (For a ST IN channel, a stereo MIX channel, or
STEREO channel, it will operate as the BALANCE knob.)
3
C TO MIX ON/OFF button
If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, the TO
MIX LEVEL knob will not appear; instead, the TO MIX
ON/OFF button will be shown. By moving the cursor to
the TO MIX ON/OFF button and pressing the [ENTER]
key, you can turn the signal sent from that channel to the
MIX button on/off.
84
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Adjusting the send level from the MIX
channels to a specific MATRIX bus
1
To adjust the send level from the MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus, access the send-destination MATRIX
channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.
2
6
3 4
1
1 HA popup button
This button displays the HA/PATCH popup window
where you can make head amp settings for eight channels
at a time (→ p. 57).
B Input port select popup button
This accesses the PATCH/NAME popup window, where
you can select the input port and specify the channel name
and icon. The input port assigned to that channel is shown
inside this button.
C +48V button
1 SEND popup button
This button displays a popup window where you can make
send level settings for eight channels at a time.
B TO MATRIX LEVEL knobs
These adjust the send level of the signal sent from each
MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus.
To adjust the send level to a MATRIX bus, use the keys of
the MIX/MATRIX SELECT section to select the MIX
channel you want to operate, and then operate the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND]
encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the TO
MATRIX LEVEL knob in the screen, and operate the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.)
At the left side of each of these knobs is shown the position from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel.
(For details on changing the send position → p. 213)
HINT
• If you want to make send level settings for eight channels at a
time, use the SEND popup button in the screen to access the
popup window (→ p. 77).
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [SELECTED SEND] encoder.
• You can access the SEND popup window by moving the cursor to
the To MATRIX SEND knob and pressing the [ENTER] key.
• For MATRIX buses that are set to STEREO, the left knob indicates
the PAN of the MATRIX SEND, and the right knob indicates the
SEND LEVEL.
● Making HA settings (input channels
only)
To control the head amp (HA) assigned to an INPUT/ST
IN channel, you will use the [HA GAIN] encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section and the HA field of the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. The HA field
includes the following items.
This button switches the phantom power on/off for the
head amp assigned to that channel.
D ø (phase) button
This button switches the input assigned to that channel
between normal phase and reverse phase. The phase is
reversed when the button is on, and normal when the button is off.
E OVER indicator
This will light when the input signal from the HA reaches
the overload point.
F GAIN knob
This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp
assigned to that channel.
To adjust the gain value, use the SELECTED CHANNEL
section [HA GAIN] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the GAIN knob and operate the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys.) The indicator above the GAIN knob in the
screen shows whether the signal of the patched input port
has overloaded.
When you move the cursor to the input port select popup
button and press the [ENTER] key, the PATCH/NAME
popup window will appear, allowing you to select the
input port and specify the channel name and icon. (For
details on the popup window → p. 55)
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
2
5
HINT
• If you want to make head amp settings for eight channels at a
time, use the HA popup button in the screen to access the HA/
PATCH popup window (→ p. 57).
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA gain is
adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind that noise may
be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold
output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT
connector when using phantom power.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
85
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Changing the output patching (Output
channels only)
To change the output patching of an output channel in the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the PATCH popup button.
1
2
B PAN/BAL knob
The following parameter will change, according to the
channel that is selected.
INPUT channel
TO STEREO PAN
ST IN channel
TO STEREO BALANCE
MIX (MONO x 2) channel
TO STEREO PAN
MIX (STEREO) channel
MIX BALANCE
MATRIX (MONO x 2) channel
Not displayed
MATRIX (STEREO) channel
MATRIX BALANCE
STEREO channel
STEREO BALANCE
MONO channel
Not displayed
HINT
1 PATCH popup button
This button displays the HA/PATCH popup window
where you can make output port settings for eight channels at a time (→ p. 95).
B Output port select popup button
This accesses the PATCH/NAME popup window, where
you can select the output port and specify the channel
name and icon. The output port assigned to that channel is
shown inside the button. For channels to which two or
more output ports are patched, only one will be shown as a
representative.
To select the output port and specify the channel name or
icon, move the cursor to the output port select popup button and press the [ENTER] key to access the PATCH/
NAME popup window (→ p. 69).
HINT
• If you want to make output port settings for eight channels at a
time, use the PATCH popup button in the screen to access the HA/
PATCH popup window (→ p. 95).
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [HA GAIN] encoder.
● Setting the pan/balance
To adjust the pan/balance of the signal sent from that
channel to the STEREO bus, use the [PAN] encoder of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section and the PAN field of the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen. The PAN field includes
the following items.
1
3
2
1 PAN popup button
This button displays the TO STEREO/MONO popup window where you can make pan/balance settings for eight
channels at a time.
86
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
• You can also access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window by
moving the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and pressing the [ENTER]
key.
C ST/MONO button (INPUT, ST IN, MIX channels
only)
This switches the on/off status of the signal sent from that
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
4
D LCR button
If an INPUT, ST IN, or MIX channel is set to LCR mode,
the LCR button is displayed in location 3. The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the
channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus.
To adjust the pan/balance of each channel, use the ST/
MONO button or the LCR button to select the send-destination bus, and operate the SELECTED CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the
PAN/BAL knob in the screen, and operate the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys.)
HINT
• If you want to make pan/balance settings for eight channels at a
time, use the PAN popup button in the screen to access the TO
STEREO/MONO popup window (→ p. 72). Alternatively, you can
move the cursor to the PAN/BAL knob and press the [ENTER] key
to access it.
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [PAN] encoder.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Making dynamics settings
HINT
To operate the dynamics of the currently selected channel,
use the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/
[DYNAMICS 2] encoder, and the DYNA1/DYNA2 field
of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing the SELECTED
CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoder.
NOTE
The DYNA1/DYNA2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen contains the following items.
3
4
5
● Making HPF/EQ settings
To operate the HPF/EQ of the currently selected channel,
use the SELECTED CHANNEL section EQ encoders,
and the EQ field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen.
The EQ field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen contains the following items.
1
1
5
7
6
2
2
4
1 DYNA1/DYNA2 popup buttons
These buttons access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2
popup window, where you can make detailed settings for
dynamics.
B THRESH knob
This indicates the setting of the threshold parameter of a
gate or compressor. To adjust the value, use the
SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYNAMICS 1]/
[DYNAMICS 2] encoder. (Alternatively, move the cursor
to the knob and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.)
C DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
These buttons turn dynamics processors 1/2 on/off.
D OVER indicator
This will light if the output level of the dynamics reaches
the overload point.
E Level meter
This displays a bar graph indication of the signal level
being input to the dynamics (on=green, off=gray) and the
amount of gain reduction (orange). The threshold setting
is shown as a vertical line.
F Parameter knobs
These knobs indicate the values of parameters other than
threshold.
To operate the dynamics, turn the DYNAMICS ON/OFF
button on, and use the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders to adjust the
threshold parameters. (Alternatively, move the cursor to
the DYNA1/DYNA2 field, and operate the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys.)
To make detailed dynamics settings, move the cursor to
the DYNA1/DYNA2 popup button or the DYNA1/
DYNA2 field, and press the [ENTER] key to access the
DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window. (For
details on the popup window → p. 117)
6
3
1 EQ popup button
This button accesses the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window,
where you can make detailed HPF/EQ settings.
B EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on/off.
C HPF ON/OFF button
Switches the HPF on/off.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
• The DYNA 2 field of the SELECTED CH VIEW screen and the
[DYNAMICS 2] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are
valid only if an input channel is selected.
D HPF FREQ knob
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF.
E OVER indicator
This will light when the post-EQ signal reaches the overload point.
F Q/F/G knobs
These knobs indicate the Q, F (center frequency), and G
(amount of boost/cut) settings for each band (LOW, LMID, H-MID, and HIGH).
To operate the EQ, switch the EQ ON/OFF button on, and
use the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN]
knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the
Q, center frequency, and the amount of boost/cut. (Use the
EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ
[LOW] keys to select the band you want to operate.)
Alternatively, move the cursor to the knobs of the EQ field
in the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
To make detailed EQ settings, move the cursor to the EQ
popup button or the knobs of the EQ field, and press the
[ENTER] key to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window.
(For details on the popup window → p. 115)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
87
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Making direct output settings (INPUT
channels only)
HINT
• You can also use the cursor keys to switch bands.
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you can
also access the above popup window by pressing an EQ encoder
in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
Use the DIRECT field to make direct-output related settings for an INPUT channel in the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen. This field includes the following items.
1
NOTE
• The type of the LOW band EQ or HIGH band EQ cannot be
switched in the SELECTED CH VIEW screen. If necessary, you
can access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window and switch the EQ
type.
• If the HIGH band EQ type is set to Low Pass Filter, the HIGH band
Q knob will not be displayed, and the GAIN knob will function as
an on/off switch for the Low Pass Filter.
● Making insert settings (INPUT channels
1–32 and MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO
channels only)
Use the INSERT field to make insert-related settings in the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This field includes the following items.
1
2
2
1 DIRECT popup button
This button accesses the DIRECT OUT popup window,
where you can assign an output port to the direct output
and adjust the output level for eight channels at a time.
B DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button
Turns the direct output on/off.
To make direct output settings, move the cursor to the
DIRECT popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the DIRECT OUT popup window. (For details on
the popup window → p. 103)
When you’ve assigned an output port to direct output in
the popup window, turn on the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF
button.
3
● Setting a channel to Recall Safe
1 INSERT popup button
This accesses the INSERT popup window, where you can
assign input/output ports to insert-in/insert-out and specify
the signal insertion points for eight channels at a time.
In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the SAFE field
to set the currently selected channel to the Recall Safe status (in which that channel will not be affected by Recall
operations). This field includes the following items.
B IN indicator
This indicates the signal level of the input port that is
patched to insert-in.
C INSERT ON/OFF button
1
3
2
Switches the insert on/off.
To make insert settings, move the cursor to the INSERT
popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access the
INSERT popup window. (For details on the popup window → p. 101)
When you’ve assigned input/output ports to insert-in/out
in the popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button.
1 SAFE popup button
This opens the RECALL SAFE screen, where you can
make settings related to Recall Safe.
B PARTIAL indicator
This indicator will light if only some of the parameters of
that channel are set to Recall Safe.
C RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button
Switches the Recall Safe status on/off for the channel.
To set all parameters of the channel to Recall Safe mode,
press the RECALL SAFE ON/OFF button to turn it on.
If you want to set only specific parameters of the channel
to Recall Safe mode, use the SAFE popup button to access
the RECALL SAFE screen, and select the parameters that
you want to be in Recall Safe mode. (For details on the
RECALL SAFE screen → p. 140)
88
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
● Turning a channel on/off
● Assigning a channel to a mute group
Use the FADER field to switch the channel on/off in the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen. This field includes the following items.
In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, use the MUTE field
to assign a channel to a mute group (a group that allows
multiple channels to be muted/unmuted simultaneously).
This field includes the following items.
1
2
1
4
3
3
2
1 ∑ CLIP indicator
This indicator will light if an overload occurs at even one
of the level detection points in that channel.
1 MUTE popup button
This accesses the MUTE GROUP screen, where you can
select the channels to be assigned to each mute group.
C Input/output level
This indicates the current setting of the fader.
B MUTE buttons 1–8
These buttons select the mute group(s) to which this channel is assigned.
D CH ON/OFF button
This button switches the channel on/off. This is linked
with the [ON] button of the top panel.
When you press the CH ON/OFF button in the FADER
field, that channel will be switched on/off. If you move the
cursor to the fader and operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys, the level of that channel will change.
If a fader layer that includes the corresponding channel is
recalled to the top panel, the corresponding [ON] key and
fader will be linked with these operations.
C MUTE SAFE indicator
This will light if the corresponding channel is set to Mute
Safe (the state in which it will not be affected by Mute
operations). Mute Safe settings can be made in the MUTE
GROUP screen.
To assign the channel to a mute group, turn on the desired
mute button 1–8 (multiple selections are allowed).
To check the channels that are assigned to each mute
group, move the cursor to the MUTE popup button and
press the [ENTER] key to access the MUTE GROUP
screen. (For details on the MUTE GROUP screen →
p. 121)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
7
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
B Fader
This indicates and adjusts the input/output level of the
channel. This is linked with the fader on the top panel.
89
90
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 8
Custom fader layer
This chapter explains how to assign the desired channels to the custom
fader layer.
About the custom fader layer
The channel module section and ST IN channel section on the top panel of the LS9 consists of
four layers called “fader layers.”
Custom fader layer
8
Fader layer 1-16 {1-32}
Fader layer 17-32 {33-64}
Master fader layer
Custom fader layer
When you switch between these fader layers, you are changing the channels that will be controlled by the faders, encoders,
[ON] keys, and [SEL] keys of the channel module section and ST IN channel section.
Use the keys of the LAYER section to switch fader layers.
Fader layer 1-16
Fader layer 17-32
Master fader layer
Custom fader layer
LS9-16
Fader layer 1-32
Fader layer 33-64
Master fader layer
Custom fader layer
LS9-32
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
91
About the custom fader layer • Assigning channels to the custom fader layer
Of the above fader layers, channels are pre-assigned to
fader layer 1-16 {1-32}, fader layer 17-32 {33-64}, and
the master fader layer (→ p. 28).
However, you are free to assign desired channels to the
custom fader layer that is recalled when you press the
LAYER [CUSTOM FADER] key.
For example, INPUT channels belonging to different fader
layers could be assigned to consecutive modules so that
they can be operated together. Alternatively, input channels and output channels can both be assigned, so that you
could simultaneously operate the send level from an
INPUT channel to a specific MIX bus at the same time
that you adjust the master level of that MIX bus itself.
CH1
CH5
CH10 CH13 CH17 CH19 MIX1 MIX2
Assigning channels to the custom fader layer
To assign the desired channels to the custom fader layer, proceed as follows.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
2 Move the cursor to the CUSTOM FADER
LAYER popup button in the screen, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the channel that will be
assigned to each channel module or ST channel.
1
1
2
1 CUSTOM FADER LAYER popup button
92
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
LS9-32
Assigning channels to the custom fader layer
1 Channel module select field
Select the channels that will be assigned to the top
panel channel modules 1–16 {1–32}.
B ST IN channel select field
Select the channels that will be assigned to the top
panel ST IN channels 1–2 {1–4}.
3 Move the cursor to the channel module
● Channels that can be selected in the ST IN
channel select field
• ST IN channels 1–4
HINT
• As an alternative to using the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys,
you can move the cursor to the field you want to edit and
press a [SEL] key to select a channel.
select field or the ST IN channel select field,
use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the channel that you want to assign
to that field, and press the [ENTER] key.
4 Assign channels to other fields in the same
The field will show the name of the selected channel.
ated, press the LAYER [CUSTOM FADER]
key in the LAYER section.
way.
5 To recall the custom fader layer you’ve creThe channels you selected in step 3 will be assigned to
the channel module section and ST IN channel section
of the panel.
The following channels can be selected for each field.
● Channels that can be selected in the chan-
• Custom fader layer settings are remembered for each user.
When a user logs-in, their previous settings will be reproduced.
nel module select field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64}
ST IN channels 1–4
STEREO channel
MONO channels
MIX channels 1–16
MATRIX channels 1–8
MONITOR LEVEL
8
Custom fader layer
HINT
If you select a ST IN channel 1–4 or the STEREO
channel in the channel module select field, the L/R
channels will be assigned together. In this case, the
channel module will operate as follows.
• The fader and [ON] key will operate the L and R
channels together.
• The L and R channels will be selected alternately each time you press the [SEL] key.
• The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of
the L or R channel, whichever level is greater.
If you select one of a pair of MIX/MATRIX channels
set to stereo in the channel module select field, the
channel module will operate as follows.
• The fader and [ON] key will operate the two
MIX/MATRIX channels together.
• Pressing the [SEL] key will select only the MIX/
MATRIX channel that you assigned.
• The meter LEDs will indicate the signal level of
the L or R channel, whichever level is greater.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
93
94
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 9
Input/output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching,
how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs.
Changing the output patching
When the LS9 is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks and internal ports) are patched to the
following output channels.
Output port (jack / internal port)
Output channels
OMNI OUT jacks 1–6
MIX channels 1–6
OMNI OUT jacks 7–8
STEREO L/R channel
Slot output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Rack inputs 5A (L), 6A (L), 7A (L), 8A (L)
MIX channels 13–16
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R)
STEREO L/R channel
USB memory recorder input (L/R)
STEREO L/R channel
● Selecting the output port for each output channel
Here’s how to select the output port that will be the output
destination for each output channel.
1 Press the [HOME] key to access the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the
[SEL] keys to select an output channel.
1
For the LS9-32
Output port (jack / internal port)
2
3
Output channels
OMNI OUT jacks 1–12
MIX channels 1–12
OMNI OUT jacks 13–14
MATRIX channels 1–2
OMNI OUT jacks 15–16
STEREO L/R channel
Slot 1 output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 1 output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Slot 2 output channels 1–8
MIX channels 1–8
Slot 2 output channels 9–16
MIX channels 9–16
Rack inputs 5A (L), 6A (L), 7A (L), 8A (L)
MIX channels 13–16
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack (L/R)
STEREO L/R channel
USB memory recorder input (L/R)
STEREO L/R channel
However, the above patching can be modified as needed.
If you want to change the output patching, you can either
select the output port that will be the output destination for
each channel, or you can select the channel that will be the
output source for each output port.
9
Input/output patching
For the LS9-16
1 Channel number / Channel name
B PATCH popup button
C Port select popup button
HINT
• As an alternative to using the PATCH popup button, you can
also select the output port in the PATCH/NAME popup window that appears when you move the cursor to the port select
popup button and press the [ENTER] key (→ p. 69).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
95
Changing the output patching
2 Move the cursor to the PATCH popup button
in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The HA/PATCH popup window will appear. This
popup window shows the output port assigned to the
output channels, in groups of eight channels.
1 Category tab
This selects the type of output ports that are shown in
the lower part of the popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following output ports.
● OMNI/2TR OUT
Shows the OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} and 2TR
OUT DIGITAL jack.
1
2
3
● SLOT {1/2}
Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.
● RACK
Shows the inputs of racks 1–8. Use this when you
want to send the signal of an output channel to the
input of a GEQ or effect.
HINT
1 Channel number
• For details on GEQ and effects, refer to p.157.
This is the number of the output channel.
B Channel name
These are the names of each channel.
● REC IN
C Port select popup button
This button selects the output port assigned to the
channel. The currently selected output port is shown.
Shows the input of the USB memory recorder. Use
this when you want to send the signal of an output
channel to the input of the USB memory recorder.
B Port select button
HINT
• Even if multiple output ports are assigned, only one output
port is shown.
3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the
output port for the desired channel, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the output port for the
output channel.
This popup window contains the following items.
This selects the output port that is assigned to the corresponding channel.
C Level indicator
This indicates the state of the port’s signal using the
following colors.
• -60 dB or below ........... black
• -60 dB to -18 dB .......... green
• -18 dB to 0 dB.............. yellow
• OVER............................ red‘
4 Move the cursor to the desired tab in the
upper part of the window, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The type of ports shown in the lower part of the window will change according to the tab you selected.
1
3
2
5 Move the cursor to the desired port select
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
That port will be selected as the output destination.
You can select more than one output port.
6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
LS9-16
press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen.
HINT
• As an alternative to using the CLOSE button, you can return
to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key once.
7 If necessary, perform the same steps for
other output channels.
96
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Changing the output patching
● Selecting the output channel for each
output port
Here’s how to select the output channel that will be the
output source for each output port.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
J
1 INITIALIZE button
This initializes the settings for the displayed output
ports. When you move the cursor to this button and
press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box will ask you to
confirm the Initialize operation.
C DELAY SCALE field
Use the following buttons to select the units for the
delay time displayed below the delay time setting
knob (6).
● METER
The delay time is displayed as a distance in meters,
calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20°C (68°F) (343.59 m/s) × delay time
(seconds).
9
Input/output patching
LS9-16
B I/O card type
If the output channel of a slot is selected for operations, this area indicates the type of I/O card installed
in that slot.
● FEET
LS9-32
In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP field in the center of
the screen, you can select the output port assigned to
the output channel from the following choices.
● OMNI 1-8 {1-8/9-16}
Select the output channels assigned to OMNI OUT
jacks 1–8 {1–16}.
● SLOT {1/2} 1-8/9-16
Select the output channels assigned to output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.
● 2TR OUT
Select the output channel assigned to the 2TR
OUT DIGITAL jack.
2 In the OUTPUT PORT SETUP field, move
the cursor to the button for the output ports
that you want to set, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The delay time is displayed as a distance in feet,
calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20°C (68°F) (1127.26 feet/s) × delay time
(seconds).
● SAMPLE
The delay time is displayed in units of samples. If
you change the sampling frequency on which the
LS9 operates, the number of samples will change
accordingly.
● msec
The delay time is displayed in units of milliseconds.
D Output port
This is the type and number of the output port to
which the channel is assigned.
E Channel select button
This button selects the channel assigned to the output
port. The number of the currently selected channel is
shown.
The OUTPUT PORT popup window will appear,
allowing you to make output port settings.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
97
Changing the output patching
F Delay time setting knob
This knob sets the delay time of the output port. Move
the cursor to this knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys to adjust the setting. The delay time value
is shown below the knob, using the units selected in
the DELAY SCALE field (3).
G DELAY button
Switches the delay on/off for the output port.
H ø (phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output
port between normal phase (black) and reverse phase
(orange).
I ATT knob
Adjusts the amount of attenuation/boost for the signal
assigned to the output port. To change the setting,
move the cursor to this knob in the screen, and use the
dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys. You can adjust the value
in 1.0 dB steps in a range of -96 – +24 dB. The current
value is shown immediately below the knob.
J Level meter
This meter shows the signal level of the channel
assigned to the output port.
3 To assign a channel to an output port, move
the cursor to the channel number field of
that port, and press the [ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will
appear. This popup window contains the following
items.
select buttons to select the send-source
channel.
5 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen.
If PATCH is turned on in the CONFIRMATION field
of the PREFERENCE popup window, a confirmation
dialog box will appear when you attempt to modify the
patching.
If STEAL PATCH is turned on, a confirmation dialog
box will appear if you attempt to change a location
that is already patched to another location. (For
details, refer to → p. 194)
HINT
• If you assign CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64} to an output port, the
selected INPUT channel will be output directly from the corresponding output port. In this case, the channel select button
in the OUTPUT PORT popup window will indicate “DIR CH
xx” (xx = channel number). (For details on direct output →
p. 103)
6 Make settings for delay, phase, and
attenuator as necessary.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 to assign channels to
other output ports.
8 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or to
the × symbol in the upper right of the window), and press the [ENTER] key to return
to the previous screen.
1
2
LS9-32
1 Category tab
This selects the type of channel that will be shown in
the lower part of the window. Each tab corresponds to
the following channels.
● OUT CH
Output channels (MIX channels 1–16, MATRIX
channels 1–8, STEREO L/R channel, and MONO
(C) channel) will be shown.
● MONITOR OUT
The MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels will be
shown.
● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64}
INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64} will be shown.
B Channel select button
This selects the channel that is assigned to the output
port.
98
4 Use the category tabs and the channel
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Changing the input patching
Changing the input patching
When the LS9 is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks / internal ports) are patched to
each input channel.
2 Move the cursor to the HA popup button in
For the LS9-16
Input port (jack / internal port)
INPUT jacks 1–16
INPUT channels 17–32
Slot input channels 1–16
ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R)
Rack outputs 5–8 (L/R)
For the LS9-32
Input channels
the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The HA/PATCH popup window will appear. In this
popup window, you can view the input port and name
selected for each input channel, turn the phantom
power on/off, adjust the gain, and switch between normal/reversed phase, in groups of eight channels.
Input port (jack / internal port)
INPUT channels 1–32
INPUT jacks 1–32
INPUT channels 33–48
Slot 1 input channels 1–16
INPUT channels 49–64
Slot 2 input channels 1–16
ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R)
Rack outputs 5–8 (L/R)
However, the above patching can be modified as needed.
Here’s how to change the patching of each input channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
1 Press the [HOME] key to access the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the
[SEL] keys to select an input channel.
1
2 3
1 Channel number
This is the number of the input channel.
B Channel name
This is the name of the input channel.
C Port select popup button
This button selects the input port assigned to the channel. The currently selected input port is shown.
Input/output patching
Input channels
INPUT channels 1–16
D +48V button
This button switches the phantom power on (red) or
off (black) for the head amp assigned to that channel.
1 Channel number / Channel name
B HA popup button
C Port select popup button
HINT
• As an alternative to using the HA popup button, you can also
select the input port in the PATCH/NAME popup window that
appears when you move the cursor to the port select popup
button and press the [ENTER] key (→ p. 55).
E GAIN knob
This indicates the amount of gain for the head amp
assigned to that channel. Move the cursor to the knob
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the
setting. The level meter located immediately to the
right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port.
NOTE
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
F ø (phase) button
This button switches the head amp assigned to that
channel between normal phase (black) and reverse
phase (orange).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
99
Changing the input patching
3 Move the cursor to the port select popup
button for the desired channel, and press
the [ENTER] key.
The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the input port for the
input channel.
This popup window contains the following items.
4 Use the category tabs and the port select
buttons to select the input-source port.
5 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen.
HINT
• As an alternative to using the CLOSE button, you can return
to the previous screen by pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL section [HOME] key once.
1
6 If necessary, perform the same steps for
2
other input channels.
LS9-16
1 Category tab
These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the
popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following
input ports.
● IN 1-16 {1-32}
Shows INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}.
● SLOT {1/2}
Shows input channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.
● RACK
Shows the outputs of racks 1–8. Use this when you
want to send the output of a GEQ or effect to an
input channel.
HINT
• For details on GEQ and effects, refer to p.157.
● 2TR IN/PB OUT
Shows the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack and the USB
memory recorder’s output. Use this when you
want to send the input signal from the 2TR IN
DIGITAL jack or the output signal of the USB
memory recorder to an input channel.
B Port select button
This selects the input port that is assigned to the channel.
100
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Inserting an external device into a channel
Inserting an external device into a channel
If necessary, you can insert an internal effect/GEQ or an external device such as an effect processor into the signal path of INPUT channels 1–32 or any output channel (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO). When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the signal
patch location of the insertion can be specified individually for each channel.
Here we will explain how an external device connected to an I/O card in a slot can be inserted
into the desired channel.
1 Connect your external device to the I/O card
installed in a slot {1/2}.
3 Move the cursor to the INSERT popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER]
key.
NOTE
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
• For the INPUT channels, insert connections can be made
only for channels 1–32. If an INPUT channel 33–64 is
selected on the LS9-32, the INSERT popup button is not
shown.
DIGITAL IN
Digital I/O
card
Effect processor
The INSERT popup window will appear. In this popup
window, you can view the insert input/output port,
change the insert position and switches the insert on/
off, in groups of eight channels.
LS9
1
2
3
4
NOTE
• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an
external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the
LS9 and the external device (→ p. 46).
9
Input/output patching
DIGITAL OUT
5
7
6
2 Press the [HOME] key to access the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the
[SEL] keys to select the channel into which
you want to insert an external device.
1 Channel block diagram
This shows the direct output position (only for INPUT
channels) and the position of the insert connection for
the selected channel.
B Channel number
This is the channel number.
1
C Channel name
This is the channel name.
D Insert point select box
This selects the insert point for the signal. Move the
cursor to this box and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to switch between PRE EQ (immediately before
the EQ) or PRE FADER (immediately before the
fader).
1 INSERT popup button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
101
Inserting an external device into a channel
7 Move the cursor to the input port select
E Output port select popup button
F Input port select popup button
popup button, and press the [ENTER] key.
These buttons select the output port and input port that
are patched to insert-out and insert-in. The currently
selected output port and input port are shown.
G INSERT ON/OFF button
This button turns the insert on/off. To switch this on/
off, move the cursor to this button and use the [DEC]/
[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key.
4 Move the cursor to the output port select
The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the input port that will
be patched to insert-in.
1
2
popup button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the output port that will
be patched to insert-out.
LS9-16
1
1 Category tab
These tabs select the input ports that are shown in the
popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following
input ports.
2
● SLOT {1/2}
Shows input channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.
● RACK
LS9-16
1 Category tab
These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the
popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following
output ports.
● SLOT {1/2}
Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.
● RACK
Shows the inputs of racks 1–8. Use these when you
want to insert a GEQ or effect into that channel.
B Port select button
This selects the output port that is assigned to insertout.
5 Use the category tabs and the port select
buttons to select the insert-out port.
6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen.
Shows the outputs of racks 1–8. Use these when
you want to insert a GEQ or effect into the channel.
B Port select button
This selects the input port that is assigned to insert-in.
8 Use the category tabs and the port select
buttons to select the insert-in port.
9 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen.
10 Move the cursor to the insert point select
box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to select the insert point.
You can select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ)
or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader).
11 Move the cursor to the INSERT ON/OFF button, and press the [DEC]/[INC] keys or the
[ENTER] key to turn it ON.
This enables the insertion you specified.
HINT
• After moving the cursor to the insert-out patch select box in
step 4, you can also select the output port by using the dial or
the [DEC]/[INC] keys instead of pressing the [ENTER] key.
102
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from the desired OMNI OUT jack or from
the output channel of a desired slot. For example by sending signals to an external digital
recorder via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, you can make a live recording without affecting
the LS9’s internal mixing.
1 Connect your external device to an OMNI
OUT jack or to an I/O card installed in a slot
{1/2}.
DIGITAL OUT
DIGITAL IN
3 Move the cursor to the DIRECT popup button in the screen, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The DIRECT OUT popup window will appear. In this
popup window you can view the name of each channel, switch the direct output point, and adjust the output level, in groups of eight channels.
Digital I/O
card
Digital recorder
1
2
3
4
5
LS9
NOTE
• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an
external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the
LS9 and the external device (→ p. 46).
1 Channel block diagram
This shows the direct output point for the selected
channel.
Input/output patching
9
6
7
B Channel number
This is the channel number.
2 Press the [HOME] key to access the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and use the
[SEL] keys to select the INPUT channel
from which you want to take a direct output.
1
C Channel name
This is the channel name.
D Direct out point select box
This selects the point from which the signal will be
directly output. Move the cursor to this box and use
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to switch between
PRE HPF (immediately before the high pass filter),
PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), or PRE
FADER (immediately before the fader).
E DIRECT ON/OFF button
This button turns direct output on/off. To switch this
on/off, move the cursor to this button and use the
[DEC]/[INC] keys or the [ENTER] key.
F Port select popup button
This button selects the output port that will be patched
to direct output. The currently selected output port is
shown.
1 DIRECT popup button
G DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
This knob adjusts the level of the direct output.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
103
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
4 Move the cursor to the port select popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the output port that will
be patched to direct output.
8 Move the cursor to the DIRECT OUT ON/
OFF button, and press the [DEC]/[INC] keys
or the [ENTER] key to turn it ON.
This enables the direct output you specified.
9 As necessary, move the cursor to the
DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob and use the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the level of
the direct output.
1
2
HINT
• As an alternate method of specifying a direct output, you can
select an INPUT channel as the output source of an output
port (→ p. 98).
LS9-16
1 Category tab
These tabs select the output ports that are shown in the
popup window. Each tab corresponds to the following
output ports.
● OMNI / 2TR OUT
Shows OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16} and 2TR
OUT DIGITAL jack.
● SLOT {1/2}
Shows output channels 1–16 of the slot(s) {1/2}.
● REC IN
Shows USB memory recorder input channels.
B Port select button
This selects the output port that is assigned to direct
output.
5 Use the category tabs and the port select
buttons to select the port that will be the
direct output.
6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to return to the previous screen.
7 Move the cursor to the direct out point
select box, and use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys to select the direct out point.
You can choose PRE HPF (immediately before the
high-pass filter), PRE EQ (immediately before the
EQ), or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader).
104
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 10
USB memory recorder
This chapter explains how to use the USB memory recorder.
About the USB memory recorder
■ Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
MIX 1–16
MATRIX 1–8
RECORDER
INPUT
L
STEREO L/R
USB memory
recorder
MONO
INPUT 1–32 {1–64}
DIRECT OUT
R
L
R
PLAYBACK
OUT
INPUT 1–32 {1–64}
10
USB memory recorder
The LS9 provides a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal signals to
USB memory, or play back audio files recorded on USB memory.
As the file format for recording, it uses MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3). For playback, it supports
MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) files. However, DRM
(Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be
recorded to USB memory, or background music or sound effects saved in USB memory can be
played back via an assigned input channel.
ST IN 1L/1R–
ST IN 4L/4R
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
105
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder
Here’s how to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder.
You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the
recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the
RECORDER screen.
In this screen you can assign signals to the input and
output of the USB memory recorder, and perform
recording and playback operations.
2
1
3 4
8
6
7
F PLAYBACK OUT field
Here you can make settings for the recorder outputs.
G PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons L/R
These buttons access the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can patch channels to the L/R outputs of the recorder.
H Output level meter
This level meter indicates the level of the signal being
output from the recorder.
I OUTPUT CUE button
This button cue-monitors the signal that is being output from the recorder. Move the cursor to the button
and press the [ENTER] key to turn cue on/off.
2 To assign channels to the recorder inputs,
move the cursor to the RECORDER INPUT
popup button L or R, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will
appear.
5
9
1 RECORDER INPUT field
1
Here you can make settings for the recorder inputs.
B RECORDER INPUT popup buttons L/R
These buttons access the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can patch channels to the L/
R inputs of the recorder.
2
C ATT (attenuator) knob
This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation/boost for
the signal that is input to the recorder. You can adjust
the value in 0.1 dB steps in a range of -96 to +24 dB.
The current value is shown immediately below the
knob.
D Input level meter
This level meter indicates the level of the signal being
input to the recorder.
E INPUT CUE button
This button cue-monitors the signal that is being input
to the recorder. Move the cursor to the button and
press the [ENTER] key to turn cue on/off.
106
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
LS9-32
1 Category tabs
These tabs select the type of channels shown in the
lower part of the window.
● OUT CH
Output channels will be shown.
● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64}
Direct outputs of INPUT channels 1–32 {1–32/
33–64} will be shown.
Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder
B Channel select buttons
Select the channels that will be assigned to the USB
memory recorder’s inputs, from the following choices.
● MIX 1–16
MIX channels 1–16
● MTRX 1–8
6 To assign channels to the recorder outputs,
move the cursor to the PLAYBACK OUT
popup button L or R, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will
appear.
MATRIX channels 1–8
● ST L/R
STEREO channel L/R
1
● ST L+C
STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C)
channel
2
● ST R+C
STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO (C)
channel
● MONO
LS9-32
MONO channel
● CH1–32 {1–64}
3 Use the category tabs and the port select
1 Category tabs
These tabs select the type of channels shown in the
lower part of the window.
buttons to select the channel that you want
to patch to the USB memory recorder input.
● CH 1-32 {1-32/33-64}
If you select a channel to which another port is already
patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch
change. Move the cursor to the OK button of the
dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.
● ST IN
NOTE
• You cannot assign multiple channels to a single input.
4 When you’ve finished making the assign-
ment, move the cursor to the CLOSE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the RECORDER screen.
5 Assign a channel to the other input in the
same way.
HINT
• The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in
stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal
for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs
to the same channel.
INPUT channels 1–32 {1–32/33–64} will be
shown
L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4 will be
shown.
B Channel select buttons
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB
memory recorder’s outputs, from the following
choices.
10
USB memory recorder
Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–32 {1–64}
● CH 1–32 {1–64}
INPUT channels 1–32 {1–64}
● STIN 1L/1R–STIN 4L/4R
L/R channels of ST IN channels 1–4
7 Use the category tabs and the channel
select buttons to select the channel that
you want to patch to the USB memory
recorder input.
If you select a channel to which another signal is
already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm
the patch change. Move the cursor to the OK button of
the dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output.
8 When you’ve finished making the assign-
ment, move the cursor to the CLOSE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the RECORDER screen.
9 Assign a channel to the other output in the
same way.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
107
Recording to USB memory
Recording to USB memory
Here’s how to record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the
USB memory inserted in the USB connector located at the right of the display.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the
RECORDER screen.
For playback as well, you will only be able to play
back audio files that are saved in the SONGS folder or
in the currently selected folder below that level.
■ USB memory folder structure
YPE folder
Root directory
SONGS folder
Songs
(Audio files)
1
2
3 4
5
6
1 Audio file display field
The track number, title, artist, format (MP3/WMA/
AAC), and bit rate of during playback or the most
recently played audio file are displayed.
B REMAIN/ELAPSE button
This button selects the content that is shown in the
TIME FIELD (3). When you move the cursor to this
button and press the [ENTER] key, the field will alternate between showing REMAIN (remaining time display) and ELAPSE (elapsed time display).
C TIME (remaining time / elapsed time) field
According to the setting in (2), this shows either the
remaining time that can be recorded to USB memory,
or the elapsed time.
D Transport
These buttons perform record/play/stop operations for
the USB memory recorder.
E REC RATE (bit depth) button
3 Assign the desired channels to the input
and output of the USB memory recorder (→
p. 106).
4 So that you can monitor the signal being
recorded on the recorder, raise the fader of
the channel(s) that are patched to the input/
output of the recorder.
The level meter in the RECORDER screen shows the
signal level before and after the recorder. If necessary,
use the ATT knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to
adjust the input level to the recorder.
NOTE
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder
output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
This selects the bit depth for recording.
F FREE SIZE field
This indicates the amount of free capacity in USB
memory, in terms of MB and as a percentage.
2 Connect USB memory with sufficient free
capacity to the USB connector.
The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free
capacity.
When you connect USB memory to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE
folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB memory.
The files created by recording operations will be saved
in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently
selected folder below that level.
108
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
HINT
• Operating the ATT knob will not affect the level of the signal
being output to other ports from the corresponding output
channel.
5 Move the cursor to the REC RATE field in
the lower right of the screen, and use the
dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the bit
depth of the audio file that will be recorded.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps.
Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but
will increase the size of the data.
HINT
• The word clock rate at which the LS9 is currently operating
(44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) will automatically be selected as the
sampling rate of the audio file.
Recording to USB memory
6 Move the cursor to the REC button (●) at
the bottom of the screen, and press the
[ENTER] key.
You will use the transport at the bottom of the screen
to perform record/play/stop operations for the
recorder.
1
2
3
4
5
D FF (
) button
● When you move the cursor to this button,
and press and immediately release the
[ENTER] key
You will move to the beginning of the next song in
the title list.
● When you move the cursor to this button,
and press and hold the [ENTER] key for
two seconds or longer
The song will be fast-forwarded.
1 REW (
) button
● When you move the cursor to this button,
and press and immediately release the
[ENTER] key
You will return to the beginning of the song. If you
were already at the beginning, you will return to
the beginning of the preceding song in the title list
(→ p. 110).
● When you move the cursor to this button,
and press and hold the [ENTER] key for
two seconds or longer
The song will rewind.
In either of the above cases, operating this button during playback will cause playback to resume from the
current location when you release the [ENTER] key.
B STOP (■) button
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key during playback
Playback will stop.
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key during recording
Recording will stop, and the recorded content will
be saved in a file (the file name and title will be
assigned a default name).
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key in record-ready
mode
Record-ready mode will be defeated.
C PLAY/PAUSE (
) button
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key while stopped
In either of the above cases, operating this button during playback will cause playback to resume from the
current location when you release the [ENTER] key.
E REC (●) button
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key while stopped
The recorder will be in record-ready mode, and the
PLAY/PAUSE (
) button will blink.
HINT
• You can also assign the function of each button to a userdefined key (→ p. 196).
While stopped, move the cursor to the REC (●) button
and press the [ENTER] key; the PLAY/PAUSE (
)
button will blink, and the recorder will be in recordready mode.
7 To begin recording, move the cursor to the
PLAY/PAUSE (
) button in the lower part
of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
During recording, the REC (●) button and the PLAY/
PAUSE (
) button will light. The TIME field will
indicate the elapsed time.
10
USB memory recorder
Each button has the following function.
8 To stop recording, move the cursor to the
STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER]
key.
The audio file will be saved to USB memory.
HINT
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the
SONGS folder within the YPE folder. However, you may also
specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name.
You can change this later.
Playback will start.
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key during playback
Playback will pause.
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key in record-ready
mode
Recording will start.
● When you move the cursor to this button
and press the [ENTER] key during recording
Recording will pause.
9 To audition the recorded content, proceed
as follows.
1 Move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE (
)
button and press the [ENTER] key.
The recorded content will be played back via the input
channel you specified in step 3.
B To stop playback, move the cursor to the
STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER]
key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
109
Playing back audio files from USB memory
Playing back audio files from USB memory
Here’s how to play back audio files that have been saved on USB memory. In addition to files that
were recorded on the LS9 console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer
to USB memory.
Three types of audio file format can be played: MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows
Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The sampling rate can be either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz,
and the bit rate can be between 64 kbps and 320 kbps.
1 Connect the USB memory containing the
audio files to the USB connector.
NOTE
• If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the
SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you’ve created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders
and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the
TITLE LIST screen.
9
J
C Playback selection check field
This field lets you select the files that will be played
back during consecutive playback. When you move
the cursor to this field and press the [ENTER] key, the
check mark will alternately appear or disappear.
D Status
This field shows a symbol to indicate whether the currently selected file is playing ( ) or paused ( ).
E SONG TITLE/FILE NAME
This field shows the title or file name of the song. If
the title is too long to be displayed, a “~” character is
shown at the end.
F ARTIST
This field shows the artist of the song. If the artist
name is too long to be displayed, a “~” character is
shown at the end.
K
G TIME
This field shows the length of the song in hours : minutes : seconds.
1
4
H MODE button
This button switches the playback mode. You can play
back one song or all songs, and play them only once or
repeatedly.
23
5
6
7 8
I Change directory button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the list will show the contents of the
directory at the next higher level.
J PATH (current path) field
1 Title list
This list shows the playable audio files and the folders
that are saved in the selected folder of USB memory.
The row with the blue background in the center of the
list indicates the file/folder that is selected for operations.
B No. (track number)
This number indicates the order of each file for consecutive playback. If there is a lower-level folder, a
folder icon (
) is shown here. If an icon (
) is
shown here, it indicates that an upper level exists.
Move the cursor to a displayed number and press the
[ENTER] key to play back that audio file.
110
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
This shows the full pathname of the folder (directory)
that is currently selected as the recording destination
and playback source.
K JPN button
If this button is on, the titles or artist names in the list
or of the currently-playing song will be displayed in
Japanese characters compatible with Shift-JIS character encoding (double-byte code).
This setting will also be reflected in the RECORDER
screen and in the TITLE/ARTIST EDIT popup window.
Playing back audio files from USB memory
3 You can use the change directory button in
the screen and the folder icon in the No.
field to view a content list of the folder that
includes the desired file.
● To move to a folder below
Move the cursor to a folder icon shown in the No. field
of the list, and press the [ENTER] key.
4 Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys so
that the desired file is shown in the center
of the list.
5 Move the cursor to the MODE button and
press the [ENTER] key to select the playback mode.
The setting will alternate between the following four
modes each time you press the [ENTER] key.
●
Starting with the currently selected song in the title
list, songs will play back consecutively, and playback
will stop at the last song in the list.
●
Starting with the currently selected song in the title
list, songs will play back consecutively until the last
song; then playback will return to the first song and
will continue until you stop playback.
●
● To move to the folder above
The currently selected song will play repeatedly until
you stop playback.
Move the cursor to the change directory button and
press the [ENTER] key.
●
6 If you selected a consecutive playback
mode in step 5, move the cursor to the playback selection check field for each song
you want to play, and press the [ENTER]
key.
When performing consecutive playback, the files with
a check mark will be played.
7 Move the cursor to the PLAY/PAUSE (
USB memory recorder
10
The currently selected song will play once and then
stop.
)
button and press the [ENTER] key.
The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing.
HINT
• When you move to a different folder in this way, that folder will
automatically be selected as the recording-destination.
NOTE
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS
folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the
SONGS folder.
HINT
• The USB memory recorder can play back audio files whose
sampling rate is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
• Even if the sampling rate at which the LS9 is operating differs
from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the
SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically
convert the rate so that the playback will be correct.
NOTE
• The LS9 can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64
characters. If the file name is longer than this, the desired file
may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 songs can be managed in a subdirectory.
• If
or
is selected as the playback mode,
playback will continue until you stop playback.
8 To stop playback, move the cursor to the
STOP (■) button and press the [ENTER]
key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
111
Editing the title list
Editing the title list
Here’s how you can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or
artist names.
1 Connect USB memory containing audio
4 If you want to edit a title or file name in the
files to the USB connector.
[RECORDER] key repeatedly to access the
TITLE LIST screen.
title list, move the cursor to the SONG
TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button; if you want
to edit the artist name, move the cursor to
the ARTIST EDIT button; then press the
[ENTER] key.
1
A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the
text.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
4
7
5
6
2
3
NOTE
1 ↑ / ↓ buttons
These buttons move the track number of the song
selected in the list earlier ( ↑ ) or later ( ↓ ) in the
list.
B SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
This button lets you edit the title or file name of the
song selected in the list.
C ARTIST EDIT button
This button lets you edit the artist name of the song
selected in the list.
D TITLE SORT button
This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the
title.
E ARTIST SORT button
• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3
format audio files.
5 Edit the title or artist name.
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 doublebyte characters) can be input for both the title and for
the artist name. (For details on entering characters →
p. 34) If the text cannot be shown completely in the
input field, the text will scroll horizontally.
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key to close the popup window.
7 If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE
This button sorts the list in alphabetical order of the
artist name.
NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,
and ↑ / ↓ buttons in the screen to change
the order of the title list.
F SAVE LIST button
This button saves the list sorting data to USB memory.
Use the following buttons to change the order of the
title list.
G SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons
These buttons switch the items (title or file name) that
are shown in the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field.
● SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
3 Use the No. button and the change direc-
tory button in the screen to view a list of the
contents of the folder that includes the
desired file.
112
• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be
displayed, these characters will be converted into
for
display.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the title list will be sorted in numerical
→ alphabetical order by title. Each time you press the
[ENTER] key, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order.
● ARTIST SORT button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the title list will be sorted in numerical
→ alphabetical order by artist name. Each time you
press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between
ascending and descending order.
Editing the title list • Linking scene recall with audio file playback
● SAVE LIST button
NOTE
• Two-byte code or Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) code characters will
not be sorted correctly.
● ↑ / ↓ buttons
When you move the cursor to these buttons and press
the [ENTER] key, the track number of the file currently selected in the title list will be moved upward or
downward by one.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the title list order and playback selections will be saved in USB memory. You should perform this operation if you want the title list to be
preserved even after you disconnect the USB memory
or turn off the power.
Since these settings are stored for each folder, a confirmation dialog box will ask you whether you want to
save them if you move to a different folder.
Linking scene recall with audio file playback
You can make link settings so that a specific audio file from USB memory is played back when
you recall a certain scene. This is a convenient way to automatically play back a sound effect or
background music at a certain point in the performance.
To link scene recall with audio file playback, proceed as follows.
audio file to the USB connector.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to
access the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK
screen.
1
2
3
4 6
7
F LINK
This indicates whether linking from the scene to an
audio file is enabled. The PLAY indicator is shown if
linking is enabled. If the PLAY indicator is off even
though a file is selected, the audio file will not play
when scene recall occurs.
G SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field
This shows the title or file name of the audio file.
8
5
NOTE
• The audio file to be played must be saved in the SONGS
folder within the YPE folder. Please note that you won’t be
able to specify a file that is in the root directory or another
folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE
LIST screen will change to \YPE\SONGS\.
10
USB memory recorder
1 Connect the USB memory containing the
• The file name is shown in black if the specified file no longer
exists, and the song title or file name is shown in yellow if the
file can no longer be recognized.
• The file specified for linking is distinguished by its eight-character file name + three-character extension. If you change the
file name after specifying it for linking, or if you repeatedly
delete and copy the file, there may be rare cases in which the
linked file can no longer be recognized.
9
J
1 Scene list
This is the list of scenes to which you can assign a
song (audio file). The line with the blue background in
the middle of the list is the scene that’s selected for
operation.
B No. (scene number)
C TITLE (scene title)
D Protect
These respectively indicate the scene number, title,
and protect status.
E Song list
This is the list of songs (audio files) that can be linked.
The line with the blue background in the middle of the
list is the file that’s selected for operation.
H OFFSET (Offset time)
This shows the time from the recall operation until the
corresponding audio file will begin playing.
I SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons
These buttons select the item that is shown in the
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field.
J JPN button
If this button is on, the song title will be displayed
using Shift-JIS code (double-byte character code) to
support Japanese.
NOTE
• Other items in the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen are the
same as in the SCENE LIST screen (→ p. 134).
3 Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys so
that the scene to which you want to assign
a song is displayed in the middle.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
113
Linking scene recall with audio file playback
4 Move the cursor to the blue background
area in the middle of the list SONG TITLE/
FILE NAME field, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The SONG SELECT popup window will appear,
allowing you to select an audio file.
1
2
5
6
6 If necessary, move the cursor to the OFF-
SET knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys to specify an offset time before
the audio file will play back.
You can specify the offset time in a range of 0–99 seconds in 0.5 second units.
7
7 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The popup window will close, and you will return to
the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen. The title or file
name of the file you selected will be displayed in the
center of the song list.
Alternatively, if you select the CANCEL button
instead of the OK button, the settings will be discarded
and you will return to the SCENE PLAYBACK LINK
screen.
3
4
8 Move the cursor to the LINK field and press
1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME buttons
These buttons select the item (song title or file name)
that is shown in the song list.
B JPN button
If this button is on, the song title will be displayed
using Shift-JIS code (double-byte character code) to
support Japanese.
the [ENTER] key to turn on the link to the
audio file.
The PLAY indicator will appear in the LINK field.
The PLAY indicator will also appear in the STATUS
field of the SCENE LIST screen.
C PATH field
This indicates the path of the folder (\YPE\SONGS\)
in which the audio files are saved. This cannot be
changed.
D Song list
This shows the playable audio files in the SONGS
folder.
HINT
• A maximum of 300 audio files can be displayed.
• Files other than playable audio files will not be displayed.
E SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, the song list will be sorted in alphanumeric order by song tile or file name. Each time you
press the [ENTER] key, the list will alternate between
ascending and descending order.
F TYPE
This indicates the type of the audio file. The significance of this indication is as follows.
• MP3 .............MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3
• WMA ...........Windows Media Audio
• AAC.............MPEG4 AAC
G OFFSET (Offset time)
This specifies the time from the recall operation until
the corresponding audio file begins to play.
5
114
Operate the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
scroll the song list so that the file you want
to link to the scene is shown in the center
with a blue background.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
9 Repeat steps 3–8 to assign audio files to
other scenes in the same way.
HINT
• As other ways to control audio file playback, you can use MIDI
MMC commands for remote control from an external device
(→ p. 186), or assign the DIRECT PLAY function to a userdefined key and play back the audio file directly (→ p. 196).
10 Recall a scene to which you’ve linked an
audio file.
After the offset time has elapsed, the audio file will
play only once.
NOTE
• When you recall the scene, the constant display area will
show a count-down until the offset time has elapsed.
• You cannot play back during recording or in record-ready
mode.
• If another song is playing when scene recall occurs, the currently-playing song will stop when recall occurs, regardless of
the offset time setting.
• The linked audio file will be played only once, regardless of
the playback mode setting.
Chapter 11
EQ and Dynamics
This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on
each channel of the LS9.
About EQ and dynamics
Each input channel and output channel of the LS9 provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to adjust the level of the input signal. In addition, input channels
provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors. Dynamics 1 can be used as gate, ducking,
compressor, or expander. Dynamics 2 can be used as compressor, compander hard, compander
soft, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as compressor, expander, compander hard, or compander soft.
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
1
2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired
fader layer.
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
EQ and Dynamics
11
Using EQ
section, STEREO MASTER section, or ST IN
section to select the channel that you want
to operate.
4 In the screen, move the cursor to the EQ
popup button or any knob in the EQ field,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The ATT/HPF/EQ popup window will appear.
In the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window you can view and
edit all EQ parameters of the currently selected channel.
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can access the above popup window by pressing either of the
EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], or EQ [GAIN] encoders while the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown.
1 EQ popup button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
115
Using EQ
H LOW shelving button
If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will switch to a
shelving type. In this case, the LOW band Q knob will
not be shown.
The window contains the following items.
1
3
2
4
8
J
K
5
6
I Q/FREQ/GAIN knobs
For each of the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and
HIGH bands, these knobs adjust the Q (steepness),
FREQ (center frequency), and GAIN (amount of
boost/cut).
HINT
• You can move the cursor to one of the knobs in 9 and press
the [ENTER] key to switch the EQ on/off.
7
9
1 TYPE I, II buttons
These buttons select the EQ type. If the TYPE I button
is on, the EQ will use the same algorithm as previous
Yamaha digital mixers; if the TYPE II button is on, a
newly-developed algorithm will be used. Using TYPE
II will reduce interference between bands.
J HIGH shelving button
If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will switch to a
shelving type. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob will
not be shown.
K Low pass filter button
If this button is on, the HIGH band EQ will operate as
a low-pass filter. In this case, the HIGH band Q knob
will not be shown, and the GAIN knob will operate as
a switch that turns the low-pass filter on/off.
B FLAT button
This button resets the GAIN parameter of all bands to
the initial value (0.0 dB). When you move the cursor
to this button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog box
will ask you to confirm the operation.
L
C EQ graph
This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ
parameters. A pointer is shown at the peak of each
band. Operating the Q, FREQ, or GAIN knobs of each
band will change the response curve accordingly. If
EQ or high-pass filter is on, the response curve will be
highlighted.
D Level meter
This meter indicates the peak level before the EQ and
after the EQ. If the signal has overloaded before or
after the EQ, the OVER segment will light. If the corresponding channel is stereo (a ST IN channel, a MIX
channel / MATRIX channel that is set to stereo, or the
STEREO channel), level meters for two channels will
be displayed.
E ATT knob
This knob specifies the amount of attenuation/gain
before entering the EQ, in a range of -96 dB–+24 dB.
Use this to compensate for level changes caused by the
EQ.
F HPF FREQ knob, HPF ON/OFF button
(input channels only)
This knob and button let you adjust the cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter placed immediately after
the attenuation and before the EQ, and switch it on/off.
The cutoff frequency can be adjusted in a range of 20–
600 Hz.
G EQ ON/OFF button
This switches the EQ on/off.
116
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
L High-pass filter button (output channels
only)
If this button is on, the LOW band EQ will operate as a
high-pass filter. In this case, the LOW band Q knob
will not be shown, and the GAIN knob will operate as
a switch that turns the high-pass filter on/off.
5 To turn the EQ on/off, move the cursor to
the EQ ON/OFF button and press the
[ENTER] key.
If you want to make settings in the ATT/HPF/EQ
popup window, move the cursor to the desired button/
knob and use the [ENTER] key, the dial, or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys.
HINT
• You can also adjust the Q, center frequency, and boost/cut
amount using the EQ [Q], EQ [FREQUENCY], and EQ [GAIN]
encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case,
use the EQ [HIGH], EQ [HIGH MID], EQ [LOW MID], and EQ
[LOW] keys to select the band that you want to adjust. You
can also switch EQ bands for editing by moving the cursor
onto a parameter of the desired band.
Using EQ • Using dynamics
6 If you want to use the high-pass filter on an
input channel, operate the HPF FREQ knob
or HPF ON/OFF button in the ATT/HPF/EQ
popup window.
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Use the HPF ON/OFF
button to switch the high-pass filter on/off, and use the
HPF FREQ knob to specify the cutoff frequency.
HINT
• Output channels do not provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However by turning on the high-pass filter
button in the popup window, you can use the LOW band EQ
as a high-pass filter.
7 If you want to initialize EQ settings or copy
them to another channel, use the tool buttons in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).
HINT
• You can also use a dedicated library to save or load EQ settings at any time (→ p. 120). You can also take advantage of a
wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also use the encoders of the SELECTED CHANNEL
section to adjust the EQ or high-pass filter (→ p. 87).
• For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on
the low-pass filter button and use the HIGH band EQ as a
low-pass filter.
Using dynamics
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key.
The SELECTED CH VIEW screen will appear in the
display.
2
1
3 Press a [SEL] key in the channel module
section, STEREO MASTER section, or ST IN
section to select the channel that you want
to operate.
4 In the screen, move the cursor to the
11
EQ and Dynamics
Input channels provide two dynamics processors, and output channels provide one dynamics
processor.
DYNA1/DYNA2 popup button or any knob in
the DYNA1/DYNA2 field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window
will appear. In this popup window you can view and
edit all dynamics parameters of the currently selected
channel.
HINT
• If you’ve turned on POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS in the PREFERENCE popup window (→ p. 194), you
can also access the above popup window by pressing any of
the [DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders while the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen is shown.
1 DYNA1 popup button
B DYNA2 popup button (input channels only)
2 Use the LAYER section to select the desired
fader layer.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
117
Using dynamics
F KEY IN SOURCE box
You can select a key-in signal in this box. For details
on the procedure, refer to step 6.
The window contains the following items.
1
2
3
G Other parameters
This area shows other dynamics parameters. The
parameters shown will depend on the currently
selected dynamics type.
HINT
6
4
8
9
• For details on parameters, refer to the appendix at the end of
this manual (→ p. 229).
• You can switch dynamics on/off by moving the cursor to one
of the knobs in 5 or 7 and pressing the [ENTER] key.
5
H KEY IN FILTER field (GATE and DUCKING
7
1 Dynamics type buttons
Use these buttons to select one of the following four
types of dynamics.
Input channels
GATE
DYNAMICS 1
DUCKING
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPRESSOR
DYNAMICS 2
COMPANDER-H
COMPANDER-S
DE-ESSER
Output channels
COMPRESSOR
DYNAMICS 1
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
COMPANDER-S
HINT
• For details on dynamics types, refer to the appendix at the
end of this manual (→ p. 229).
B Dynamics graph
This graph shows the approximate response of dynamics processing.
C Level meters
These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR),
and the peak levels before the gate (IN) and after the
gate (OUT). If the signal has overloaded, the OVER
segment will light. If the corresponding channel is stereo (a ST IN channel, a MIX channel / MATRIX channel that is set to stereo, or the STEREO channel), level
meters for two channels will be displayed.
only)
This field lets you apply a filter to the key-in signal.
This field provides a FILTER box that lets you select
the filter type, a Q knob (which adjusts the Q of the filter), and a FREQ knob (which adjusts the cutoff frequency or center frequency).
To change the filter type, move the cursor to the FILTER BOX and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select either HPF (high-pass filter), BPF (band-pass
filter), or LPF (low-pass filter); then press the
[ENTER] key. If you select “----” in the FILTER box,
no filter will be applied.
NOTE
• After changing the type of filter in the FILTER box, be sure to
press the [ENTER] key to apply the change.
I KEY IN CUE (GATE and DUCKING only)
This button lets you cue-monitor the currently selected
key-in signal.
HINT
• Even if you’ve selected MIX CUE mode (when all channels
whose [CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring) as the
cue mode, turning on the KEY IN CUE button will give priority
to monitoring only the corresponding signal. All [CUE] keys
that had been turned on at that time will be forcibly defeated.
• KEY IN CUE will automatically be cancelled when you exit the
corresponding screen.
5 To turn dynamics on/off, move the cursor to
the DYNAMICS ON/OFF button and press
the [ENTER] key.
If you want to make settings in the DYNAMICS 1/
DYNAMICS 2 popup window, move the cursor to the
desired button/knob and use the [ENTER] key, the
dial, or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
HINT
D DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
This switches dynamics on/off.
E THRESHOLD knob
This specifies the threshold level at which dynamics
will operate.
118
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
• You can also adjust the dynamics threshold by using the
[DYNAMICS 1]/[DYNAMICS 2] encoders of the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
Using dynamics
6 Select the key-in signal as necessary.
7 If you want to initialize dynamics settings or
You can select one of the following as the key-in signal.
copy them to another channel, use the tool
buttons in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2
popup window.
For an input channel
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).
SELF PRE EQ
The signal immediately before the
EQ (attenuator) of the currently
selected input channel
SELF POST EQ
The signal immediately after the EQ
of the currently selected input channel
CH 1–32 {64} POST
EQ, STIN1L/1R–4L/4R
POST EQ
MIX OUT 13–16
The signal immediately after the EQ
of the corresponding input channel
HINT
• You can also use a dedicated library to save or load dynamics
settings at any time (→ p. 120). You can also take advantage
of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or
situations.
(*1)
The signal immediately after the ON
of the corresponding MIX channel
*1: The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which
that channel belongs, from the following five {nine} groups: CH
1–8, CH 9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32, {CH33–40, CH41–48,
CH49–56, CH57–64}, and STIN1L1R–4L4R.
For an output channel
SELF PRE EQ
The signal immediately before the
EQ (attenuator) of the currently
selected output channel
SELF POST EQ
The signal immediately after the EQ
of the currently selected output channel
MIX OUT 13–16
The signal immediately after the EQ
of the corresponding output channel
(*1)
11
The signal immediately after the ON
of the corresponding MIX channel
EQ and Dynamics
MIX 1–16 POST EQ,
MTRX1–8 POST EQ,
ST L/R, MONO, POST
EQ
*1: The signals that you can select are limited to the group to which
that channel belongs, from the following four groups: MIX 1–8,
MIX 9–16, MATRIX 1–8, and ST/MONO.
HINT
• If the dynamics type of DE-ESSER, the key-in signal is fixed
at SELF POST EQ and cannot be changed.
To select the key-in signal, make your selection in the
DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup window.
1 Move the cursor to the KEY IN SOURCE box,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the desired key-in signal.
The newly selected key-in signal will blink.
B Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection of key-in signal.
NOTE
• If you move the cursor out of the KEY IN SOURCE box while
the key-in signal is blinking in the box, your change will be discarded, and the key-in signal setting will revert to the previous
choice. To confirm your new choice of key-in signal, press the
[ENTER] key without moving the cursor.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
119
Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries
Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries
EQ or dynamics settings can be stored in or recalled from dedicated libraries.
EQ library
Dynamics library
The EQ library consists of an input EQ library that lets
you store and recall EQ settings for input channels, and an
output EQ library that lets you store and recall EQ settings
for output channels.
To access each library, move the cursor to the LIB tool
button in the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window and press the
[ENTER] key.
LIB button
You can use the dynamics library to store and recall
dynamics settings.
All of the LS9’s dynamics processors use this library.
However, the types that can be selected will differ
between dynamics 1 and dynamics 2 for input channels,
and dynamics 1 for output channels. You can’t recall a
type that cannot be used.
To access the dynamics library, move the cursor to the LIB
tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 popup
window, and press the [ENTER] key.
LIB button
For details on library operations, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 35).
HINT
• For both the input EQ library and the output EQ library, you can
recall 199 settings from each library. Input EQ provides 40 readonly presets, and output EQ provides 3 read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the ATT/HPF/EQ popup window,
refer to “Using EQ” (→ p. 115).
For details on library operations, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 35).
HINT
• You can recall 199 settings from this library. The library contains
41 read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2
popup window, refer to “Using dynamics” (→ p. 117).
120
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 12
Grouping and linking
This chapter explains the Mute Group function that lets you simultaneously
control the muting of multiple channels, the Channel Link function that links
the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that let you copy or
move parameters between channels.
About mute groups
Mute groups allow you to switch muting on/off for multiple channels together. For example, you
can use mute groups to cut out multiple non-adjacent channels simultaneously.
The LS9 has eight mute groups, and they can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the same group.
Using mute groups
HINT
• Mute group 1–8 on/off functions can also be assigned to user-defined keys. For more about
user-defined keys, refer to ““User-defined keys” (→ p. 196).
12
Grouping and linking
Here we will explain how to use mute groups. You will use the MUTE GROUP screen of the
CHANNEL JOB screens to assign channels to each mute group or switch muting on/off. You can
also use the SELECTED CH VIEW screen to specify the mute group(s) to which the currently
selected channel belongs.
Using the MUTE GROUP screen to
operate mute groups
In the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB
screens, you can select a specific mute group and specify
the channels that belong to that mute group. You can also
switch each mute group on/off.
[CHANNEL JOB] key
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL
JOB screens.
The [CHANNEL JOB] key accesses various CHANNEL JOB screens that allow you to perform operations on channels. The screen will change each time
you press the key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
121
Using mute groups
The MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB
screen contains the following items.
1
4 Assign channels to other mute groups in
the same way.
2 4
HINT
• You are free to assign the same channel to more than one
mute group.
5 To mute the channels assigned to a mute
group, move the cursor to the MUTE
GROUP MASTER 1–8 button for the desired
mute group, and press the [ENTER] key
(multiple selections are allowed).
3
5
The selected MUTE GROUP MASTER button will
light, and all channels belonging to that mute group
will be muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted
channels will blink.
6 To defeat muting for a mute group, move
1 Channel display field
Channels assigned to the mute group selected by the
1–8 buttons are highlighted in red. If the SAFE button
is selected, channels that are temporarily excluded
from all mute groups are highlighted in green.
the cursor to the MUTE GROUP MASTER
button that you turned on in step 5, and
press the [ENTER] key to make the button
go dark.
NOTE
B CLEAR ALL button
• Mute group assignments are saved as part of the scene.
However, the mute on/off settings are not saved.
When you move the cursor to this button and press the
[ENTER] key, all channels that are currently highlighted in the channel display field will be cleared.
HINT
• If you assigned a mute group on/off function to a user-defined
key, you can switch mute on/off by pressing the corresponding user-defined key to make it light or go dark.
C 1–8 buttons
These buttons select the mute group that is shown in
the channel display field.
D SAFE button
Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude
a specific channel from all mute groups. The channel
display field shows the channels that are temporarily
excluded from the mute groups. For more about mute
safe, refer to “Using the Mute Safe function” (→
p. 123).
E MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons 1–8
These buttons switch muting on/off for mute groups
1–8.
2 To select the mute group to which you want
to assign channels, move the cursor to one
of the 1–8 buttons and press the [ENTER]
key.
3 Press the [SEL] key of the input channels /
output channels (you may select more than
one) that you want to assign.
The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light. In
the channel display field in the screen, the corresponding channels will also be highlighted in red. To cancel
an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to
make it go dark.
122
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
• Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be
affected by mute on/off operations if its [ON] key was off to
begin with.
Using the SELECTED CH VIEW screen
to specify mute groups
In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can select a specific channel and assign the mute group(s) to which that
channel belongs (multiple assignments are allowed).
HINT
• In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can only assign mute
groups. To switch muting on/off, you must either use the MUTE
GROUP screen of the CHANNEL JOB screens (→ p. 121), or
assign the mute on/off function to a user-defined key and operate
that key (→ p. 196).
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section
[HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen.
Using mute groups
2 Use the LAYER section keys and the [SEL]
keys to select the channel whose mute
group(s) you want to specify.
In the SELECTED CH VIEW screen you can use the
MUTE field to specify the mute group(s) to which the
currently selected channel belongs.
Using the Mute Safe function
If necessary, specific channels registered to a mute group
can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations
(Mute Safe).
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the MUTE GROUP screen of the CHANNEL
JOB screens.
1
2
1
2
4
3
1 MUTE field
This shows the mute groups to which the currently
selected channel is assigned.
1 Channel display field
When the SAFE button is on, channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute group are highlighted in
this field.
C Mute group select buttons 1–8
These select the mute group(s) to which the currently
selected channel will be assigned.
B SAFE button
This lets you select the channels that will be set to
Mute Safe status.
D SAFE indicator
This will light if the currently selected channel is set to
Mute Safe. For more about mute safe, refer to “Using
the Mute Safe function”.
2 Move the cursor to the SAFE button and
3 To select the mute group(s) to which this
channel will be assigned, move the cursor
to a mute group select button and press the
[ENTER] key (multiple selections are
allowed).
4 Select the mute group(s) for other channels
in the same way.
press the [ENTER] key.
3 Use the LAYER section keys and the chan-
12
Grouping and linking
B MUTE popup button
When you move the cursor to this popup button and
press the [ENTER] key, the MUTE GROUP screen of
the CHANNEL JOB screen will appear. For details,
refer to “Using the MUTE GROUP screen to operate
mute groups” (→ p. 121).
nel module section [SEL] keys to select the
channels you want to exclude from mute
group operations (multiple selections are
allowed).
The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding channel in the channel display field of the screen will be
highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe
status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it
go dark.
Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected
when you mute a mute group to which that channel
belongs.
HINT
• Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene. They will
remain valid until you cancel the settings.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
123
The Channel Link function
The Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between
input channels.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HA GAIN settings (linked while preserving the difference in level.)
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
Fader operations (linked while preserving the difference in level.)
[ON] key operations
Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” The maximum number of link
groups you can create, and the maximum number of input channels that can be included in each
group, is 18 {34}. However, the selection of parameters for which operations of a channel are
linked for multiple link groups is shared by all link groups.
Linking the desired input channels
Here’s how to link specific parameters of input channels.
HINT
• Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
• Recall Safe does not affect channel link. When you recall a scene,
the link status saved in that scene will always be reproduced.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the CH LINK screen of the CHANNEL JOB
screens.
1 Channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding
channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more
link groups, each group is shown in a different color.
HINT
• For ST IN channels, all parameters of L and R are always
linked.
B LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters
that you want to be linked. These settings are shared
by all link groups.
C SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons
of this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
2 Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER
field to select the parameter(s) that will be
linked (multiple selections are allowed).
1
2
3
The table below lists the parameters you can select in
the LINK PARAMETER field.
HA button
Head amp settings
EQ button
EQ settings (including ATT/HPF)
DYNA 1, 2 buttons
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
MIX ON button
On/off status of signals sent to MIX
buses
MIX SEND button
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
FADER button
Fader operations
CH ON button
[ON] key operations
HINT
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the
parameter values will be linked, but the key-in signals are not
linked. For more about dynamics, refer to “EQ and Dynamics”
(→ p. 115).
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNA 1/2 buttons, library
recall operations will also be linked.
124
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
The Channel Link function
3 If you turned on the MIX ON or MIX SEND
buttons in step 2, use the buttons of the
SEND PARAMETER field to specify the
bus(es) for which you want operations to be
linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the parameters you can select in
the SEND PARAMETER field.
TO MIX 1–16 buttons
MIX buses 1–16
HINT
• When you press the [SEL] key of a channel belonging to a link
group to make it light, the [SEL] keys of all channels belonging to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an INPUT channel to a ST IN channel, parameters
that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored.
5 If you want to add a new channel to an
existing link group, do so as described in
step 4.
• If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send
on/off and send level will not be linked.
4 To link channels, proceed as follows.
1 Select the fader layer that contains the link-destination channel.
B Use one of the following methods to select the
link-source channel.
● If the link-source and link-destination
channels are in the same fader layer
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and select
the [SEL] key of the link-destination channel.
HINT
• If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another
link group, its assignment to the previous group will be cancelled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
6 To cancel a link, proceed as follows.
1 Select the fader layer that contains the channel you
want to un-link.
B Use one of the following methods to select any
channel assigned to the link group.
● If the channel that you want to un-link is in
the same fader layer as another channel in
that link group
● If the link-source and link-destination
channels are in different fader layers
Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the
channel display field to the link-source channel,
then hold down the [ENTER] key and select the
[SEL] key of the link-destination channel.
At this time, the values of the parameters you selected
in steps 2 and 3 will be copied from the link-source to
the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of
the parameters you selected in steps 2 and 3 will be
linked between channels belonging to the same link
group. The current link status is shown in the channel
display field of the window.
NOTE
• HA GAIN and fader values, which are linked while preserving
their level difference, will not be copied.
Link-source channel
Hold down any [SEL] key registered in the link
group, and select the [SEL] key of the channel that
you want to un-link.
● If no other channel in that link group is in
the same fader layer as the channel you
want to un-link
Use the cursor keys to move the white frame of the
channel display field to any channel registered in
the link group, then hold down the [ENTER] key
and select the [SEL] key of the channel you want
to un-link.
HINT
12
Grouping and linking
NOTE
• You can temporarily exclude a channel from link groups in
order to adjust parameters that maintain their level balance
while linked, such as when you want to adjust the level balance between channels in a link group. Hold down the [SEL]
key of the channel whose balance you want to adjust, and edit
the desired parameter. HA GAIN and fader will not be linked
while you are holding down the [SEL] key. (However, this function will not work during the fade of a scene memory recall
operation.)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
125
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
This section explains how you can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore
the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to
another channel. When you execute the copy operation,
the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of
channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the CH COPY screen of the CHANNEL JOB
screens.
2
5
E COPY TARGET field
If you’ve selected a MIX channel, MATRIX channel,
or STEREO/MONO channel as the copy-source, use
the buttons of this field to select the parameters that
will be copied. You may turn both buttons on if
desired.
If both buttons are on, the following parameters will
be copied.
● MODULE PARAM button
All parameters of the copy-source channel
● WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
On/off status and send level settings of the send
signals sent to the copy-source channel
F COPY button
Executes the copy.
2 To select the copy-source channel, press the
corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the
SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you choose the copy-source channel, the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically emboldened,
allowing you to select the copy-destination.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, move
the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and press
the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
• Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source”
→ “copy-destination.”
1
3 To select the copy-destination channel(s),
press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light (multiple selections are allowed).
3
4
6
1 SOURCE CH field
Indicates the channel that is selected as the copysource.
B CLEAR SOURCE button
This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE
CH field and DESTINATION CHs field.
C DESTINATION CHs field
Indicates the channels selected as the copy-destination.
D CLEAR DEST button
This button clears the channels shown in the DESTINATION CHs field.
126
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the
DESTINATION CHs field of the window. The channels that can be selected as the copy-destination will
depend on the channel you selected in step 2.
If you want to re-select all of the copy-destination
channels, move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button
and press the [ENTER] key.
4 If you selected a MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/
MONO channel as the copy-source, use the
buttons of the COPY TARGET field to select
the parameters you want to copy.
5 To execute the Copy operation, move the
cursor to the COPY button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The copy will be executed, and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination channel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE
CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will return to
an unset state.
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
Moving the parameters of a channel
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a
different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the movesource and move-destination will move forward or backward by one.
Move
2 To select the move-source channel, press
the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the
SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you select the move-source channel, the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be emboldened, allowing you to select the move-destination.
If you want to re-select the move-source channel,
move the cursor to the CLEAR SOURCE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
NOTE
2
3
4
5
1
5
2
3
4
• Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order
of “move-source” → “move-destination.”
3 To select the move-destination channel,
press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light.
Move by one
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between INPUT channels
• Between ST IN channels
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the CH MOVE screen of the CHANNEL JOB
screens.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH field of the window. The channels that
can be selected will depend on the channel you
selected in step 2.
If you want to re-select the move-destination channel,
move the cursor to the CLEAR DEST button and press
the [ENTER] key.
4 To execute the Move operation, move the
cursor to the MOVE button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The settings of the move-source channel will be
moved to the move-destination. The settings of all
channels between the move-source and move-destination will be moved by one channel in the direction of
the move-source. When the Move has been executed,
the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field
will return to an un-set state.
2
1
12
Grouping and linking
1
3
4
5
1 SOURCE CH field
This indicates the move-source channel.
B CLEAR SOURCE button
This button clears the channels shown in the SOURCE
CH field and DESTINATION CH field.
C DESTINATION CH field
This indicates the move-destination channel.
D CLEAR DEST button
This button clears all channels shown in the DESTINATION CH field.
E MOVE button
Executes the move.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
127
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
Initializing the parameters of a
channel
If desired, you can restore the parameters of any channel
to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on
any channel(s).
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the CH CLEAR screen of the CHANNEL
JOB screens.
2
3
1
1 TARGET CHs field
In this field, select the channel(s) that you want to initialize.
B CLEAR TARGET button
This button clears the channels shown in the TARGET
CHs field.
C CLEAR button
Executes the initialization.
2 To select the channel(s) to be initialized,
press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light (multiple selections are allowed).
The corresponding channel(s) is/are highlighted in the
TARGET CHs field of the window.
If you want to de-select all channels, move the cursor
to the CLEAR TARGET button and press the
[ENTER] key.
3 To execute the Initialize operation, move the
cursor to the CLEAR button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be initialized. After initialization, the TARGET CHs field
will return to a state in which nothing is selected.
128
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 13
Scene memory
This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations.
About scene memories
On the LS9, settings such as the mix parameters and input/output port patching can be assigned
a name and stored into memory (and later recalled from memory) as a “scene.”
Scenes are numbered with a scene number in the range of 000–300. Of these scenes, scene
000 is a read-only scene that restores the mix parameters to their default state, and scenes 001–
300 are rewritable.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] keys, as well as the following
parameters.
Input/output port patching
Bus settings
Head amp settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
Rack (GEQ/effect) settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pan/balance settings
Insert/direct out settings
On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
Mute group settings
Channel link settings
13
Using scene memories
This section explains how to store and recall the LS9’s mix parameters as “scenes.”
Scene number and title
Storing a scene
Scene memory
•
•
•
•
•
•
To store the current mix settings as a scene memory, use
the SCENE MEMORY screen.
1 Use the various controllers of the top panel
or the buttons in the display to set the mix
parameters as desired.
The number and title of the currently selected scene
are shown in the center of the constant display area.
HINT
• You can also move the cursor to the scene number in the constant display area and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
change the scene number. This scene number will blink if the
most recently stored or recalled scene is different than the
currently selected scene.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
129
Using scene memories
NOTE
• Simply changing the scene number does not actually execute
the store or recall operation. To execute the store or recall
operation, you must use the STORE/RECALL buttons in the
SCENE MEMORY screen as explained in step 2 and following or in “Recalling a scene” (→ p. 131), or use a user-defined
key (→ p. 132) to which you’ve assigned the scene store/
recall function.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to
access the SCENE LIST screen.
In this screen you can perform operations such as storing or recalling a scene.
3 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the store-destination scene number.
NOTE
• Note that the scene number, channel number, or ST IN channel input level will change if you operate the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys when the cursor is located in the constant display
area.
4 Move the cursor to the STORE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,
allowing you to assign a title to the scene.
1
[SCENE MEMORY]
key
1 SCENE TITLE field
This field lets you enter a title for the scene (a maximum of sixteen characters).
5 Assign a title to the scene as desired.
1
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a
name” (→ p. 34)
6 Move the cursor to the STORE button
2
3
1 Scene list
This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene
memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that
this scene number is selected for operations. A readonly scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a writeprotected scene is indicated by the protect (lock) symbol.
B STORE button
This stores the current mix settings into the location
currently selected in the scene list.
C STORE UNDO button
This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the
most recently performed scene Store operation. This
button is available from immediately after you overwrite (save) until the next time you store.
130
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE
popup window, and press the [ENTER] key.
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a
dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation.
Using scene memories
7 To execute the Store operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene
number you selected in step 3.
If you decide to cancel the Store operation, move the
cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
Recalling a scene
To recall a scene that was stored in scene memory, use the
SCENE MEMORY screen.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to
access the SCENE LIST screen.
NOTE
• If you store to a scene number in which a scene is already
stored, the previous data will be overwritten.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the Store Confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194).
8 If you want to cancel the scene overwrite-
1
store operation, move the cursor to the
STORE UNDO button and press the
[ENTER] key.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after
overwrite-storing. Undo will no longer be possible if you subsequently perform a scene store/recall operation.
HINT
• You can use the same procedure to store a scene in other
SCENE MEMORY screens as well.
• The same function as the STORE button or STORE UNDO
button can also be assigned to a user-defined key (→ p. 132).
2 3
1 Scene list
This list shows the scenes that are stored in scene
memory. The row highlighted in blue indicates that
this scene number is selected for operations.
B RECALL button
This recalls the scene that is currently selected in the
scene list.
C RECALL UNDO button
This button cancels (Undo) or re-executes (Redo) the
most recently performed scene Recall operation.
2 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the recall-source scene number.
13
Scene memory
Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can
use the STORE UNDO button to undo (cancel) the
most recently executed scene store operation. When
you execute the STORE UNDO button, a dialog box
will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. If you
want to execute the Undo, move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key. After executing the
Undo, you can use the STORE UNDO button once
again to Redo (re-execute) the store operation.
3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
131
Using scene memories
4 To execute the Recall operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be recalled. If
you decide not to execute the Recall operation, move
the cursor to the CANCEL button instead of the OK
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the Recall
Confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194).
5 If you decide to cancel the scene recall
operation, move the cursor to the RECALL
UNDO button and press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. To execute the operation, move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key. After executing the Undo, you can use the RECALL UNDO button
once again to Redo (re-execute) the recall operation.
HINT
• You can use the same procedure to recall a scene in other
SCENE MEMORY screens as well.
• Alternatively, you can recall a scene by moving the cursor to
the scene number in the constant display area, using the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select a scene number, and pressing the [ENTER] key. A confirmation dialog box will appear if
RECALL CONFIRMATION is turned ON in the PREFERENCE popup window.
• The same function as the RECALL button or RECALL UNDO
button can also be assigned to a user-defined key.
• In addition, you can recall a scene by using MIDI messages
(program changes) (→ p. 180).
Using user-defined keys to recall
You can use the user-defined keys to directly recall a
selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through
the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall
operation to a user-defined key.
The following recall operations can be assigned to a userdefined key.
● INC RECALL
Recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently loaded scene.
● DEC RECALL
Recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently loaded scene.
HINT
• If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows
the currently loaded scene, the closest scene number in
which a scene is stored will be recalled.
● DIRECT RECALL
Allows you to directly specify a certain scene number
and recall that scene.
To assign one of these functions to a user-defined key so
that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke, proceed
as follows.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
USER DEFINED KEYS button
132
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using scene memories
2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED
KEYS button and press the [ENTER] key to
access the USER DEFINED KEYS popup
window.
The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you
assign functions to user defined keys [1]–[12].
5 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key to close the popup window.
If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other userdefined keys in the same way.
6 Press the user-defined key to which you
assigned a recall function.
The corresponding scene will be recalled.
User defined keys popup buttons
3 Move the cursor to the popup button for the
user-defined key to which you want to
assign a function, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window
will appear.
Scene memory
13
4 Move the cursor to the FUNCTION column,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select “SCENE.”
In this popup window, you will proceed as follows
depending on the function you want to assign.
● To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column, and
use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select “INC
RECALL” or “DEC RECALL.”
● To assign DIRECT RECALL
Move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 column, use
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to choose “DIRECT
RECALL,” and then choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is
the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
133
Editing scene memories
Editing scene memories
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy/
paste them.
Sorting and renaming scene memories
You can use a dedicated window to sort the saved scene
memories in alphabetical order of their titles or in order of
the date on which they were created. You can also edit
their titles.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to
access the SCENE LIST screen.
HINT
• The SCENE MEMORY screen consists of four screens, but
the left half (scene list, store/recall buttons) and the tool buttons are the same in all screens.
2
3
4
6
B Scene number
This is the scene number 000–300.
C TITLE
This is the name assigned to each scene (maximum 16
characters). You can move the cursor to this area and
press the [ENTER] key to access the SCENE TITLE
EDIT popup window, where you can assign a title or
comment to the scene.
D R symbol (READ ONLY) / Protect symbol
A read-only scene is indicated by the R symbol, and a
write-protected scene is indicated by the protect (lock)
symbol. For scenes 001–300, you can move the cursor
to this area and press the [ENTER] key to switch
between protected and un-protected settings.
E Store/Recall buttons
These buttons are used to store/recall scenes. You can
also undo (cancel) or redo (re-execute) store/recall
operations. For details, refer to “Using scene memories” (→ p. 129).
F Tool buttons
Use these buttons to perform operations such as Copy
and Paste on the scenes stored in scene memory. For
details, refer to “Scene memory editing” (→ p. 136).
G STATUS field
This field indicates the status of each scene. For scenes
for which something other than the ALL button is
selected in the Focus function (→ p. 139), for scenes in
which the Fade function is enabled (→ p. 143), and
for scenes for which the link with an audio file is
enabled (→ p. 113), the “FOCUS”, “FADING”, and
“PLAY” indications will respectively be lit.
1
5
8
9
7
1 Scene list
This lists the scenes that are stored in scene memory.
The line highlighted in blue indicates the scene currently selected for operations.
HINT
• You can also change the default order in which the list is
sorted (ascending or descending scene number) (→ p. 194).
H COMMENT/TIME STAMP field
This indicates the comment, or the date and time at
which the scene was last stored, as the year/month/
date and hours/minutes/seconds.
I COMMENT/TIME STAMP tabs
These tabs switch the items (comment or time stamp)
that are shown in the COOMENT/TIME STAMP
field.
2 To select a scene number, make sure that
the cursor is located somewhere other than
the constant display area, and use the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates
the scene currently selected for operations.
HINT
• You can also assign user-defined keys to execute functions
such as incrementing or decrementing the scene number or
scrolling the scene list up or down (→ p. 196).
134
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Editing scene memories
3 If you want the scenes to be listed in a dif-
ferent order, move the cursor to the “NO.” or
“TITLE” buttons located above the scene
list, or to “TIME STAMP” located above the
STATUS/TIME STAMP field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
1
2
3
5 To turn the protect setting on/off for a
scene, move the cursor to the R symbol /
protect symbol of the selected scene, and
press the [ENTER] key.
Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the indication
will alternate between the protect (lock) symbol, R
(read only) symbol, and no symbol.
● Protect (lock) symbol
The scene cannot be overwritten.
● R (read only) symbol
1 NO.
Sorted in order of scene number.
B TITLE
Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title.
C COMMENT/TIME STAMP
In addition to the protection described above, it will
also be impossible to overwrite the scene by loading a
file from USB memory, etc.
This setting can be selected only for consecutive scene
numbers from scene number 000.
● No symbol
The scene is not protected.
Sorted in order of comment or date of creation.
NOTE
HINT
• The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
• By leaving the cursor at the same button and pressing the
[ENTER] key again, you can change the direction (ascending
or descending) in which the list is sorted.
6 Use the tool buttons to edit the scene memory.
4 If you want to edit the title of a scene, move
the cursor to the TITLE field of the selected
scene, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window.
For details, refer to the section “Scene memory editing” that follows.
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a
name” (→ p. 34).
13
Scene memory
1
1 TITLE field
This field lets you enter a title for the scene. (The maximum is 16 characters.)
HINT
• You cannot edit the title of a read-only scene or a write-protected scene.
• If you want to edit the comment of a scene, use the COMMENT/TIME STAMP tabs to display the comments in the
scene list, move the cursor to the SCENE COMMENT field of
the selected scene, and press the [ENTER] key to access the
COMMENT EDIT popup window.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
135
Editing scene memories
Scene memory editing
Copying/pasting a scene
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied/pasted
to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased).
Here’s how to copy a scene into buffer memory, and then
paste it to a different scene number.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
Scene memories are edited using the buttons shown in
the upper part of the SCENE MEMORY screen.
Each button has the following function.
2 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of
the SCENE MEMORY screens.
1
2
3
4
5
6
[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of
the SCENE MEMORY screens.
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the copy-source scene number.
3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
1 COPY button
Copies a scene into a memory buffer (a temporary
storage area). For details on how to use this, refer to
“Copying/pasting a scene” below.
B PASTE button
This button pastes a scene (previously copied into the
memory buffer) into another scene number. For details
on how to use this, refer to “Copying/pasting a scene”
below.
C CLEAR button
This button clears (erases) the selected scene. For
details on how to use this, refer to “Clearing a scene”
(→ p. 137).
D CUT button
Cuts a scene and places it in the memory buffer.
Scenes following the scene number you cut will be
moved forward. For details on how to use this, refer to
“Cutting a scene” (→ p. 138).
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
4 To execute the Copy operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in the
buffer memory.
HINT
• Be aware that if you copy/cut another scene before you paste,
the other scene will be overwritten to the buffer memory.
E INSERT button
5 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
Inserts a scene from the memory buffer at the location
of a different scene number. Scene numbers following
the inserted position will be moved backward. For
details on how to use this, refer to “Inserting a scene”
(→ p. 138).
6 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and
F UNDO button
This button cancels the most recently-executed scene
editing operation. If you’ve accidentally cleared an
important scene, you can press this key to return to the
state prior to editing the scene.
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the paste-destination scene number.
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation.
2 Perform the desired editing operations.
For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations
that follow.
HINT
• A copied scene can also be inserted (→ p. 138).
NOTE
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE
button is not available.
136
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Editing scene memories
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted
to the scene number you selected in step 5. If you
decide to cancel the Paste operation, use the CANCEL
button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
• Be aware that when you paste to a scene number in which a
scene has already been stored, the existing scene will be
overwritten.
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be
pasted.
Clearing a scene
Here’s how to clear a specified scene.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of
the SCENE MEMORY screens.
2 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the scene number that you want to
clear.
3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
4 To execute the Clear operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The scene number you selected in step 2 will be
cleared. If you decide to cancel the Clear operation,
use the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be
cleared.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
13
Scene memory
7 To execute the Paste operation, move the
137
Editing scene memories
Cutting a scene
Here’s how to cut a scene. When you cut a scene, the
scenes of subsequent numbers will move forward. After
you cut a scene, you’ll be able to paste or insert it at the
desired location.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of
the SCENE MEMORY screens.
2 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the scene number that you want to
cut.
3 Move the cursor to the CUT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation.
Inserting a scene
Here’s how a scene held in the buffer memory can be
inserted at the desired scene number location.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key to access any one of
the SCENE MEMORY screens.
2 Perform the Copy operation (→ p. 136) or
Cut operation so that the scene you want to
insert is placed in the buffer memory.
3 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the insert-destination scene number.
4 Move the cursor to the INSERT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation.
NOTE
• The CUT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted in
any other way than by the “NO.” column.
4 To execute the Cut operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]
key.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the
scenes of subsequent numbers will be moved forward.
At this time, the scene that was cut will be stored in
buffer memory.
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
5 If desired, you can paste (→ p. 136) or insert
the cut scene (that was held in the buffer
memory).
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or cut a different scene before you
paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite
the scene in the buffer memory.
138
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
NOTE
• The INSERT button cannot be used if the scene list is sorted
in any other way than by the “NO.” column.
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT
button is not available.
• The INSERT button cannot be used if the Insert operation
would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300.
• You can’t insert in front of a scene for which the R symbol
(read only) is specified.
5 To execute the Insert operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The scene stored in the buffer memory will be insert at
the scene number you selected in step 3. The numbers
of scenes stored in locations preceding that scene will
be moved back by one.
Using the Focus function
Using the Focus function
“Focus” is a function that lets you select the parameters that will be updated when you recall each
scene, so that only specific parameters will be updated when you recall that scene. For example, it
is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene.
HINT
• As a function that is the converse of Focus, there is also a “Recall Safe” function that lets you select
channels and parameters to be excluded from recall operations (→ p. 140). However while the Focus
function is specified for each scene, Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to
access the SCENE FOCUS screen.
the parameters that will be subject to recall.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters
(multiple selections are allowed).
In this screen you can make various settings for the
Focus function. The screen contains the following
items.
1
3 Use the buttons other than “ALL” to select
Button name
2
Corresponding parameters
RACK
Rack settings
HA
Head amp settings
IN (PATCH)
Input port patching
OUT (PATCH)
Output port patching
IN
Input channel parameters
OUT
Output channel parameters
SEND
On/off status and send level settings for signals sent from input channels to MIX buses
(shown only if the OUT button is on)
HINT
4 If you want to cancel the restrictions you
1 FOCUS field
This field lets you make Focus function settings for a
scene saved in scene memory. Using the buttons
arrayed in the center, select the parameters that will be
updated when you recall the scene selected in the list
in the left side of the screen. For other scenes, you can
only check the on/off status of each parameter.
B CURRENT field
This field lets you make Focus function settings for the
scene you’re currently operating. If you select a
parameter in this field and then store the scene, your
selections will be used the next time you recall that
scene. When you recall a scene, the Focus function
settings of that scene are shown in this field.
2 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the scene for which you want to
make Focus function settings.
specified in step 3, so that all parameters
will be subject to recall, turn the ALL button
on.
When you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons for
that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other button will turn off the ALL button.
13
Scene memory
• The SEND button is shown only if the OUT button is on. However if both the IN button and OUT button are on, the parameters corresponding to SEND will automatically be subject to
recall.
5 Make Focus function settings for other
scenes as described in steps 2–4.
6 Recall a scene for which you’ve made
Focus settings.
If buttons other than ALL are turned on for the scene,
only the parameters whose buttons are on will be
recalled. If the ALL button is turned on for the scene,
all parameters will be updated.
HINT
• For scenes other than the scene number currently selected in
the scene list, check marks show the state of the Focus function settings.
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a
“FOCUS” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST
screen.
• The Focus function can be used in conjunction with the Recall
Safe function (→ p. 140). Channels or parameters that are
excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall
Safe will not be recalled.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
139
Using the Recall Safe function
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels from Recall operations. This differs from the Focus settings (→ p. 139) made for individual scenes in that Recall
Safe settings are common to all scenes.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[CHANNEL JOB] key repeatedly to access
the RECALL SAFE screen.
In this screen you can make settings for the Recall
Safe function. The window contains the following
items.
1 CH RECALL SAFE field
The channels for which Recall Safe is turned on are
highlighted in this field. If you turn on the SET BY
SEL button, you can turn on Recall Safe for a channel
simply by pressing the [SEL] key of that channel.
B CLEAR ALL button
This clears all Recall Safe settings for the channels
that are highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field.
[CHANNEL JOB] key
C GLOBAL field
In this field, global parameters (parameters that affect
the entire mix, and are not specific to individual channels) can be excluded from Recall operations.
D SAFE PARAMETER field
Here you can switch Recall Safe on/off for each channel, and choose the parameters that will be excluded
from Recall operations. If you select a channel by
pressing its [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings of that
channel will be shown in this field.
E APPLY TO ALL INPUT button / APPLY TO
2
3
ALL OUTPUT button
If these buttons are on when you operate the SAFE
PARAMETER buttons, the changes will apply to all
input (or output) channels. This is convenient when
you want to make settings for all channels in a single
action.
HINT
1
• You can also access this screen from the SAFE field of the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen (→ p. 88).
5
2 To select the channel whose Recall Safe
settings you want to edit, press the corresponding [SEL] key.
4
LS9-16
2
3
The corresponding channel in the CH RECALL SAFE
field will be enclosed by a white border. (However,
Recall Safe is not yet enabled at this point.) At this
time, the SAFE PARAMETER field will show the
Recall Safe settings of the selected channel.
HINT
• If the CH RECALL SAFE field’s SET BY SEL button is on,
Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the [SEL] key,
and the corresponding channel will be highlighted in the CH
RECALL SAFE field. You can select parameters as described
in step 3 even after turning Recall Safe on.
1
5
4
LS9-32
140
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using the Recall Safe function
3 If you want to enable Recall Safe for specific parameters of the selected channel,
make the following settings in the SAFE
PARAMETER field.
● If a STEREO/MONO channel is selected
With the exception of the types of button that are displayed, this is the same as for an input channel.
● For an input channel
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE
PARAMETER field (except for the “ALL” button) to
select the parameters that will be subject to Recall
Safe (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all
parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the
ALL button (this is the default setting).
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
LS9-16
Corresponding parameters
ALL
All parameters
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT)
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
MTRX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MTRX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER
Fader positions
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
● If a MIX channel is selected
13
Scene memory
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE
PARAMETER field (except for the “ALL” button) to
select the parameters that will be subject to Recall
Safe (multiple selections are allowed).
In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button
to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and send
level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX
buses.
If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of
the field to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL
button (this is the default setting).
LS9-32
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
Corresponding parameters
ALL
All parameters
HA
Head amp settings (including external HA)
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT/HPF)
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
DYNA 2
Dynamics 2 settings
MIX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
MIX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
FADER
Fader positions
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
NOTE
• If you turn on the ALL button, all other buttons of the SAFE
PARAMETER field will be turned off.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
141
Using the Recall Safe function
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
Corresponding parameters
ALL
All parameters (except for WITH MIX SEND)
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT)
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
MTRX ON
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MTRX SEND
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER
Fader positions
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
WITH MIX
SEND
On/off status and send level of signals sent
from input channels to MIX buses
4 To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE
PARAMETER field.
Channels for which Recall Safe is enabled will be
highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field.
SAFE button
NOTE
• If the ALL button is on, all buttons will be turned off except for
the WITH MIX SEND button located in the lower part of the
SAFE PARAMETER field.
• You can switch the WITH MIX SEND button on/off while the
ALL button is left on.
● If a MATRIX channel is selected
LS9-16
With the exception of the types of button that are displayed, this is the same as for a MIX channel.
In addition, you can use the WITH MATRIX SEND
button to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and
send level of the signals sent from output channels to
MATRIX buses.
SAFE button
LS9-32
NOTE
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
Corresponding parameters
ALL
All parameters (except for WITH MATRIX
SEND)
EQ
EQ settings (including ATT)
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings
FADER
Fader positions
CH ON
On/off status of [ON] keys
WITH MATRIX
SEND
On/off status and send level of signals sent
from MIX channels / STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses
NOTE
• If you turn on the ALL button, all buttons will be turned off
except for the WITH MATRIX SEND button located in the
SAFE PARAMETER field.
• You can switch the WITH MATRIX SEND button on/off while
the ALL button is left on.
142
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 3 does not enable Recall
Safe. To turn Recall Safe on/off, you must also perform the
operation of step 4.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
HINT
• In the CH RECALL SAFE field, the color of the highlight will
be green if the ALL button was selected in step 3, or blue if
buttons other than ALL were selected.
• If you press the CLEAR ALL button, Recall Safe will be
defeated for all channels for which it is enabled (i.e., the highlighted channels).
• You can also switch Recall Safe on/off in the SELECTED CH
VIEW screen’s SAFE field (→ p. 88).
Using the Recall Safe function • Using the Fade function
5 If you want to enable Recall Safe for global
parameters, turn on the desired buttons in
the GLOBAL field.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button name
Corresponding parameters
INPUT PATCH
Input port patching
INPUT NAME
Input channel name
OUTPUT
PATCH
Output port patching
OUTPUT NAME
Output channel name
1–8
Rack 1–8 settings
6 When you’ve finished making settings, execute a Recall operation.
Only the selected channel(s) and parameter(s) will be
excluded from Recall operations.
Channel Link (→ p. 124) and the MIX/MATRIX bus
settings in the SYSTEM SETUP screen (→ p. 213) are
not subject to Recall Safe; the settings of the recalled
scene will always be reproduced.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of
several channels included in a link group or one of two
MIX/MATRIX channels set to stereo, the parameter
settings of that channel may differ from those of the
other channel(s) when you recall a scene. In such
cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically
re-linked the next time it is operated.
HINT
• The Recall Safe function can be used in conjunction with the
Focus function (→ p. 139). Channels or parameters that are
excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall
Safe will not be recalled.
• By performing the Recall operation while holding down the
[SEL] key of a channel for which Recall Safe is disabled, you
can temporarily enable the Recall Safe settings for that channel.
Using the Fade function
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SCENE MEMORY] key repeatedly to
access the SCENE FADE screen.
In this screen you can make various settings for the
Fade function. The screen contains the following
items.
1
2
1 FADE TIME field
This field lets you make Fade function settings for a
scene saved in scene memory. Use the buttons located
in the center to make Fade function settings for the
scene selected in the list shown in the left side of the
screen. For other scenes, you can only view the settings.
13
Scene memory
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels to their new values
over a specified duration when you recall a scene. This is convenient when you want to obtain a
fade-in/out effect, or when you want the levels to transition smoothly between two scenes.
The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene.
B CURRENT field
This field lets you make Fade function settings for the
scene you’re currently operating.
When you recall a scene, the Fade function settings of
that scene are shown in this field.
C SETUP popup button
This button displays the FADE TIME popup window.
D FADING button
This button switches the Fade function on/off for each
scene.
E Fade time
This indicates the fade time (the time over which the
fader will reach the new value).
3
4
5
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
143
Using the Fade function
2 Make sure that the cursor is located some-
where other than the constant display area,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the scene for which you want to
make Fade function settings.
3 Move the cursor to the SET popup button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
FADE TIME popup window.
In this popup window you can select the channels to
which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time.
1
3
6 To turn on the Fade function, move the cursor to the FADING button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The Fade on/off setting is made individually for each
scene. Save the scene if necessary.
HINT
• Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a
“FADING” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST
screen.
7 Make Fade function settings for other
scenes as described in steps 2–6.
2
8 Recall a scene for which the Fade function
is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after
Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled
scene over the course of the specified fade time.
4
NOTE
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if
faders are linked by Channel Link.
HINT
1 Channel display field
The channels to which Fade is applied are highlighted.
B FADE TIME knob
This knob sets the fade time. Move the cursor to this
knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
adjust the setting.
C SET ALL button
If you press this button, the Fade effect will be enabled
for all faders/encoders of that scene.
D CLEAR ALL button
If you press this button, the Fade effect will be disabled for all faders/encoders of that scene.
4 Press the [SEL] keys of the desired chan-
nels to select the channels to which the
Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys of the selected channels will light, and
those channels will be highlighted in the channel display field of the popup window. You can cancel a
selection by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to
make it go dark.
5 Move the cursor to the FADE TIME knob,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
adjust the fade time.
The range is 0.0 sec–60.0 sec.
When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to
close the FADE TIME popup window.
HINT
• The fade time you specify here is used for all channels
selected in step 4.
144
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
• If you stop a moving fader while you hold down the corresponding [SEL] key, the fade effect will stop at that point.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, all
channel faders will move immediately to their target positions.
Chapter 14
Monitor/Cue
This chapter explains the LS9’s monitor/cue functions.
About the monitor/cue functions
The Monitor function lets you audition various signals through your nearfield monitors or headphones. The LS9’s front panel has a PHONES OUT jack for monitoring, and this jack always lets
you monitor the signal that is selected as the monitoring source. By assigning the MONITOR
OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through
external speakers. You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
•
•
•
•
•
STEREO channel output signal
MONO channel output signal
STEREO + MONO channel output signal
2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal
INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input signal
• USB memory recorder output signal
• Any combination of up to eight signals from the STEREO, MONO, MIX, and MATRIX channels, the USB
memory recorder output signal, INPUT channel 15/
16 {31/32}, and the 2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal
The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel by temporarily sending it from the
output jacks assigned to the MONITOR OUT channel or from the PHONES OUT jack. When you
press the top panel [CUE] key, the cue signal of the corresponding channel is sent as the monitor
output from the selected output port.
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason,
the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor output.
However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
CUE
LR
PHONES OUT LR
CUE TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
CUE L
MONO
METER CUE L
CUE LOGIC
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT
L,R
STEREO OUT
MONO(C)
MIX OUT1-16
MATRIX OUT1-8
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX:8ch)
MONO
METER MONITOR L
MONITOR R
METER MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO(C)
METER MONITOR MONO(C)
PHONES L
To PHONES OUT
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
MONITOR OUT L
DIMMER
2TRD L,R
INPUT 15,16{31,32}
MONITOR SELECT
2TRD L,R
INPUT 15,16{31,32}
PLAYBACK OUT
MONITOR L
[PHONES]
PHONES LEVEL
METER CUE R
CUE R
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
DA
2
Monitor/Cue
14
The following diagram shows the monitor/cue signal flow.
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR OUT MONO(C)
ON
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR DIMM ON
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR OUT R
To OUTPUT PATCH
+MONO(C)
MONITOR LEVEL
● MONITOR SELECT
● MONITOR LEVEL
Selects the monitor source.
Adjusts the level of the monitor/cue signal. This affects
the output jacks that are assigned to the MONITOR OUT
L/R/C channels, and also the PHONES OUT jack.
● METER
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue
signal.
● DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
● ON (On/off)
Turns the monitor output on/off.
● PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the output level of only the PHONES OUT jack.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
145
Using the Monitor function
Using the Monitor function
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES
OUT jack or external monitor speakers.
1 Connect your monitor system to the rear
E MONITOR LEVEL knob
Adjusts the output level of the monitor signal.
panel OMNI OUT jacks, 2TR OUT DIGITAL
jack, or an I/O card installed in a slot.
The monitor signal can be sent to any desired output
jack or output channel. If you’re monitoring through
headphones, make sure that your headphones are connected to the front panel PHONES OUT jack.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[MONITOR] key repeatedly to access the
MONITOR screen.
In the MONITOR screen you can check the current
monitor settings, and turn monitoring on/off.
The screen contains the following items.
2
9
6 1
57
F DIMMER field
The Dimmer function which temporarily attenuates
the monitor signal can be switched on/off here. Use
the knob in this field to adjust the amount of attenuation.
G TALKBACK DIMMER field
If Talkback is enabled, this will indicate the on/off status of the Talkback Dimmer function which automatically attenuates the monitor signal. Here you can also
specify the amount of attenuation applied by the talkback dimmer.
H Meter field
This indicates the level of the monitor signal. This
meter shows the level immediately before the dimmer.
If you move the cursor to the port select box located
below the level meter and press the [ENTER] key, a
popup window will appear, allowing you to select the
port that will output the monitor signal.
4
8
3
I MONO MONITOR button
This button allows monaural monitoring. If this button
is on, the signal sent from the PHONES OUT jack and
the MONITOR OUT L/R channels will be monaural.
HINT
• If the normal dimmer and the talkback dimmer are both
switched on simultaneously, the setting with the greatest
amount of attenuation will be applied.
1 OUTPUT button
Turns the monitor output on/off.
B SOURCE SELECT field
Use the buttons in this field to select the monitor
source.
C ASSIGN field
If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT
field, use this field to specify the monitor source. You
can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously.
If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to
the CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
146
3 Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT
field to select a monitor source.
In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only
one monitor source. However if you’ve selected
DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify
multiple monitor sources.
The following table shows the monitor sources you
can select in the SOURCE SELECT field.
ST L/R button
STEREO L/R channel output signal
MONO button
MONO channel output signal
2TR L/R button
2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal
D PHONES LEVEL LINK button
LCR button
STEREO L/R + MONO channel (LCR)
output signal
If this is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust
the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
IN 15/16 {31/32}
button
INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input
signal
PLAYBACK OUT
button
USB memory recorder playback signal
DEFINE button
The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN
field
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using the Monitor function
If you’ve selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT
field, you can use the ASSIGN field to select multiple
sources. The following table shows the monitor
sources you can select in the ASSIGN field.
MIX 1–16 buttons
MIX channels 1–16 output signals
MATRIX 1–8 buttons
MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals
STEREO L/R button
STEREO L/R channel output signal
MONO button
MONO channel output signal
2TR L/R button
2TR IN DIGITAL jack input signal
INPUT 15/16 {31/32}
button
INPUT channels 15/16 {31/32} input
signal
PLAYBACK OUT
button
USB memory recorder playback signal
6 To output the monitor signal, move the cursor to the OUTPUT button of the MONITOR
screen and press the [ENTER] key to turn it
on.
The monitor source you selected in step 3 will be sent
to the output destination you specified in step 5.
HINT
• The PHONES OUT jack will always output the monitor signal,
regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off.
7 Move the cursor to the MONITOR LEVEL
knob in the MONITOR screen, and use the
dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the
monitor level.
NOTE
• You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the
ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further
selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for
unneeded sources.
4 Move the cursor to one of the port select
boxes (L/R/C) located below the level meter,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The OUT PORT SELECT popup window will appear,
allowing you to specify the port from which the L, R,
and C monitor signals will be output.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both
the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel
PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level
when monitoring through headphones.
HINT
• If PHONES LEVEL LINK is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob
will also affect the PHONES OUT jack.
• If you turn on MONITOR ON MASTER FADER that you’ve
assigned to a user-defined key, you’ll be able to use the master fader to control the monitor.
8 Make settings for Dimmer and Monaural as
desired.
HINT
14
Monitor/Cue
• Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source,
and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to userdefined keys (→ p. 196).
LS9-16
5 Move the cursor to the output destination
port and press the [ENTER] key to select it;
then move the cursor to the CLOSE button
and press the [ENTER] key to close the
popup window.
The following table lists the output ports you can
select.
OMNI 1–8 {1–16}
OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 {1–16}
2TR OUT L/R
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack L, R
SLOT {1/2} 1–16
Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card
installed in a slot {1/2}
HINT
• If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR
OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers. If you have
not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting
the MONO button or LCR button as the monitor source will
automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
147
Using the Cue function
Using the Cue function
This section explains how to use the LS9’s Cue function.
About cue groups
The LS9’s cue signals can be categorized into the following three groups.
1 INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To
enable Cue for this group, press to turn on the [CUE] key
of a channel module to which an INPUT channel is
assigned or the [CUE] key of a ST IN channel.
[CUE] key of a channel module to
which an INPUT channel is assigned
[CUE] key of a ST IN channel
B OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To
switch to Cue for this group, press to turn on the [CUE]
key of the STEREO MASTER section or the [CUE] key
of a channel module to which a MIX/MATRIX/MONO
channel is assigned.
C Other CUE group
These are the Cue signals operated using buttons displayed in the screen. This group is enabled if you turn on a
CUE button in a RACK screen to which you’ve assigned
an effect, the CUE button of the RECORDER screen, or
the KEY IN CUE button of the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup
window. This group will automatically be disabled when
you exit the corresponding screen.
CUE button in the screen
It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between
different groups. Normally, the group to which the most
recently pressed [CUE] key (or a CUE/KEY IN CUE button in the screen) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE]
keys of the previously selected group will be defeated.
However if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific
order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the previouslyselected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated.
The following illustration shows the priority order of the
[CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower
to upper levels, if you then defeat Cue for the upper group,
the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately
below will be restored.
Other CUE group
INPUT CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
[CUE] key of the STEREO channel
[CUE] key of a channel module to which a
MIX/MATRIX/MONO channel is assigned
148
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
For example if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group → INPUT CUE group → Other CUE
group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the
[CUE] key status of the previously selected group. However, if the CUE MODE is LAST CUE, the state of the
[CUE] key is not reproduced.
Using the Cue function
C OUTPUT field
Here you can select one of the following choices as the
position from which output channels will be cued.
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how you can use the [CUE] key of a
desired channel to monitor the Cue signal.
NOTE
● PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button
The pre-fader signal will be output
● AFL (After-Fader Listen) button
• The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will not be
sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor
output. However, the front panel PHONES OUT jack will always
output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. For
details on Monitor function settings, refer to “Using the Monitor
function” (→ p. 146).
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
The signal immediately after the [ON] key will be
output
● PFL TRIM knob
If PFL is selected, you can adjust the output level
of the cue signal in a range of -20 dB to +10 dB.
D Meter field
[MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the
CUE screen.
● CUE meter
In the CUE screen you can check the Cue status, and
turn Cue on/off.
● ACTIVE CUE indicator
1
2
3
4
This indicates the level of the cue signal.
This indicates the currently-active CUE group.
● CLEAR CUE button
Clears all Cue selections.
2 Use the buttons of the CUE MODE section
to specify what will happen when multiple
[CUE] keys within the same CUE group are
turned on.
Use the following two buttons to choose the Cue
mode.
● MIX CUE button
All channels within the same CUE group whose
[CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring
(MIX CUE mode).
Only the channel whose [CUE] key was last turned
on will be monitored (LAST CUE mode).
1 CUE MODE field
This specifies the mode of operation when multiple
[CUE] keys within the same group are turned on.
B INPUT field
Here you can select one of the following positions
from which input channels will be cued.
● PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) button
The pre-fader signal will be output
● AFL (After-Fader Listen) button
The signal immediately after the [ON] key will be
output
HINT
• [CUE] keys belonging to different CUE groups cannot be
turned on simultaneously. The CUE group to which the lastpressed [CUE] key belongs will be turned on, allowing only
the signals of that group to be monitored.
14
Monitor/Cue
● LAST CUE button
3 Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT
field and OUTPUT field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE
group.
● POST PAN button
The post-pan signal will be output
● PFL TRIM knob
If PFL is selected, you can adjust the output level
of the cue signal in a range of -20 dB to +10 dB.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you turn the POST PAN button on, you can
no longer use input CUE to monitor the signal sent to the
MONO bus from an input channel that is set to LCR mode.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
149
Using the Cue function
4 Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel to
turn it on.
The Cue signal of the corresponding channel will be
sent to the monitor signal output destination.
You can also watch the Cue meter of the meter field to
check the output level of the cue signal. The ACTIVE
CUE indicator located below the Cue meter indicates
the CUE group (INPUT or OUTPUT) that is currently
turned on.
CUE meter
ACTIVE CUE indicator
HINT
• If you want Cue operations and channel select operations to
be linked, open the PREFERENCE popup window of the
USER SETUP screen, and turn “[CUE]>[SEL] LINK” on (→
p. 194).
5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MONITOR] button to access the MONITOR
screen, and use the MONITOR LEVEL knob
in the screen to adjust the level of the cue
signal.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, you can use both
the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the front panel
PHONES LEVEL control to adjust the monitor level
when monitoring through headphones.
6 To defeat Cue, press the [CUE CLEAR] key
or the currently-on [CUE] key once again.
If you want to clear all Cue selections, move the cursor
to the CUE CLEAR button in the CUE screen, and
press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• All Cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX
CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.
• You can also assign the same function as the CLEAR CUE
button to a user-defined key (→ p. 196).
150
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 15
Talkback / Oscillator
This chapter explains how to use the talkback and oscillator functions.
About talkback and oscillator
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of the selected INPUT jack to the desired bus. This is
used mainly to convey directions from the operator to the performers and staff. The LS9 also contains an oscillator that allows a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, and this can be used
to check external equipment or to test the response of the room.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator.
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
M
O
N
O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
ST
CUE
LR
TALKBACK
INPUT 1-16{32}
+48V MASTER
+48V
INPUT
SELEECT
ON
OSCILLATOR
LEVEL
HA
+48V
[INPUT]
[1-16{32}]
INPUT
1
2
3
ON
Sine Wave
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
METER
+
-
AD
GAIN/TRIM
OSC
METER
ON
HPF LPF
Using talkback
Here’s how a signal received at an INPUT jack 1–16 {1–32} can be output to the desired bus.
[MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the
TALKBACK screen.
In the TALKBACK screen you can check the status of
the talkback and turn it on/off.
2
B INPUT TO TALKBACK field
Of the INPUT jacks 1–16 {1–32}, the input sensitivity, input level, and phantom power on/off status of the
jack used for talkback is shown here. You can adjust
the input sensitivity by selecting the GAIN knob in
this field.
● Input select popup button
This displays the INPUT PORT SELECT popup
window, where you can select the INPUT jack
used for talkback.
15
Talkback / Oscillator
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
● +48V button
1
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power
(+48V) supplied to the INPUT jack used for talkback.
● GAIN knob
3
This adjusts the input sensitivity of the INPUT
jack used for talkback.
● Input level meter
This indicates the input level of the mic connected
to the INPUT jack used for talkback.
1 TALKBACK ON button
This switches talkback on/off.
C ASSIGN field
This selects the buses to which the talkback signal will
be sent. If you want to clear all selections, move the
cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the
[ENTER] key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
151
Using talkback
2 To assign the input from the INPUT jack to
talkback, move the cursor to the input
select popup window in the INPUT TO
TALKBACK field, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear.
6 Using the buttons in the ASSIGN field,
select the bus(es) to which you want to
send the talkback signal. (You may select
more than one.)
The buttons correspond to the following buses.
MIX 1–16 buttons
MIX buses 1–16
MATRIX 1–8 buttons
MATRIX buses 1–8
ST L, ST R, MONO
buttons
STEREO bus L/R, MONO bus
HINT
• If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the
CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
7 To enable talkback, move the cursor to the
TALKBACK ON button and press the
[ENTER] key to turn it on.
LS9-32
3 Of the IN1–16 {1–32} buttons, move the cursor to the port you want to use for talkback,
and press the [ENTER] key. To cancel the
selection, press the [ENTER] key once
again on the selected port.
You can select only one port at a time.
4 When you’ve selected the port, move the
cursor to the CLOSE button and press the
[ENTER] key to close the popup window.
5 Connect your mic to the rear panel INPUT
jack, move the cursor to the TALKBACK
GAIN knob, and use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys to adjust the input sensitivity of
the mic.
The input level meter in the INPUT TO TALKBACK
field shows the input level of the mic connected to the
INPUT jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be
supplied to the INPUT jack, turn on the +48V button
in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field.
NOTE
• If you want to use phantom power, you must first turn ON the
+48V MASTER ON/OFF button located in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen.
• The PAD will be internally switched on or off when the HA
gain is adjusted between -14 dB and -13 dB. Keep in mind
that noise may be generated if there is a difference between
the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device
connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom
power.
152
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
The TALKBACK ON button will alternate between on
and off each time you press the [ENTER] key (latched
operation).
While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack
selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the
send-destination bus.
HINT
• You can also assign the talkback on/off function to a userdefined key. In this case, you can choose either latched operation or unlatched operation (i.e., talkback will be On only
while you hold down the key) (→ p. 196).
• You can also use Talkback Dimmer to lower the monitor level
of the non-talkback signals when talkback is on (→ p. 146).
Using the oscillator
Using the oscillator
Here’s how you can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[MONITOR] button repeatedly to access the
OSCILLATOR screen.
In the OSCILLATOR screen you can check the settings of the oscillator and turn it on/off.
3
4
3 If you want to adjust the oscillator parame-
ters, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
operate the knobs shown in the field.
The parameters shown in the parameter field will
depend on the type of oscillator selected in the MODE
field.
The following table lists the oscillator types and the
parameters displayed for each type.
Oscillator type
1
2
Parameters
SINE WAVE 1CH
LEVEL, FREQ
PINK NOISE
LEVEL, HPF, LPF
BURST NOISE
LEVEL, HPF, LPF, WIDTH, INTERVAL
The following table describes each parameter in detail.
Parameter
Details
LEVEL
Oscillator output level
FREQ
Frequency of the sine wave produced
by the oscillator
HPF
High-pass filter (on/off switch, cutoff
frequency)
LPF
Low-pass filter (on/off switch, cutoff frequency)
1 OUTPUT button
WIDTH
Duration of the noise
This switches the oscillator on/off.
INTERVAL
Length of silence between noise bursts
B MODE field
Move the cursor to a button in this field to select the
desired type of oscillator.
Level
INTERVAL
C Parameter field
Pink noise output
WIDTH
Here you can adjust the parameters of the oscillator
you selected in the MODE field. Use the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys to operate the knobs shown in the
field.
15
D Oscillator level
This indicates the output level of the oscillator.
E ASSIGN field
This selects the buses to which the oscillator signal
will be sent. If you want to clear all selections, move
the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button and press the
[ENTER] key.
2 Use the buttons in the MODE field to select
the type of signal you want to output.
You can choose from the following signals.
SINE WAVE 1CH
Sine wave, one channel
PINK NOISE
Pink noise
BURST NOISE
Burst noise (intermittently output pink
noise)
Time
The BURST NOISE button is on
4 Using the buttons in the ASSIGN field,
select the bus(es) to which you want to
send the oscillator signal. (You may select
more than one.)
Talkback / Oscillator
5
The buttons correspond to the following buses.
MIX 1–16 buttons
MIX buses 1–16
MATRIX 1–8 buttons
MATRIX buses 1–8
ST L, ST R, MONO
buttons
STEREO bus L/R, MONO bus
HINT
• If you want to clear all selections, move the cursor to the
CLEAR ALL button and press the [ENTER] key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
153
Using the oscillator
5 To enable the oscillator, move the cursor to
the OUTPUT button and press the [ENTER]
key to turn it on.
The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus(es) you
selected in step 4. When you select the button and
press the [ENTER] key once again, the oscillator will
be turned off.
HINT
• You can also assign the oscillator on/off function to a userdefined key (→ p. 196).
154
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 16
Meters
This chapter describes the meter screen which displays input/output level
meters for all channels.
Using the METER screen
By accessing the Meter screen you can view the input/output levels of all channels in the screen,
and switch the metering point (the location at which the level is detected) of the level meters.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[ CUSTOM FADER screen ]
[METER] key to access the Meter screen.
The Meter screen is divided into the METER CH1-32
screen, {METER CH 33-64 screen}, OUTPUT
METER screen, and CUSTOM FADER screen.
4
2
[ METER CH1-32 screen ]
5
1
2
LS9-16
B Level meters
These show the input/output levels or fader values.
The current fader value is shown in a range of -∞–10.
When you operate the corresponding fader, the value
will change in realtime.
[ OUTPUT METER screen ]
1
2
16
Meters
3
1 Metering point select buttons
Use these three buttons to select the metering point for
the input/output channels.
The ∑ segment will light if even one of the level detection points within each channel is overloaded.
The ∑ segment level detection points are as follows.
• Input channels
........... PRE HPF, PRE FADER, POST ON
• Output channels
........... PRE EQ, PRE FADER, POST ON
3
C PEAK HOLD button
If you turn this button on, the peak levels of the meters
will be held. When you turn this button off, the peak
level indications that had been held will be cleared.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
155
Using the METER screen
D Metering point select box
Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the
metering point for the input/output channels.
E Channel name
This shows the first four characters of the channel
name for the channels assigned to the [CUSTOM
FADER] layer. Channels that are not assigned are
shown as “----”.
2 If desired, you can move the cursor to the
metering point select buttons and press the
[ENTER] key to switch the metering point.
In the CUSTOM FADER screen, move the
cursor to the metering point select box, use
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to make
your selection, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
The metering point for the level meters can be set
independently for input channels and output channels.
You can choose from the following metering points.
● Input channels
• PRE HPF............Immediately before the highpass filter
• PRE FADER .......Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...........Immediately after the [ON] key
● Output channels
• PRE EQ..............Immediately before the
attenuator
• PRE FADER .......Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...........Immediately after the [ON] key
For details on the metering points, refer to the block
diagram at the end of this manual.
3 If you want to hold the peak levels of the
level meters, move the cursor to the PEAK
HOLD button and press the [ENTER] key to
turn it on.
On/off operations of the PEAK HOLD button will
apply to both input channels and output channels.
When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared.
HINT
• You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to
a user-defined key (→ p. 196).
• If you turn on METER FOLLOW LAYER in the PREFERENCE
screen, the same meter screen as the selected layer will be
displayed when you press a LAYER key.
156
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 17
Graphic EQ and effects
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ and effects, and how
to perform remote control operations via the dedicated protocol to control an
external head amp (Yamaha AD8HR) from the LS9.
About the virtual rack
The LS9 lets you insert the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and effects
into the desired signal route to process the signals.
You can use two types of GEQ; 31 Band GEQ which lets you freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which lets you adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. You can
also use 48 different effect types.
In order to use a GEQ or effect, you must mount the GEQ or effect in one of the eight virtual racks provided in the screen,
and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had
installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. Only GEQ can be mounted
in racks 1–4, and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–8. [Figure 1]
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31 Band GEQ” is mounted in a rack,
there will be only one channel each for input and output.) [Figure 2] shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
INSERT
IN
PATCH
RACK
RACK 2
RACK 3
Only for GEQ
RACK 1
METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
MIX OUT
1-16
MATRIX OUT
1-8
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
RACK 4
RACK1
METER RACK IN
RACK1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
RACK1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK2 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK2 (same as RACK1)
RACK2 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK3 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK3 (same as RACK1)
RACK3 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK4 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK4 (same as RACK1)
RACK4 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK5
CH
INSERT OUT
1-32
RACK 6
RACK 7
RACK 8
[Figure 1]
GEQ or effects
RACK 5
METER RACK IN
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
16
To MIX INSERT IN
STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
3
To STEREO INSERT IN
MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8
To MATRIX INSERT IN
8
METER RACK OUT
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
MATRIX
INSERT OUT
1-8
To CH INSERT IN
MIX INSERT IN 1-16
31BandGEQ
MIX
INSERT OUT
1-16
STEREO
INSERT OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
CH INSERT IN 1-32
32
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT
EFFECT CUE
RACK5 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK5 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK6 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK6 (same as RACK5)
RACK6 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK7 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK7 (same as RACK5)
RACK7 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK8 (same as RACK5)
RACK8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
17
Graphic EQ and effects
RACK
IN
PATCH
[Figure 2]
HINT
• In addition to the virtual rack for GEQ and effects, there is also a rack for mounting external head amps
(Yamaha AD8HR). For details, refer to “Using an external head amp” (→ p. 175).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
157
About the virtual rack
Mounting a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack
This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the
virtual rack, and patch the input/output of the rack.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously to access the VIRTUAL RACK
screen.
In the VIRTUAL RACK screen you can mount GEQ
or effects, and make input/output settings.
D INPUT button
This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input source
for the rack.
E Virtual rack
This area shows eight virtual racks in which GEQ or
effects can be mounted. Racks 1–4 are only for GEQ,
and either GEQ or effects can be mounted in racks 5–
8. (However depending on the type of internal effect,
some can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7.)
When you move the cursor to a virtual rack and press
the [ENTER] key, the result will depend on whether a
GEQ or effect is already mounted.
● If a GEQ/effect is already mounted in that
HINT
rack
• If you press only the [RACK 1-4] key or the [RACK 5-8] key,
the setting screen (RACK 1–RACK 8 screens) for the rack you
operated most recently will appear. To ensure that you access
the desired screen, hold down one of the keys and then press
the other key.
The RACK 1–RACK 8 screen will appear, allowing you to edit the parameters of the GEQ or
effect.
● If the rack is vacant
The RACK MOUNTER popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the GEQ or effect
that will be mounted in the rack.
The screen contains the following items.
1
F OUTPUT button
This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can select the output destination of
the rack.
2
2 To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, move
3
the cursor to the RACK button for that rack
and press the [ENTER] key.
The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.
3
4
5
1
2
6
1 GEQ/EFFECT field
In this field you can mount GEQ or effects in racks 1–
8, and edit the input/output patching for each rack.
4
5
B RACK button
This displays the RACK MOUNT popup window,
where you can select an item to mount in the rack.
Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at
the immediate right.
1 Rack number
This indicates the number of the selected rack.
C SAFE button
B Virtual rack
This is the virtual rack in which you can mount a GEQ
or effect.
This button switches Recall Safe on/off for the rack.
Each of these buttons corresponds to the rack shown at
the immediate right.
158
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
About the virtual rack
C MODULE SELECT buttons
Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will
be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following
function.
● BLANK button
Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in
the rack; the rack will be empty.
4 To select the input source for a rack, move
the cursor to the INPUT button for that rack
and press the [ENTER] key.
The OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window will
appear, allowing you to select the input source for the
rack.
● 31 Band GEQ button
Mounts a 31 Band GEQ in the rack.
● Flex15GEQ button
1
Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
● EFFECT button
Mounts an effect in the rack. This button will not
operate for racks 1–4.
2
HINT
• Input/output patching will be cleared if you change the item
that is mounted or remove the mounted item.
E OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK
MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was
mounted in a rack and close the window, all parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not
yet closed the window, you can recover the settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again.
HINT
• You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by
moving the cursor to a vacant rack in the GEQ/EFFECT field
and pressing the [ENTER] key.
1 Channel select tabs
These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown
in the lower part of the window.
B Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the input source. Use the
three tabs to switch between groups of input sources
shown in the window.
C CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
The following input sources can be selected in this
popup window.
Tab name
Button name
MIX channel 1–16 outputs
MTRX 1–8
MATRIX channel 1–8 outputs
ST L, ST R,
MONO
STEREO (L/R) channel
output, MONO (C) channel
output
CH 1–32
INPUT channel 1–32
Insert Outs
MIX 1–16
MIX channel 1–16 Insert
Outs
MTRX 1–8
MATRIX channel 1–8
Insert Outs
ST L, ST R,
MONO
STEREO (L/R) channel
Insert Out, MONO (C)
channel Insert Out
OUT CH (*1)
3 Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select
the item you want to mount, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
CH 1-32
(INSERT OUT)
OUT CH
(INSERT OUT)
Input source
MIX 1–16
*1: This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ.
HINT
17
Graphic EQ and effects
D CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK
MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
3
• If you select Insert Out of a channel as the input source for 31
Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ, the Insert In of that same channel
will automatically be selected as the output destination for
that rack. When you defeat an Insert Out, the Insert In will
also be defeated automatically. For details on Insert Out/In,
refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (→
p. 101).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
159
About the virtual rack
5 Switch the tabs as necessary, and select
the input source that you want to use.
When you select an input source in the OUTPUT CH
SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you to
confirm the change in patching. To confirm the operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
The following output destinations can be selected in
this popup window (multiple selections are allowed).
Tab name
• If you selected 31 Band GEQ, you’ll be able to select one
channel of input; otherwise you’ll be able to select two channels of input.
6 Move the cursor to the OUTPUT button for
Output destination
CH 1–32
INPUT channel 1–32
inputs
CH33-64 (*1)
(LS9-32 only)
CH 33–64
INPUT channel 33–64
inputs
STIN (*1)
STIN1L/1R–
4L/4R
ST IN channel 1–4 inputs
CH 1-32
(INSERT OUT)
CH 1–32
INPUT channel 1–32
Insert In
HINT
• You have the option of making settings so that the patch
change confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194).
Button name
CH 1-32 (*1)
OUT CH
(INSERT OUT)
MIX 1–16
MIX channel 1–16 Insert In
MTRX 1–8
MATRIX channel 1–8
Insert In
ST L, ST R,
MONO
STEREO (L/R) channel
Insert In, MONO (C) channel Insert In
*1: This cannot be selected for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ.
that rack, and press the [ENTER] key.
The INPUT CH SELECT popup window will appear,
allowing you to select the output destination for the
rack.
HINT
• If you selected the Insert In of a certain channel as the output
destination for 31 Band GEQ or Flex15GEQ, the Insert Out of
the same channel will automatically be selected as the input
source of that rack. When you defeat an Insert In, the Insert
Out will also be defeated automatically.
7 Switch the tabs as necessary, and select
1
the output destination that you want to use.
When you select an output destination in the INPUT
CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you
to confirm the patching change. To confirm the operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
2
HINT
3
1 Channel select tabs
These tabs switch the type of channels that are shown
in the lower part of the window.
B Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the output destination.
C CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
• You have the option of making settings so that the patch
change confirmation dialog box does not appear (→ p. 194).
• You can specify multiple output destinations for a rack.
• If you selected 31 Band GEQ, you’ll be able to select one
channel of output; otherwise you’ll be able to select two channels of output.
8 To turn Recall Safe on/off, move the cursor
to the SAFE button for that rack and press
the [ENTER] key.
If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and
parameters of that rack will not change when a scene
is recalled. For more about Recall Safe, refer to
“Using the Recall Safe function” (→ p. 140).
HINT
• The type of GEQ or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-source/output-destination settings
are saved as part of the scene.
160
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Graphic EQ operations
Graphic EQ operations
About the graphic EQ
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
The LS9 lets you mount a GEQ in racks 1–8 and patch it
to the insert-out/in of a channel. You can use the top panel
faders and [ON] keys to operate the amount of boost/cut
for each band.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
The LS9’s GEQ units can be patched to the insert-in/out
of any channel except the ST IN channels. Here’s how to
insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
1 As described in steps 1–3 of “Mounting a
GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158),
mount a GEQ in a rack.
● 31 Band GEQ
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave
wide, the adjustable boost/cut range is ±15 dB, and the
amount of boost/cut for each of the thirty-one bands can
be adjusted. If a 31 Band GEQ is mounted in a rack, one
channel of input and output can be used for that rack.
INPUT
The GEQ/EFFECT field shows the approximate settings and input/output levels of the GEQ. A rack in
which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B).
OUTPUT
Rack
31 Band GEQ
● Flex15GEQ
INPUT
OUTPUT
2
1
3
1 Racks
B INPUT buttons
C OUTPUT buttons
HINT
• If you’re using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ
in one rack, or mount two 31 Band GEQ units in adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two
GEQ units later.
Rack
Flex15GEQ (A)
Flex15GEQ (B)
2 Use the INPUT button to open the OUTPUT
CH SELECT popup window where you can
select the input-source for the rack, and
choose the insert-out of the desired channel.
The insert-out will be assigned to the input of the
GEQ. (For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window → p. 159)
17
Graphic EQ and effects
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave
wide, and the adjustable boost/cut range is ±15 dB. The
Flex 15GEQ lets you adjust the boost/cut amount for any
fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31
Band GEQ. (Once you’ve used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you won’t be able to adjust the boost/cut amount of
another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to
the flat setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two
Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively)
mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input
and output. If you mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack,
you’ll be able to use up to sixteen GEQ units simultaneously.
HINT
• If you select the Insert Out of a certain channel as the input
source, the Insert In of that same channel will automatically
be selected as the output destination for that rack. For details
on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a
channel” (→ p. 101).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
161
Graphic EQ operations
3 Use the OUTPUT button to open the INPUT
CH SELECT popup window where you can
select the output-destination for the rack,
and choose the insert-in to which you want
to assign the output of the GEQ (multiple
selections are allowed).
The insert-in will be assigned to the output of the
GEQ. (For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window → p. 160)
HINT
• If you select the Insert In of a certain channel as the output
source, the Insert Out of that same channel will automatically
be selected as the input source for that rack.
4 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, move the cursor
to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ
and press the [ENTER] key.
The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of the GEQ or effect.
E GEQ LINK button
This button links adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a
31 band GEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case
of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the
same rack will be linked.
NOTE
• The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible.
5 If you want to link two GEQ units, turn on
the GEQ LINK button.
If you’ve selected 31 Band GEQ for two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered racks, or if you’ve selected
a Flex15GEQ, you can use the GEQ LINK button to
link the two GEQ units. This is convenient when you
want to process a stereo source through GEQ units
with identical settings.
When you turn the GEQ LINK button on, a popup
window like the following will appear. The popup
window contains the following items.
HINT
• You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the [RACK
1-4] key or [RACK 5-8] key. By repeatedly pressing the [RACK
1-4] key you can access the RACK 1–4 screens, and by
repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key you can access the
RACK 5–8 screens and EXTERNAL HA screen.
• The RACK screens for the 31 Band GEQ and the Flex15GEQ
are nearly identical. However, the Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
1 RACK x→y button (“x” and “y” are the rack
number, or the rack number and the alphabetical characters A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then
linked.
B RACK y→x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then
linked.
C RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then
linked.
D CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the popup window.
1 GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.
B FLAT button
This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to
0 dB.
To confirm the link, move the cursor to a button other
than CANCEL, and press the [ENTER] key. When
you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ/
EFFECT field to indicate the linked status.
C INPUT button
This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input source
of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for
the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
D OUTPUT button
This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can select the output destination of
the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for
the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
162
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Symbol indicating
linked status
Graphic EQ operations
6 To turn on the GEQ, move the cursor to the
GEQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER]
key.
After you’ve turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of
the GEQ. For details on operating the GEQ, refer to
“Using the 31 Band GEQ” (below) or “Using the
Flex15GEQ” (→ p. 164).
7 Check whether INSERT is turned on for the
patched channel.
For details, refer to “Inserting an external device into
a channel” (→ p. 101).
1 EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the current
31 Band GEQ settings.
B Faders
These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each
band of the 31 Band GEQ. The frequency and value
for the fader currently selected by the cursor are
shown below the fader.
C FADER ASSIGN field
Use this field when you want to operate the boost/cut
amount for each band using the top panel faders.
D GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.
E FLAT button
This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to
0 dB.
Using the 31 Band GEQ
Here we will explain how to use the 31 Band GEQ.
1 As described in steps 1–3 of “Mounting a
GEQ or effect in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158),
mount a GEQ in a rack.
A rack in which a 31 Band GEQ is mounted will show
the approximate settings.
F INPUT button
This button displays the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input source
of the rack.
G OUTPUT button
This button displays the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, where you can select the output destination of
the rack.
H GEQ LINK button
This button links adjacent GEQ units.
NOTE
2 In the GEQ/EFFECT field, move the cursor
to the rack in which you mounted the GEQ
and press the [ENTER] key.
The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of the GEQ.
You can also access the RACK screen by pressing the
[RACK 1-4] key or [RACK 5-8] key. By repeatedly
pressing the [RACK 1-4] key you can access the
RACK 1–4 screens, and by repeatedly pressing the
[RACK 5-8] key you can access the RACK 5–8
screens and EXTERNAL HA screen.
4
5
6
7
8
• The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. For
a 31 Band GEQ, this button is displayed if a 31 Band GEQ is
mounted in two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
racks.
3 After you’ve set the input-source and out-
put-destination correctly, use the GEQ ON/
OFF button to turn on the 31-band GEQ.
4 To adjust the boost/cut of each band, move
the cursor to the desired fader and operate
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
5 If you want to use the top panel faders to
adjust the boost/cut of each band, proceed
as follows.
1 Move the cursor to the button in the
FADER ASSIGN field and press the
[ENTER] key.
When this button is turned on, the faders in the screen
will turn white, and you will be able to use the top
panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands.
1
17
Graphic EQ and effects
Rack image display
2
3
LS9-32
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
163
Graphic EQ operations
● For the LS9-16
On the LS9-16, the bands that can be controlled
will depend on the button you selected. In order to
adjust all of the bands, you’ll need to switch these
buttons as you work.
Button name
Bands
[20-630] button
16 bands from 20 Hz–630 Hz
[125-4k] button
16 bands from 125 Hz–4 KHz
[630-20k] button
16 bands from 630 Hz–20 KHz
6 If you want to copy the currently-displayed
31 Band GEQ settings to the GEQ of
another rack, or to initialize the settings,
you can do so using the tool buttons at the
top of the screen.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).
NOTE
• If a 31 Band GEQ is using 15 or fewer bands, its settings can
also be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
HINT
• GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 174).
Using the Flex15GEQ
Here we will explain how to use the Flex15GEQ.
1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect
● For the LS9-32
Only the [20-20k] button can be selected. When
this button is on, you can use the top panel faders
1–31 to operate all 31 bands.
in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,
mount a GEQ in a rack.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show
information for two GEQ units (A and B).
B Operate the faders.
The corresponding frequency region will be boosted
or cut.
1
2
3
HINT
• When a top panel fader is in the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower
the fader even lightly, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this
band is being modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it
go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the
flat state.
C When you’ve finished making settings,
turn off the button(s) of the FADER
ASSIGN field.
The top panel faders and [ON] keys will return to their
previous function.
HINT
• If a button in the FADER ASSIGN field is on, switching the
display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top
panel fader assignments.
• However if you once again display the same rack, the group of
bands you had previously been controlling will automatically
be assigned to the faders.
• FADER ASSIGN on/off settings apply to all GEQ units
together.
164
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
1 GEQ (A)
B GEQ (B)
C Rack graphic display area
HINT
• When you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31 Band GEQ
units (A and B) are placed in a single rack. However, only up
to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
2 Move the cursor to a rack in which a
Flex15GEQ is mounted, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of GEQ (A) or GEQ (B).
To switch the RACK screen, repeatedly press the
[RACK 1-4] keys (RACK 1–4 screens) or [RACK 5-8]
key (RACK 5–8 screens / EXTERNAL HA screens).
For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the
RACK screen is shown separately as xA and xB (x is
the rack number).
Graphic EQ operations
4
5
Remaining number
of bands
1
2
5 If you want to use the top panel faders to
adjust the boost/cut of each band, proceed
as follows.
1 Move the cursor to the button in the
1 EQ graph
This indicates the approximate response of the current
Flex15GEQ settings.
B Faders
These faders indicate the amount of boost/cut for each
band of the Flex15GEQ. The frequency and value for
the fader currently selected by the cursor are shown
below the fader.
C FADER ASSIGN field
Use this field when you want to operate the boost/cut
amount for each band using the faders. At the right
side of “AVAILABLE BANDS,” there is always an
indication of the remaining number of bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled for the current
Flex15GEQ.
D GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected GEQ on/off.
E FLAT button
This returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to
0 dB.
3 Use the [RACK 1-4] key (for RACK 1–4
screens) or the [RACK 5-8] key (for RACK
5–8 screens) to select either GEQ unit A or
B, make the correct input-source and output-destination settings, and then turn on
the Flex15GEQ.
4 To adjust the boost/cut of each band, move
the cursor to the desired fader and operate
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys.
For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B),
a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled.
The remaining number of bands that can be controlled
is shown at the right of “AVAILABLE BANDS” in the
FADER ASSIGN field. If you have used all fifteen
bands, you will have to return one of the used bands
(i.e., a band for which a fader was raised or lowered)
to the flat position before you can operate any other
band.
FADER ASSIGN field and press the
[ENTER] key.
For details on how operation and the buttons differ
between models, refer to step 5 of “Using the 31 Band
GEQ” (→ p. 163).
When this button is turned on, the faders in the screen
will turn white, and you will be able to use the top
panel faders to adjust the GEQ bands.
B Operate the faders.
The corresponding frequency region will be boosted
or cut. A maximum of 15 bands can be controlled.
HINT
• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the
slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band
is being modified.
• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position,
press the corresponding [ON] key to make it go dark.
C When you’ve finished making settings,
turn off the button(s) of the FADER
ASSIGN field.
The top panel faders and [ON] keys will return to their
previous function.
HINT
• If a button in the FADER ASSIGN field is on, switching the
display to another screen or rack will forcibly defeat the top
panel fader assignments. However if you once again display
the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been
controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
6 If you want to copy the currently-displayed
Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another
rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do
so using the tool buttons at the top of the
screen.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).
17
Graphic EQ and effects
3
HINT
• GEQ settings can be saved/loaded at any time using the dedicated library (→ p. 174).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
165
About the internal effects
About the internal effects
The internal effects of the LS9 can be mounted in racks 5–8. For each mounted effect you can
choose one of 48 effect types, and patch the effect to the output of an output channel or the input
of an input channel, or insert it into a channel.
With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 13–16 are input to racks 5–8, and output
to ST IN 1–4 (L/R).
NOTE
• The internal effects cannot be mounted in racks 1–4.
• Some effect types can be mounted only in rack 5 or 7.
To use an internal effect via send/return, assign the output
of a MIX channel etc. to the input of the effect, and assign
the output of the effect to an input channel.
In this case, the corresponding MIX bus is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is
used as an effect return channel.
● STEREO type effects
INPUT L
EFFECT L
L RETURN
INPUT R
EFFECT R
R RETURN
● MIX type effects
Rack 5
INPUT L
Rack 6
EFFECT
Rack 7
EFFECT
INPUT PATCH
Output of the
output channel
OUTPUT PATCH
EFFECT
INPUT R
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input
effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is
selected.
Rack 8
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the
internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel
(except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted
into that channel.
EFFECT
Insert-in of a
desired channel*
* Except for a ST IN channel
The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO
type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel
input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out)
effects that mix the two channels to monaural before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an
effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed
will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix
effect type is selected, as follows.
166
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
R RETURN
Input of the
input channel
EFFECT
Insert-out of a
desired channel*
L RETURN
EFFECT
INPUT L
or R
L RETURN
EFFECT
R RETURN
About the internal effects
Using an internal effect via send/
return
Here we will explain how to use a MIX bus as an effect
send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel,
so that the effect can be used in a send/return configuration.
HINT
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI”
as the bus type (→ p. 213). This will allow you to adjust the send
level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it is convenient to
assign the send-source MIX bus to stereo (→ p. 213).
3 Use the OUTPUT L button to open the
INPUT CH SELECT popup window, and
select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output-destination for the rack.
The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect
return channel will be assigned to the L output of the
effect. For details on the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window, refer to step 6 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect
in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158).
If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign
the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output
of the rack in the same way.
HINT
• You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect
4 Move the cursor to a rack in which an effect
in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,
mount an effect in a rack.
is mounted in the GEQ/EFFECT field, and
press the [ENTER] key.
A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the
effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off
status.
The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of the effect.
You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key.
HINT
• The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate
the [RACK 5-8] key is used when you’re using an external
head amp (→ p. 175).
1
1
2
4
3
1 Racks
B INPUT buttons
C OUTPUT buttons
2 Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT-
PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select
a MIX channel as the input source for the
rack.
The output of the MIX channel you’re using as the
effect send will be assigned to the L input of the effect.
For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 4 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in
the virtual rack” (→ p. 158).
If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals
of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the
rack.
17
1 MIX BAL. knob
This knob adjusts the balance between the original
sound and effect sound included in the output signal
from the effect.
B Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
Graphic EQ and effects
2
3
C INPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window. The operating procedure is the same as
for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
D OUTPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window. The operating procedure is the same as for
the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
167
About the internal effects
5 To change the mix balance of the original
sound and effect sound, move the cursor to
the MIX BAL. knob and use the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys.
The MIX BAL. knob adjusts the balance between the
original sound and effect sound included in the output
signal from the effect. This parameter is provided for
all effect types.
If you’re using the effect via send/return, set this to
100% (effect sound only).
HINT
8 To adjust the master level of the effect
send, call up the fader layer that includes
the MIX channel you specified as the inputsource of the rack in step 2, and adjust the
corresponding fader.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the
post-effect signal to reach the overload point.
9 To adjust the effect return level, operate the
encoder of the ST IN channel you selected
as the output-destination of the rack in step
3.
• For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing
the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170).
6 To adjust the effect send level of an input
channel, press the [HOME] key to access
the SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and
access the input channel that you want to
control.
1
Inserting an internal effect into a
channel
Here we will explain how to insert an effect into a channel
by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the
input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN
channel).
1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect
2
in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,
mount an effect in a rack.
A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the
effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off
status.
1 SEND field
B TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob
7 Move the cursor to the TO MIX SEND LEVEL
knob for the desired MIX bus, and use the
dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to adjust the
send level.
With these settings, the signal will be sent from the
input channel to the internal effect. Adjust the send
level of other input channels in the same way.
By moving the cursor to the knob and pressing the
[ENTER] key, you can switch the signal sent from
each channel to the corresponding bus on/off, and
access a popup window where you can choose the
send point (PRE/POST) (→ p. 64).
NOTE
• Make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you
selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If
you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be
returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing
oscillation.
168
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
2
1
3
1 Racks
B INPUT buttons
C OUTPUT buttons
2 Use the INPUT L button to open the OUT-
PUT CH SELECT popup window, and select
the insert-out of a channel as the inputsource.
Insert-out will be assigned to the L input of the effect.
For details on the OUTPUT CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 4 of “Mounting a GEQ or effect in
the virtual rack” (→ p. 158).
About the internal effects
3 Use the INPUT L button to open the INPUT
CH SELECT popup window, and select the
insert-in of the same channel as the outputdestination.
Insert-in will be assigned to the L output of the effect.
If you are inserting in a channel that handles a stereo
source, use the same procedure to assign the insertout/insert-in of the other channel to the R input and R
output of the effect.
7 Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to
access the RACK screen for the rack you
inserted into the channel.
In this screen you can edit the parameters of the effect.
The screen contains the following items.
2
1
3
4 Press the [HOME] key to access the
SELECTED CH VIEW screen, and access
the channel into which you want to insert
the effect.
5 Move the cursor to the INSERT popup button, and press the [ENTER] key to access
the INSERT popup window.
Make sure that the desired rack is selected for the
input/output ports you’re using for the insertion. For
details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external
device into a channel” (→ p. 101).
1 Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
B INPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window. The operating procedure is the same as
for the INPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
1
C OUTPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window. The operating procedure is the same as for
the OUTPUT button in the GEQ/EFFECT field.
1 INSERT ON/OFF button
HINT
• The INSERT popup window also lets you change the insertout/in position within the channel.
parameters.
For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to
“Editing the internal effect parameters.”
HINT
Make sure that the INSERT ON/OFF button
is turned on for the channel into which you
inserted the effect.
If this is off, turn it on. In this state, effect insertion is
enabled for the corresponding channel.
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input/
output meters at the upper right of the RACK screen.
NOTE
• Adjust the insert out signal level and the effect parameters so
that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input
or output stage of the effect.
9 Select the fader layer that includes the
channel you selected in step 3 as the output destination of the rack, and operate the
corresponding fader to adjust the level
appropriately.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
17
Graphic EQ and effects
6
8 Select the effect type and edit the effect
169
About the internal effects
Editing the internal effect parameters
This section explains how to change the effect type and
edit the parameters.
1 As described in “Mounting a GEQ or effect
1 Effect type field
This shows the effect title, the name of the type that is
used, and a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also
shown. If you move the cursor to the effect type
graphic and press the [ENTER] key, the EFFECT
TYPE popup window will appear, allowing you to
select the effect type.
in the virtual rack” (→ p. 158) steps 1–3,
mount an effect in a rack.
B BYPASS button
This button temporarily bypasses the effect.
A rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the
effect type used by that effect, and the bypass on/off
status.
C EFFECT CUE button
This button cue-monitors the output of the currently
displayed effect. This cue function is valid only while
this screen is displayed. The cue will be cancelled
automatically when you switch to a different screen.
D Special parameter field
This shows special parameters that are specific to
some effect types.
E Input/output meters
These indicate the level of the signals before and after
the effect.
F INPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the OUTPUT CH SELECT
popup window.
1
G OUTPUT L/R buttons
These buttons display the INPUT CH SELECT popup
window.
2
H Effect parameter field
This area shows parameters for the currently selected
effect type.
1 Effect title/type
B Bypass on/off status
2 Move the cursor to the rack in which the
3 If you want to change the effect type, pro-
effect you want to edit is mounted, and
press the [ENTER] key.
ceed as follows.
The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of the effect.
You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key.
1 Move the cursor to the effect type graphic,
and press the [ENTER] key.
The EFFECT TYPE popup window will appear.
HINT
• The EXTERNAL HA screen that appears when you operate
the [RACK 5-8] key is used when you’re using an external
head amp (→ p. 175).
1
2
6
4
5
7
CLOSE button
3
8
170
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
About the internal effects
B Use the dial or the cursor keys to move the
● PLAY/REC
cursor, and select the new effect type.
You can move the cursor up or down to select a new
type in steps of twelve.
If you decide not to change the effect type, use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the CLOSE button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
This is shown if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
1
C When you’ve selected a new effect type,
press the [ENTER] key.
The EFFECT TYPE popup window will close automatically, and the new effect is now available for use.
HINT
• You can also switch the effect type by recalling a library setting.
1 PLAY button / REC button
These buttons are used to record (sample) and play
back when using the freeze effect. For details on
how to use this, refer to “Using the Freeze effect”
(→ p. 173).
● SOLO
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and FREEZE” can be used only in
rack 5 or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you
will not be able to paste them to rack 6 or 8.
This is shown if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND
COMP. is selected as the effect type.
4 To edit the effect parameters, move the cur-
1
sor to the knobs in the effect parameter
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys.
HINT
• For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the
supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 233).
5 Edit the settings in the special parameter
field as necessary.
For some effect types, parameters such as the following will appear in the special parameter field.
● TEMPO
This is shown if a tempo-type or modulation-type
effect is selected.
1
2
2
1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
These buttons pass only the selected frequency
band (multiple selections are allowed).
B Gain reduction meters
These show the amount of gain reduction for each
band.
6 If you want to monitor only the output sig-
nal of the currently displayed effect, press
the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on.
HINT
• If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE mode (in which all channels whose [CUE] keys are on will be mixed for monitoring),
only the output signal of the effect will be monitored when you
turn on the EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had
been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.)
7 If you want to bypass the currently dis-
played effect, turn the BYPASS button on.
1 MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of
that effect will be set to match the tempo of the
MIDI timing clock being input from the currentlyenabled MIDI port.
B BPM knob
This knob sets the BPM parameter manually. You
can also assign the Tap Tempo function to a userdefined key, and set the BPM using it (→ p. 172).
8 If you want to copy the currently-displayed
effect settings to the effect of another rack,
or to initialize the settings, you can do so
using the tool buttons at the top of the
screen.
17
Graphic EQ and effects
NOTE
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using
the tool buttons” (→ p. 35).
HINT
• Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using
the effect library (→ p. 174).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
171
About the internal effects
Using the Tap Tempo function
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay
time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. To
use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a
user-defined key, and then operate that user-defined key.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen within the SETUP screens.
4 Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION col-
umn, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column, move the cursor to
the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
To select an item in each column, move the cursor to
the desired column and use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and
press the [ENTER] key; the Tap Tempo function will
be assigned to the user-defined key you selected in
step 3, and you will return to the USER DEFINED
KEY SETUP page.
1
HINT
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currentlyshown effect (rack).
1 USER DEFINED KEYS popup button
2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED
KEYS popup button and press the [ENTER]
key to access the USER DEFINED KEYS
popup window.
The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window lets you
assign functions to user defined keys [1]–[12].
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=5–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used only for a specific
effect (rack).
• For more about user-defined keys, refer to “User-defined
keys” (→ p. 196).
5 Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to
access the RACK screen for the rack in
which the effect you want to control is
mounted.
6 Select an effect type that includes a BPM
parameter.
For details on selecting the effect type, refer to step 3
of “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170).
The BPM parameter is shown in the special parameter
field. It is included in delay-type and modulation-type
effects, and can be used to specify the delay time or
modulation speed.
1
1 User defined keys popup buttons
1
3 Move the cursor to the popup button for the
user-defined key to which you want to
assign the Tap Tempo function, and press
the [ENTER] key.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window
will appear.
1 BPM parameter
172
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
About the internal effects
4 Select “FREEZE” as the effect type.
HINT
• For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the
supplementary material at the end of this manual (→ p. 233).
7 At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the
For details on selecting the effect type, refer to step 3
of “Editing the internal effect parameters” (→ p. 170).
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar are shown in the
special parameter field.
user-defined key to which you assigned the
Tap Tempo function.
1
2 3
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the
key will be calculated, and that value will be reflected
by the BPM parameter.
The average interval will be input
(the average of a, b, and c)
a
First tap
b
Second tap
c
Third tap
Fourth tap
HINT
• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it
will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter
field, the BPM parameter value will change according to the
tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the currentlyenabled MIDI port.
1 PLAY button
B REC button
C Progress bar
HINT
• As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also
recall settings that use the “FREEZE” effect type from the
effect library.
5 To begin recording (sampling), turn on the
REC button to make it light, and then turn
on the PLAY button.
Here’s how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this
effect type is selected, you can perform operations in the
screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[RACK 1-4] key and [RACK 5-8] key simultaneously to access the VIRTUAL RACK
screen.
2
Mount an effect in rack 5 or rack 7.
The signal being input to the effect will be recorded.
The progress bar shows the current recording location.
When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
HINT
• You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed
settings for recording time, the way in which recording will
begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For
details on the parameters, refer to the supplementary material
at the end of this manual (→ p. 233).
6 To play back the recorded sample, move the
cursor to the PLAY button and press the
[ENTER] key.
NOTE
• Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in
rack 5 or 7.
NOTE
17
Graphic EQ and effects
Using the Freeze effect
• If, after recording, you turn on the REC button again to enter
record-ready mode, the sampled content will be erased.
3 Move the cursor to the rack in which the
effect you want to edit is mounted, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The RACK screen will appear, allowing you to edit the
parameters of the effect.
You can also access the RACK 5–8 screens by repeatedly pressing the [RACK 5-8] key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
173
Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries
Using the graphic EQ and effect libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall graphic EQ and effect settings.
GEQ library
Effect library
Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings.
This GEQ library can be referenced by all GEQ units used
in the LS9. (However, the 31 Band GEQ and Flex15GEQ
are different types. You cannot recall a GEQ library item
of a different type.)
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is
read-only, and the remaining library numbers can be
freely read or written.
To access the GEQ library, move the cursor to the LIB
toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when a GEQ is
shown in the RACK screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings.
199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Library
items 1–48 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect
types 1–48 respectively. Library items 49–57 are reserved
for use by the system. Other library item numbers can be
freely read and written.
To access the effect library, move the cursor to the LIB
toolbutton in the upper part of the screen when an effect is
shown in a RACK 5–8 screen, and press the [ENTER]
key.
1
1
1 LIB button
1 LIB button
For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 35).
NOTE
• Store/recall operations are performed on individual racks. You
can’t individually store/recall two Flex15GEQ units that are
mounted in the same rack.
For details on using the library, refer to “Using libraries”
(→ p. 35).
NOTE
• Library items using the “HQ.PITCH” or “FREEZE” effect types can
be recalled only into rack 5 or 7. They cannot be recalled into rack
6 or 8.
HINT
• You can also use MIDI messages (program changes) to recall
effect settings from the library (→ p. 180).
174
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using an external head amp
Using an external head amp
If an I/O card (expected to go on sale in the future) that supports the external head amp (Yamaha
AD8HR) remote protocol is installed in an LS9 slot, you’ll be able to remotely control parameters
such as the external head amp’s phantom power (+48V) on/off, gain, and HPF from the LS9.
For an example of actual connections, refer to the owner’s manual of the I/O card.
Remotely controlling an external
head amp
Here’s how to control the external head amp (subsequently called “external HA”) from the LS9 via an I/O
card installed in a slot.
1 Connect the LS9 and external HA.
Refer to the owner’s manual for the I/O card and for
the external head amp.
2 Repeatedly press the [RACK 5-8] key to
access the EXTERNAL HA screen.
The EXTERNAL HA screen includes the following
items.
1
B ID / Model name / +48V master
This displays information for the external HA
mounted in the rack. The ID number is assigned automatically as 1 to 2 {1 to 4} in the order in which
devices are connected to the I/O card. This area also
shows the on/off status of the master phantom power.
C Virtual racks
These are two {four} racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external
HA is mounted, its settings (gain setting, phantom
power on/off, HPF on/off) are shown. When you move
the cursor to a rack and press the [ENTER] key, the
EXTERNAL HA popup window for that rack will
appear.
D EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button
This button accesses the EXTERNAL HA PORT
SELECT popup window, where you can specify the
input ports to which the external HA mounted in the
rack will be connected.
3 To select the communication port for the I/O
card, move the cursor to the COMM PORT
box, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select a port, and press the [ENTER] key.
4 To specify the input ports for an external
HA, move the cursor to the EXTERNAL HA
PORT SELECT popup button for that rack,
and press the [ENTER] key.
3
4
1 COMM PORT box
This box lets you select the communication port for
the currently-installed I/O card(s).
1
2
NOTE
• When installing an MY16-ES64 or similar EtherSound interface card in an LS9-32, be sure to install it in SLOT 1.
● SLOT {SLOT1}
Select the communication port for the I/O card
installed in the slot {slot 1}.
● SLOT2 (LS9-32 only)
Select the communication port for the I/O card
installed in slot 2.
17
Graphic EQ and effects
2
The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window
will appear. The popup window includes the following
items.
1 PORT SELECT buttons
These buttons specify the input ports to which the
external HA is connected.
B NO ASSIGN button
This button defeats the port selection.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
175
Using an external head amp
5 Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify
the input ports to which the audio output of
the external HA is connected.
7 To remotely control the external HA in an
LS9 input channel, press the [HOME] key to
access the SELECTED CH VIEW screen,
and access the channel that you want to
control.
When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the CLOSE button and press the [ENTER] key
to close the popup window.
1
NOTE
• If an external HA is connected to one of the LS9’s slots, you
must specify the appropriate input port manually. If this is set
incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly
when you patch input ports to input channels.
6 To remotely control an external HA, move
the cursor to the rack in which the external
HA you want to control is mounted, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear.
Here you can remotely control the external HA by
using the knobs and buttons in the LS9’s display or the
dial etc. of the top panel.
1 HA popup button
2
8 Move the cursor to the HA popup button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
HA/PATCH popup window.
1
3
4
1
5
1 Rack select buttons
These switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window.
B +48V MASTER
If an external HA is connected to the REMOTE connector, the on/off status of the master phantom power
is shown here. (Switching this on/off is performed on
the external HA itself.)
C +48V buttons
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
D GAIN knobs
These indicate the gain of the external HA. Move the
cursor to the knob and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to adjust the setting.
E HPF knobs / ON buttons
These controls switch the external HA’s built-in highpass filter on/off, and adjust its cutoff frequency.
HINT
• When you newly connect an AD8HR, the above screen will
reflect the state of the AD8HR’s settings.
• Since the above knobs and buttons will be shown even if an
AD8HR is not connected, you can use them to make settings
even without the AD8HR, and store these settings in a scene.
176
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
1 Input port popup button
9 Press the input port popup button, and
select the input port assigned to the external HA.
With these settings, the external HA can be used in the
same way as the LS9’s own HA. For details on the
HA/PATCH popup window, refer to “HA (head amp)
settings” (→ p. 57).
HINT
• Settings for the external HA are saved as part of the scene
(However, master phantom on/off, HPF on/off, and cutoff frequency settings are excepted).
• When you adjust the brightness of the LS9’s panel LEDs, this
will also affect the LEDs of the external HA.
Chapter 18
MIDI
This chapter explains how MIDI messages can be transmitted from an external device to control the LS9’s parameters, and conversely how operations
on the LS9 can be transmitted as MIDI messages.
MIDI functionality on the LS9
The LS9 can use MIDI to perform the following operations.
● Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the LS9, a program change message of the corresponding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device.
● Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader/encoder or key operation) on the LS9, the corresponding control
change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when control
change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a
MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later.
● Parameter change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader/encoder or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed
on the LS9, “parameter change” system exclusive messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely,
events can be executed when parameter changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, LS9 operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external
device, or changes in system settings and user settings can be reflected on another LS9 console.
NOTE
• As the MIDI port used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages, you can select either the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT
connectors or an I/O card installed in the slot {1, 2}. (If you select an I/O card, you can also select a port number.) All of
the above functionality will be common to the selected port.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages can be received to control the transport of the USB memory recorder.
MIDI
18
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
177
Basic MIDI settings
Basic MIDI settings
Here’s how to select the type of MIDI messages the LS9 will transmit and receive, the MIDI port
that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen within the SETUP screens.
MIDI SETUP popup button
C Channel select box
Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the
MIDI message transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx)
channel.
D PROGRAM CHANGE field
Here you can make settings for program change transmission and reception.
● Tx button
Switches program change transmission on/off.
● Rx button
Switches program change reception on/off.
● ECHO button
This selects whether incoming program changes
are echoed-out from the transmission port.
HINT
2 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MIDI SETUP popup window.
2
3
5
7
• For details on how to assign the scene or effect for each program number, refer to “Using program changes to recall
scenes and library items” (→ p. 180).
E PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the program change transmit/
receive mode.
● SINGLE button
If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel.
1
● OMNI button
If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI
channels will be received in Single mode. (Multi
mode transmission/reception and Single mode
transmission are disabled.)
4
6
8
● BANK button
9
If this button is on, bank select messages can be
transmitted and received in Single mode. (This is
disabled for Multi mode transmission/reception.)
In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of
MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received,
and choose the port that will be used. This page
includes the following items.
1 PORT/CH field
Here you can select the port and MIDI channel that
will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. If
MIDI messages are being transmitted or received, the
SIGNAL indicators at the top of this field will light.
B Port select box
Use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to select the
MIDI message transmit (Tx) port and receive (Rx)
port. If you select the same port as used by another
function such as cascade link or HA remote, a confirmation dialog box will appear. If you select OK, the
port setting for the other function will be disabled.
178
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
● MULTI button
If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi
mode).
F CONTROL CHANGE field
Here you can make settings for control change transmission/reception.
● Tx button
Switches control change transmission on/off.
● Rx button
Switches control change reception on/off.
● ECHO button
This selects whether incoming control changes are
echoed-out from the transmission port.
Basic MIDI settings
G CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the control change transmission/
reception mode.
● NRPN button
If this button is on, the LS9’s mix parameters will
be transmitted/received as NRPN messages on one
MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
4 To specify the channel (CH1–CH16) on
which MIDI messages will be transmitted or
received, move the cursor to the channel
selection box, use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys to specify the setting, and press
the [ENTER] key.
● TABLE button
If this button is on, the LS9’s mix parameters will
be transmitted/received as control change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode).
H PARAMETER CHANGE field
Here you can make settings for transmission/reception
of “parameter change” system exclusive messages.
● Tx button
Switches parameter change transmission on/off.
HINT
• When transmitting or receiving parameter changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a
number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
5 Turn transmission/reception on or off for
each MIDI message.
● Rx button
Switches parameter change reception on/off.
● ECHO button
This selects whether incoming parameter changes
are echoed-out from the transmission port.
HINT
• For details on using program changes, refer to “Using program changes to recall scenes and library items,” below.
• For details on using control changes, refer to “Using control
changes to control parameters” (→ p. 183).
I OTHER COMMAND field
Here you can specify how MIDI messages other than
program changes, control changes, and parameter
changes (i.e., messages such as note-on/off and MIDI
timing clock) will be received.
● ECHO button
Selects whether other MIDI messages that are
received will be echoed out from the transmit port.
3 To specify the port that will transmit or
receive each type of MIDI message, move
the cursor to the transmit (Tx) or receive
(Rx) port selection box, use the dial or the
[DEC]/[INC] keys to specify the setting, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
18
Item
MIDI
You can choose from the following items.
Description
----
No port will be used.
MIDI
Rear panel MIDI IN (Rx) / OUT (Tx)
connector
SLOT {1/2} -1–8
(The number of available
ports will depend on the
card that is installed.)
A card that supports serial transmission, installed in a rear panel
slot {1/2} (MY16-CII is valid in
SLOT {1–2})
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
179
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
The LS9 lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each program
change number, so that when this event is executed on the LS9, a program change message of
the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device.
1 Connect the LS9 to your external device.
The following illustration shows an example of using
the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
external device
6 Move the cursor to the PROGRAM CHANGE
popup button, and press the [ENTER] key
to access the PROGRAM CHANGE popup
window.
In the PROGRAM CHANGE popup window you can
specify how program changes will be transmitted and
received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect
library recall) that will be assigned to each program
number.
This page includes the following items.
1
2
LS9
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
3
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen.
4
5
1 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Here you can switch program change transmission/
reception on/off, and specify whether program
changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with
the PROGRAM CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP
popup window.
3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MIDI SETUP popup window.
4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→
p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels
that will be used to transmit/receive program changes.
5 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to close the popup
window.
You will return to the MISC SETUP screen.
180
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
B PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the program change transmit/
receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP
page popup window.
C List
This list shows the event (scene recall / effect library
recall) assigned to each program number. The list
shows the following items.
● CH/BANK
Indicates the MIDI channel 1–16 on which program changes are transmitted/received. In Single
mode if the BANK button is on, this will be
labeled BANK, and the numerical value in this
column will correspond to the bank number.
● NO.
Indicates the program number 1–128.
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
Indicates the type/number/title of the event
assigned to the program number for each MIDI
channel (bank number). By pressing the popup
button for an individual event, you can access the
PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window,
where you can change the assignment for each
program number.
D CLEAR ALL button
Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in
the list.
E INITIALIZE ALL button
Pressing this button will restore all event assignments
in the list to their default state.
7 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE
MODE field to select the program change
transmission/reception mode.
You can select one of the following two program
change transmission/reception modes.
● Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on)
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel
specified in the MIDI SETUP popup window will be
ignored.)
When a program change is received, the event
assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the LS9, the
program change of the corresponding MIDI channel
and program number in the list will be transmitted.
● Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on)
Only program changes of the transmit (Tx) and
receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI SETUP
popup window will be transmitted and received.
When a program change on the Rx channel is
received, the event assigned to that program number of
the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the LS9, the
program change of the corresponding program number
will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list.
(If an event is assigned to more than one program
number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered
program number will be transmitted.)
If you turn on the OMNI button / BANK button in Single mode, operation will change as follows.
● When the OMNI button is on
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be
received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel
that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will
be executed.
Turning on the OMNI button will not change the
operation for program change transmission.
● When the BANK button is on
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK
(bank number), and bank select (control change
#0, #32) + program change messages can be transmitted and received. This is convenient when you
want to control more than 128 events on a single
MIDI channel.
When bank select and then program change messages
(in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the
event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the LS9, bank
select + program change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be
transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is
assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in
Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a program change on an
applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank
number will be used.
HINT
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned
on at the same time. In this case, bank select + program
change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
8 Use the buttons of the PROGRAM CHANGE
field to turn transmission and reception on/
off, and make settings for echo output.
This field includes the following items.
● Tx button
18
MIDI
● PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
Switches program change transmission on/off.
● Rx button
Switches program change reception on/off.
● ECHO button
This selects whether incoming program changes are
echoed-out from the transmission port.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
181
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
9 To change the event assignment for each
program number, move the cursor to the
popup button for the corresponding event
in the list, and press the [ENTER] key.
The PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window
will appear. In this window you can specify the event
assigned to each program number. This popup window
contains the following items.
1
2
11 Assign events to other program numbers in
the same way.
With these settings, executing the specified event on
the LS9 will cause the corresponding program change
(or bank select + program change) message to be
transmitted to the external device.
When an external device transmits a program change
(or bank select + program change) message on the
appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding MIDI channel (or
bank number) will be executed.
HINT
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments
to program numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all
program number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings
for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
NOTE
1 TYPE field
Select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
Item
NO ASSIGN
Content
No assignment
SCENE
Scene memory recall operations
RACK 5–8
Effect library recall operations for racks 5–8
(only if an effect is mounted)
B LIBRARY NAME field
Select the number and title of the scene or library item
to recall. If you selected SCENE in the TYPE field,
this shows the scene number and its title. If you
selected RACK 5–8, this shows the library number
and its title.
10 Use the TYPE field to select the type of
event you want to assign, and use the
LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene/
library number that will be recalled.
To select an item, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key to finalize the changes and close the
PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT popup window.
182
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
• In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than
one program number on a Tx channel, only the lowest program number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on,
only the program number of the lowest bank number will be
transmitted.)
• In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one
MIDI channel and more than one program number, only the
lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
Using control changes to control parameters
Using control changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the LS9. This capability can be used to record fader and
key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.
You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
● Using control changes
This method uses typical control changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an
event to each control number.
● Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses control change numbers 62 and 63 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted control change messages of control
change number 6 (or 6 and 26) to specify the value of that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed.
HINT
• For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the appendix (→ p. 253).
1 Connect the LS9 to your external device.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen.
3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MIDI SETUP popup window.
4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→
p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels
that will be used to transmit/receive control
changes.
6 Move the cursor to the CONTROL CHANGE
popup button, and press the [ENTER] key
to access the CONTROL CHANGE popup
window.
In the CONTROL CHANGE popup window you can
specify how control changes will be transmitted and
received, and assign the event (fader/encoder operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each
control number. This page includes the following
items.
1
2
5 When you’ve finished making settings,
3
You will return to the MISC SETUP screen.
4
5
18
MIDI
move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to close the popup
window.
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
Here you can switch control change transmission/
reception on/off, and specify whether control changes
will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the
CONTROL CHANGE field of the MIDI SETUP
popup window.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
183
Using control changes to control parameters
B CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Here you can select the control change transmission/
reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field of the MIDI SETUP
popup window.
C List
This list shows the event (fader/encoder pattern, [ON]
key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control
number.
9 To change the event assignment for each
control number, move the cursor to the
popup button for the corresponding event
in the list, and press the [ENTER] key.
The CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window
will appear. In this window you can specify the event
assigned to each control number. The window contains
the following items.
1
● NO.
2
This indicates the control number. You can use
control numbers 1–31, 33–95, and 102–119.
● CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to each
control number. When you press the popup button
for an event, the CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
popup window will appear, allowing you to change
the control number assignment.
D CLEAR ALL button
Pressing this button will clear all event assignments in
the list.
E INITIALIZE ALL button
Pressing this button will restore all event assignments
in the list to their default state.
7 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE
MODE field to select the control change
transmission/reception mode.
You can choose one of the following two modes for
control change transmission/reception.
● NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on)
The LS9’s various mix parameters will be transmitted
and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the
list will be ignored.
● TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on)
The LS9’s various mix parameters will be transmitted
and received on a single MIDI channel as control
change messages.
HINT
• The channel on which control changes are transmitted and
received is specified by the MIDI SETUP popup window
PORT/CH field (→ p. 178).
8 Use the buttons of the CONTROL CHANGE
field to turn transmission and reception on/
off, and make settings for echo output.
Each button has the following function.
● Tx button
Switches control change transmission on/off.
● Rx button
Switches control change reception on/off.
● ECHO button
This selects whether incoming control changes are
echoed-out from the transmission port.
184
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
1 MODE field
Select the type of event.
B PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this specifies the
type of event.
NOTE
• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored.
HINT
• For details on the events that can be assigned to control
changes, refer to the appendix (→ p. 249).
10 In the order of the MODE field → PARAMETER 1 field → PARAMETER 2 field, specify
the type of event you want to assign.
To select an item, use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key to finalize the changes and close the
CONTROL CHANGE EVENT popup window.
11 Assign events to other control numbers in
the same way.
When you operate the parameters you assigned on the
LS9, control change messages will be transmitted to
external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding control change messages are sent from an external device
on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to
those control numbers will change.
HINT
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments
to control numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all
control number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings
for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
Using parameter changes to control parameters
Using parameter changes to control parameters
On the LS9, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “parameter changes” to
control specific events (fader/encoder operations, [ON] key on/off operations, etc.) as an alternative to using control changes or NRPN messages.
For details on the parameter changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI Data
Format” in the appendix.
1 Connect the LS9 to your external device.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen.
3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MIDI SETUP popup window.
4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→
p. 178), select the ports and MIDI channels
(device numbers) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes.
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies
the transmitting or receiving device. The transmit (Tx) channel
and receive (Rx) channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page
are used as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the
transmitted parameter change does not match the device
number of the receiving LS9 console, the message will be
ignored.
• If parameter change and control change transmission/reception are turned on at the same time, a large amount of data
will flood the MIDI port and cause overflows or other problems, so you should avoid this.
5 Use the Tx button and Rx button of the
PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on
parameter change transmission/reception.
In this state when you operate specific parameters on
the LS9, the corresponding parameter change messages will be transmitted. If valid parameter change
messages are transmitted from an external device, the
parameters assigned to those parameter changes will
be controlled.
MIDI
18
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
185
Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB memory recorder
Using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) to operate the USB
memory recorder
You can use MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages to operate the LS9’s USB memory
recorder from an external device.
MMC is only received (not transmitted). For details on the MMC messages that can be received,
refer to “MIDI Data Format” in the appendix.
1 Connect the LS9 to your external device.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen within the SETUP screens.
3 Move the cursor to the MIDI SETUP popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key to
access the MIDI SETUP popup window.
4 As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (→
p. 178), select the port and MIDI channel
(device number) that will be used to receive
MMC messages.
NOTE
• MMC messages include a “device number” that specifies the
receiving device. The receive (Rx) channel specified in the
MIDI SETUP page is used as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the
transmitted MMC message does not match the device number of the receiving LS9 console, the message will be
ignored.
5 Prepare the USB memory recorder for use.
For details on using the USB memory
recorder, see p.105.
In this state, an external device will be able to control
operations such as play, record, stop, and pause on the
LS9’s USB memory recorder.
The following MMC commands are supported.
Command
MMC#
Stop
01
Stop playback or recording.
02
Begins playback of the selected file.
The file to be played can be selected
beforehand in the TITLE LIST
screen, or the desired track number
can be selected using a MIDI Song
Select message (F3).
03
Begins playback of the selected file.
The file to be played can be selected
beforehand in the TITLE LIST
screen, or the desired track number
can be selected using a MIDI Song
Select message (F3).
Play
Play
186
Content
Record
06
Begins recording.
Pause
09
Pauses playback or recording.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 19
User settings (Security)
This chapter explains the User Level settings that allow restrictions on the
parameters that can be operated by each user, the Console Lock function
that temporarily disables operation of the console, the Preferences settings
that allow the operating environment to be customized, and Save/Load operations using USB memory.
User Level settings
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that be operated by each user, or to
change the settings of the custom fader layer, user-defined keys, and preference settings for
each user. Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” on USB memory,
allowing users to be switched easily, simply by connecting the memory device to a USB connector. This is convenient in the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can
be locked to prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. In order to operate the LS9, you must log-in as some type of user.
● Administrator
This is the administrator of the LS9, and can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator
settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys
for other users.
● Guest
● User
A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. User settings are saved
on USB memory as a user authentication key. Multiple sets of User settings can be saved with different
user names. Custom fader layer, user-defined key, and preference settings can be edited, and these settings stored in the user authentication key.
In addition, a User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a
specified user level.
When a user logs on, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information.
•
•
•
•
19
User settings (Security)
A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. Only one set of Guest
settings is internally maintained in the console.
Password (except for Guest)
User level (except for Administrator)
Preferences
User-defined keys
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
187
User Level settings
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Logged-in user
Administrator
Custom fader layer / userdefined keys / preference
setting editing
User Level setting
Comment
editing
Available
(Can edit the settings for
Administrator and for
Guest.)
Available
(Cannot edit the user level, since
the administrator can always
perform all operations. Can edit
the user level for Guest.)
Available
—
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Power user
User
User authentication key
(USB memory)
Password
setting
Create new Overwrite-save
—
Normal user (a
user without
Power User
privileges)
Available
N/A
(View only)
Available
Available
—
Available
(Only settings
other than User
Level)
Guest
Available
N/A
(View only)
—
Available
—
—
Setting the Administrator password
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is
not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator
privileges and perform all operations. If you want to
restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an
Administrator password.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
PASSWORD CHANGE popup button
3 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD
field; then move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The password can be up to eight characters. For details
on entering a password, refer to “Assigning a name”
(→ p. 34)
Creating a user authentication key
Here’s how to create a user authentication key and save it
on USB memory. A user authentication key can be created
only by an Administrator or Power User. The user level
can be specified when the authentication key is created,
but the custom fader layer, user-defined key settings, and
preference settings will be carried over from the user who
is currently logged-in.
1 Connect USB memory to the USB connector.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
CREATE USER KEY button
2 Move the cursor to the PASSWORD
CHANGE popup button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a password.
188
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
User Level settings
3 Move the cursor to the CREATE USER KEY
button and press the [ENTER] key.
The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear.
1
2
3
Logging-in
In order to operate the LS9, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in
the console itself, but in order to log in as a User you must
connect USB memory on which a user authentication key
has been saved. If you disconnect the USB memory after
logging-in, your access privileges will forcibly revert to
Guest.
NOTE
4
1 USER NAME
The user name of up to eight characters is shown (and
can be edited) here. When you move the cursor to this
field and press the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window
will appear, allowing you to enter a user name (→
p. 34).
B PASSWORD
Specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this
to access a keyboard window where you can enter the
password (→ p. 34).
• If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If
a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the
password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly
logged-in as Guest. Similarly, you will also be forcibly logged-in as
Guest if you had been logged-in as a user requiring a user authentication key, but USB memory is no longer connected.
● Logging-in as Administrator
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
Log-in popup button
C POWER USER
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be
granted to this user.
D Access permission settings
These settings specify the range of operations that the
user can perform. For details on each item, refer to
p.193.
4 When you have specified the user name,
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, the user
authentication key will be saved on USB memory.
If you are logged-in as a Power User, a dialog box will
ask you to confirm the store-destination USB memory.
If you want to save the user authentication key on different USB memory, connect the desired USB memory and then press [OK].
2 Move the cursor to the log-in popup button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The LOGIN popup window will appear.
19
User settings (Security)
password, power user privileges on/off, and
user rights, move the cursor to the CREATE
button and press the [ENTER] key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
189
User Level settings
3 Move the cursor to the ADMINISTRATOR
LOGIN button and press the [ENTER] key.
If no Administrator password has been set, you will
simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the
password.
● Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key
saved on USB memory. You may also log-in using a user
authentication key that was created on a different LS9
console.
1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
3 Move the cursor to the log-in popup button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The LOGIN popup window will appear.
4 Enter the password, move the cursor to the
OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning
a name” (→ p. 34).
If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG
PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen.
● Logging-in as Guest
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
2 Move the cursor to the log-in popup button
4 Move the cursor to the LOAD USER KEY
button and press the [ENTER] key.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the
files and folders saved on the USB memory will be
displayed. User authentication keys have a file name
of “User name.L9U”.
and press the [ENTER] key.
The LOGIN popup window will appear.
3 Move the cursor to the GUEST LOGIN button and press the [ENTER] key.
File list
LOAD button
5 Move the cursor to the file list, and turn the
dial to select the user authentication key of
the user as whom you want to log-in.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file
that is selected for operations.
For details on loading from USB memory, refer to
“Loading a file from USB memory” (→ p. 200).
190
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
User Level settings
press the [ENTER] key.
If no password has been set, you will simply be
logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
NOTE
• If you select a user authentication key that was created on a
different LS9 console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the LS9 console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are
identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the
correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will
appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected
user.
• If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be
asked for the Administrator password the next time. (→ p. 192
Editing a user authentication key)
7 Enter the password, move the cursor to the
OK button, and press the [ENTER] key.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning
a name” (→ p. 34).
If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG
PASSWORD” will appear in the bottom of the screen.
Changing the password
Here’s how to change the password of the logged-in user.
A change in the Administrator password is updated immediately. A change in a User password will be discarded if
the user simply logs-out; it must be applied to the user
authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest
account does not have a password.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
PASSWORD CHANGE popup button
2 Move the cursor to the PASSWORD
CHANGE popup button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
the password.
19
User settings (Security)
6 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
191
User Level settings
3 Enter the current password, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the
[ENTER] key.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Assigning
a name” (→ p. 34).
When you enter the correct password, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the new password.
3 Move the cursor to the SAVE KEY popup
button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask whether you really want to overwrite (save) the user authentication key.
4 To overwrite (save), move the cursor to the
OK button and press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
• If you attempt to log-in as a different user after changing the
settings but not saving them, a message will ask you whether
you want to save the user authentication key. In this case, you
can also save the user authentication key by moving the cursor to the OK button and pressing the [ENTER] key.
Changing the user level
Here’s how to view/change the user level of the logged-in
user.
4 Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD
field; then move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your custom
fader layer, user-defined keys, and preference settings, and
overwrite (save) them onto your user authentication key. If
you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change
the user level.
1 Log-in as a user, and edit the custom fader
layer (→ p. 91), user-defined keys (→ p. 196)
and preference settings (→ p. 194).
• For the Administrator
...............There is no such setting for the
Administrator himself, but the setting for the Guest account can be
changed.
• For the Guest ..........The setting of the Guest account
can be viewed. It cannot be
changed.
• For a normal User...The setting of that User account
can be viewed. It cannot be
changed.
• For a Power User ....The setting of that User account
can be changed.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also
change the user level.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
SAVE KEY popup button
USER LEVEL popup button
2 Move the cursor to the USER LEVEL popup
button and press the [ENTER] key to
access the USER LEVEL popup window.
NOTE
• If you are logged in as Administrator, you can move the cursor
to the “for Guest” USER LEVEL popup button and press the
[ENTER] key to access the USER LEVEL popup window,
where you can view or change the guest’s user level.
192
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
User Level settings
1
8
2
● BUS SETUP
Restricts operations for bus setup.
● RACK 1–8
Restricts operations for the racks (1–8).
● MUTE GROUP ASSIGN / MASTER
Restricts operations for mute group assignment
and mute group master.
C SCENE LIST field
This specifies the operations that can be performed on
scene memories.
● STORE / SORT operations
4
5
7
6
This page includes the following items.
1 CH OPERATION field
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations
that will be permitted for input channels and output
channels. The settings will apply to the currently
selected channel. Use the panel [SEL] keys to select
the channel for which you want to make settings.
Channels that have the same settings are shown with
the same color in the channel display field. The
selected channel is shown with a frame around it.
● RECALL operations
D LIBRARY LIST field
This specifies the operations that can be performed on
libraries.
● STORE / CLEAR operations
● RECALL operations
E FILE LOAD field
This specifies the types of file that can be loaded from
USB memory.
● USER SETUP (user-defined keys and pref-
erence settings)
● HA
● SYSTEM SETUP / MONITOR SETUP
Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched
to that channel.
● CURRENT SCENE
● PROCESSING
● LIBRARY LIST
Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (except for fader and [ON]
key).
HINT
• For the channel parameters included in PROCESSING,
refer to the appendix (→ p. 256).
● FADER / ON
Restricts operation of that channel’s fader and
[ON] key.
● SET BY SEL
If this button is on, you can use the [SEL] keys of
the panel to turn all settings of the corresponding
channel on or off.
B CURRENT SCENE field
This specifies the operations that can be performed on
the current scene memory.
● INPUT PATCH / NAME
Restricts operations for input channel patching and
names.
● OUTPUT PATCH / NAME
● SCENE LIST
F MONITOR field
This specifies the monitor setup operations that can be
performed.
● OSCILLATOR
● TALKBACK
G SYSTEM SETUP field
This specifies the system setup operations that can be
performed.
● MIXER SETUP
● OUTPUT SETUP
● MIDI
H SET ALL/CLEAR ALL buttons
These buttons set or clear all items in the window.
3 Specify the user level by turning-on the button for each item that will be permitted.
4 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to close the popup
window.
Restricts operations for output channel patching
and names.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
19
User settings (Security)
3
193
Preferences
Preferences
Settings related to the operating environment (such as whether or not certain messages are displayed, or whether key operations are linked) can be made according to the preferences of each
user. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the
Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
PREFERENCE popup button
This page includes the following items.
1 CONFIRMATION field
Here you can select whether confirmation messages
will appear when you perform scene or patch operations.
● STORE
● RECALL
If these buttons are on, a confirmation message
will appear when you perform a scene Store or
Recall operation respectively.
● PATCH
If this button is on, a confirmation message will
appear when you edit an input patch or output
patch.
● STEAL PATCH
2 Move the cursor to the PREFERENCE
popup button, and press the [ENTER] key
to access the PREFERENCE popup window.
NOTE
• If you are logged in as Administrator, you can move the cursor
to the “for Guest” PREFERENCE popup button and press the
[ENTER] key to access the PREFERENCE popup window,
where you can view or change the guest’s preference settings.
2
1
3
If this button is on, a confirmation message will
appear when you edit an input patch or output
patch item that is already patched.
B ERROR MESSAGE field
Here you can select whether an error message will be
displayed when the following problems occur.
● DIGITAL I/O
When an error is detected in the digital input/output.
● MIDI I/O
When an error is detected in MIDI transmission/
reception.
C PANEL OPERATION field
Here you can make settings for options related to
panel operation.
● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT—INPUT
● AUTO CHANNEL SELECT—OUTPUT
These specify whether the corresponding channel
will be selected when you operate a channel’s
[ON] key or fader. This can be turned on/off separately for INPUT (input channels) and OUTPUT (output channels).
● [CUE] → [SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked
with cue operations. If this button is on, pressing
the [CUE] key of a channel will simultaneously
select that channel and light its [SEL] key.
● [LAYER] → [SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked
with fader layer selection. If this button is on, and
you press a panel LAYER key to switch the fader
layer, the last-selected channel of that fader layer
will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.
194
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Preferences
● POPUP APPEARS WHEN PRESSING
KNOBS
Specifies whether pressing a knob of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section when the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is shown
will cause the popup window for that parameter to
appear.
If this button is on, a popup window will appear
(or close) whenever you press a knob.
● LIST ORDER
This specifies the order in which scene memories
and library items will appear in the screen.
• NORMAL.............. Show the list in ascending
numerical order.
• REVERSE ............ Show the list in ascending
numerical order.
● STEREO / MONO LINK
This specifies whether STEREO channel and
MONO channel on/off and fader operations will
be linked.
If you turn this button on, the STEREO channel
on/off setting will be copied to the MONO channel, and subsequently on/off operations will be
linked. Faders will be linked while preserving the
difference in level.
● METER FOLLOW LAYER
Specifies whether the meter screen will be linked
with fader layer selection. If this button is on,
switching the fader layer will cause the meter
screen to switch to the corresponding fader layer,
regardless of which screen had been displayed.
3 Turn each button on or off to make the
desired preference settings.
4 When you’ve finished making settings,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to close the popup
window.
User settings (Security)
19
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
195
User-defined keys
User-defined keys
Here’s how you can assign the desired functions to the user defined keys in the USER DEFINED
section of the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function.
This assignment procedure will define the user-defined keys for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make user-defined key settings for
the Guest account.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
USER DEFINED KEYS popup button
2 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED
KEYS popup button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will
appear.
3 Move the cursor to the button for the userdefined key whose function you want to
assign, and press the [ENTER] key.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window
will appear. In this window you can select a function
to assign to the user defined key, and select option
parameters.
4 Make sure that the FUNCTION field is
enclosed by a yellow frame, and then use
the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys of the panel
to select the function you want to assign.
If the selected function has additional parameters, the
parameters are shown in the PARAMETER 1/2 fields.
For details on the assignable functions and their
parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to
user-defined keys” (→ p. 257).
5 If the selected function has parameters,
move the cursor to the PARAMETER 1 or 2
field and select parameters 1 and 2 in the
same way.
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key to close the USER
DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window.
The twelve buttons in the screen correspond to userdefined keys [1]–[12] on the panel, and the function or
parameter assigned to each one is shown at the right of
the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the
button, an indication of “----” is shown.
196
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
7 Assign the desired functions to other userdefined keys in the same way.
8 To execute an assigned function, press the
corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[12] key
on the panel.
Console lock
Console lock
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controls cannot be
operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a
break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console
Lock function. If you power-cycle the console while it is locked, you will be asked to enter the
password if you had been logged-in as a user for whom a password is assigned. If you had been
logged-in as the Guest, the console will start up normally.
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the LS9’s internal memory” (→ p. 222).
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or LS9 Editor will still operate as usual.
Locking the console
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen.
3 Enter the password of the logged-in user,
move the cursor to the OK button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all controls
will become inoperable.
HINT
• If an image file is loaded from USB memory, the CONSOLE
LOCK screen will show that image.
CONSOLE LOCK button
2 Move the cursor to the CONSOLE LOCK
button and press the [ENTER] key.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is
set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to
enter the password. For details on entering a password,
refer to “Assigning a name” (→ p. 34).
User settings (Security)
19
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
197
Console lock
Unlocking the console
1 When the CONSOLE LOCK screen is displayed, press the [ENTER] key.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is
set, the console will be unlocked. If you are logged-in
as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK
screen image
If an image file is saved in USB memory, the CONSOLE
LOCK screen can display that image.
In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image file
that you want to display and load it from USB memory.
For the procedure of loading from USB memory, refer to
“Loading a file from USB memory” (→ p. 200).
NOTE
• The image file is not backed-up in internal memory. Each time you
turn on the power, you will need to reload it from USB memory.
• The image file will be converted into 320 x 240 pixels, 216 colors
for display.
• The image file is limited to 8/16/24/32-bit color, un-compressed,
and a maximum of 307,256 bytes.
2 Enter the password of the logged-in user,
move the cursor to the OK button, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The console will be unlocked, you will return to the
MISC SETUP screen, and the controls will be operable once again.
HINT
• You may disconnect the USB memory device while the console is locked. Insert the USB memory device before you
defeat Console Lock.
198
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using USB memory to save/load data
Using USB memory to save/load data
This section explains how you can connect commercially-available USB memory to the USB connector located at the right side of the display, and use it to save or load data such as internal settings for the LS9.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only with USB flash memory.
• The operation of storage media with capacities of up to 16GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily
guarantee the operation of all USB storage media.) The FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. On the LS9
V1.10 or higher, storage media with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32 and storage media with a
capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16. Long file names are not supported.
CAUTION
• The ACCESS indicator will appear in the constant display area of the screen while data is being accessed,
such as during saving, loading, or deleting. Do not disconnect the USB memory or power-off the LS9 while this
indicator is shown. Doing so may damage the data in USB memory.
Saving the LS9’s internal data on
USB memory
Here’s how all of the LS9’s internal data (except for the
data included in a user authentication key) can be saved on
USB memory as a file. The saved file will have an extension of “.L9A”.
1
In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
3 If you want to move to a different directory,
move the cursor to the icon of the column
of the desired directory, and press the
[ENTER] key.
To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to
the arrow button in the PATH field and press the
[ENTER] key.
4 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a file name and comment.
SAVE/LOAD button
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.
and a comment of up to 32 characters; then
move the cursor to the SAVE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
When the file has finished being saved, the popup window showing the save progress indication and the type
of data will close.
19
User settings (Security)
5 Enter a file name of up to eight characters
SAVE button
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
199
Using USB memory to save/load data
Loading a file from USB memory
Here’s how to load an LS9 settings file (extension .L9A)
from USB memory into the LS9.
You can use the same procedure to load the following files
other than the settings files.
Extension
Type
.L9A
ALL
LS9 internal settings file
LS9 user authentication key
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.
If an image file is saved in USB memory, the CONSOLE LOCK screen can display that image (→
p. 198).
Contents of file
.L9U
KEY
.XML
XML
XML file for displaying help
.TXT
TXT
Text file for displaying help
.BMP
BMP
Image file for display in the CONSOLE
LOCK screen
CAUTION
• Press the [HOME] key to access the SELECTED CH VIEW
screen, and use the [SEL] keys to select the INPUT channel
from which you want to take a direct output. Before you load,
turn off the power of the equipment connected to the LS9
and/or lower the volume so that there will not be a problem
even if a signal is output from the LS9.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
SAVE/LOAD button
File list
LOAD button
3 Move the cursor to the file list, and use the
dial on the panel to select the file you want
to load.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file
that is selected for operations.
4 When you move the cursor to the LOAD
button and press the [ENTER] key, a dialog
box will ask you to confirm the operation.
5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key; loading will begin.
When the file has finished being loaded, the popup
window showing the progress indication and the type
of data will close.
Even if you cancel while the settings file is still being
loaded, the data up to that point will have been loaded.
The type of file that can be loaded will depend on the
User Level setting at the time you load the file.
200
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using USB memory to save/load data
Editing the files saved on USB memory
Here’s how you can perform editing operations such as
sorting the files and directories on USB memory, editing
the file names or comments, copying, or pasting.
● File editing
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
D MAKE DIR button
This button creates a new directory (→ p. 203).
E VOLUME NAME
This indicates the volume name of the USB memory.
If the USB memory is write-protected, a protect symbol is shown in the VOLUME NAME field.
F FREE SIZE
This indicates the amount of free space in the USB
memory.
G PATH
This shows the name of the current directory. You can
move the cursor to the arrow button and press the
[ENTER] key to move to the next upper level. If the
current directory is the top level, the arrow button is
dimmed.
NOTE
• You cannot save if the directory name would exceed 237
characters.
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the
saved files and sub-directories will be shown in a list.
8
5
1
2
3
4
6
7
H File list
This area lists the files that are saved on USB memory.
The highlighted line indicates the file selected for
operations.
The file list contains the following items. If you move
the cursor to the name of an item and press the
[ENTER] key, that item name will turn orange, and the
list will be sorted according to the character strings for
those items. Each time you press the [ENTER] key,
the sorting order will alternate between ascending and
descending order.
● FILE NAME
Indicates the file name or directory name, and
shows an icon indicating its type.
● READ ONLY
A lock symbol is shown to indicate protected files.
You can press this area to enable or disable the
protect setting.
● FILE TYPE
● COMMENT
9
J
K
L
M
1 COPY button
This button copies a file into buffer memory (a temporary holding area) (→ p. 203).
B PASTE button
This button pastes the file from buffer memory (→
p. 203).
C DELETE button
This button deletes the selected file (→ p. 203).
For LS9 files, the comment is displayed here.
When you move the cursor to this area and press
the [ENTER] key, a keyboard window will appear,
allowing you to enter a comment for the file.
● TIME STAMP
This shows the date and time at which the file was
last modified.
19
User settings (Security)
ALL indicates a file containing LS9 internal settings, KEY indicates a user authentication key,
XML indicates a help file, BMP indicates a bitmap
image file, MP3 indicates an MP3 file, and [DIR]
indicates a directory.
NOTE
• You can use the COMMENT/TIME STAMP button located at
the lower right of the file list to toggle the display between
COMMENT and TIME STAMP.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
201
Using USB memory to save/load data
I SAVE button
Saves all of the LS9’s internal settings together (→
p. 199).
4 If you want to edit the file name or com-
J LOAD button
Loads the selected LS9 settings file (→ p. 200).
ment, move the cursor to the FILE NAME
field or COMMENT field of each file and
press the [ENTER] key to access the keyboard window.
K CREATE USER KEY button
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a
name” (→ p. 34).
Creates a user authentication key (→ p. 192).
NOTE
L FORMAT button
Formats the USB memory media (→ p. 204).
M COMMENT/TIME STAMP button
Toggles the item shown at the far right of the file list
between COMMENT and TIME STAMP.
• If the COMMENT field is not displayed, use the COMMENT/
TIME STAMP button located at the lower right of the file list to
turn COMMENT on.
3 Perform the desired editing operation.
For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations
that follow.
● Sorting files and editing file names/
comments
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 To sort the files, move the cursor to the
“FILE NAME,” lock symbol, “FILE TYPE,”
“COMMENT,” or “TIME STAMP” field at the
top of the file list, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column title you selected.
1
2 3
45
5 Enter a file name / comment, move the cursor to the RENAME button or the SET button, and press the [ENTER] key.
6 To turn the Protect setting on/off, move the
1 FILE NAME
Sort the list in alphanumerical order of file name.
B Lock symbol
Sort the list according to Write Protect on/off status.
C FILE TYPE
Sort the list according to file type.
D COMMENT
Sort the list in alphanumeric order of the comment.
E TIME STAMP
Sort the list in order of date of creation.
HINT
• By pressing the [ENTER] key again, you can change the
direction (ascending or descending) in which the list is sorted.
202
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
cursor to the lock symbol for that file and
press the [ENTER] key.
A lock symbol is displayed for protected files; these
files cannot be overwritten.
NOTE
• You cannot edit the file name or comment of a protected file.
Using USB memory to save/load data
● Copying/pasting a file
● Deleting a file
Here’s how to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and
then paste it with a different file name.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 Move the cursor to the file list, use the
panel dial to select the file that you want to
copy, move the cursor to the COPY button,
and press the [ENTER] key.
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 Move the cursor to the file list, use the
panel dial to select the file that you want to
delete, move the cursor to the DELETE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file
that is selected for operations.
4 If you want to move to a different directory,
move the cursor to the icon of the column
of the desired directory, and press the
[ENTER] key.
To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to
the arrow button in the PATH field and press the
[ENTER] key.
5 Move the cursor to the PASTE button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
the paste-destination file name.
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a
name” (→ p. 34).
4 To execute the Delete operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
NOTE
• You can’t delete a protected file.
● Creating a directory
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3 If you want to move to a different directory,
6 Enter the paste-destination file name, move
the cursor to the PASTE button, and press
the [ENTER] key.
To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to
the arrow button in the PATH field and press the
[ENTER] key.
If you specified an existing file name, a confirmation
message will appear.
NOTE
• If you attempt to paste using the file name of an existing copyprotected file, the Paste operation will not be executed.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
19
User settings (Security)
move the cursor to the icon of the column
of the desired directory, and press the
[ENTER] key.
203
Using USB memory to save/load data
4 Move the cursor to the MAKE DIR button
and press the [ENTER] key.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
a directory name.
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a
name” (→ p. 34).
2 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button,
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
SAVE/LOAD popup window.
FORMAT button
3 Move the cursor to the FORMAT button and
5 Enter a name for the directory you want to
create, move the cursor to the MAKE button, and press the [ENTER] key.
If you specified an existing file name, a confirmation
message will appear.
press the [ENTER] key.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter
the volume name that will be applied after formatting.
For details on entering text, refer to “Assigning a
name” (→ p. 34).
Formatting USB memory media
Here’s how to format USB memory media using the
FAT16 file system. USB memory up to 2 Gbytes in capacity is supported.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
4 Enter the volume name, move the cursor to
the FORMAT button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation.
5 To execute the Format operation, move the
cursor to the OK button and press the
[ENTER] key.
Formatting will require several tens of seconds.
204
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Chapter 20
Other functions
This chapter explains other functionality of the LS9 not covered elsewhere.
About the SETUP screen
In the SETUP screen you can make various settings that apply to the entire LS9. The SETUP
screen includes the following three screens. Repeatedly press the DISPLAY ACCESS section
[SETUP] key to access the desired screen.
● USER SETUP screen
● SYSTEM SETUP screen
In this screen you can restrict the functionality that is
available to each user, and make settings that affect the
operating environment. Here you can also save or load
user settings to or from USB memory, and create user
authentication keys.
In this screen you can make settings related to buses and
output ports, and settings related to word clock and cascade connections.
2
1
3
LS9-32
HINT
1 BUS SETUP field
Here you can make basic settings for MIX/MATRIX
buses (→ p. 213).
B OUTPUT PORT field
In this field you can assign an output channel to each output port. For details, refer to chapter 9 “Selecting the output channel for each output port” (→ p. 97).
C MIXER SETUP field
Here you can make word clock settings (→ p. 206), slot
settings (→ p. 208), and cascade settings (→ p. 209).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
20
Other functions
• For details on functions and operation in the USER SETUP
screen, refer to chapter 19 (→ p. 187).
205
About the SETUP screen • Word clock settings
● MISC SETUP screen
C NETWORK field
Here you can make various network-related settings (→
p. 216).
In this screen you can make various other settings.
2
3
D CONSOLE LOCK field
This enables or disables Console Lock. For details, refer
to chapter 19 “Console lock” (→ p. 197).
E CPU/BATTERY field
The firmware version and the state of the internal memory
backup battery are shown here. This will indicate OK if
operation is normal, or LOW or NO if the voltage is low.
1
NOTE
• The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. If
this occurs, immediately save your data on a USB memory and
contact your Yamaha dealer.
4
5
6
LS9-32
1 MIDI field
Here you can make various MIDI-related settings. For
details, refer to chapter 18 (→ p. 177).
B DATE/TIME field
Here you can specify the date and time (→ p. 215).
F CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field
Here you can adjust the contrast and brightness of the display, the brightness of the top panel LEDs, and the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector (→
p. 217).
For details on the function and operations for each screen,
refer to the second half of this chapter or to the corresponding other chapter.
Word clock settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing.
If you connect external equipment such as a DAW system or HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) to a digital I/O card installed in a rear panel slot, this equipment must be synchronized to the same word
clock in order for digital audio signals to be sent and received. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data will not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise
may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the
entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock
slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master. If you wish to use the LS9 as a word
clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must
specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained).
The following steps show how to select the clock source that the LS9 will use.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
1 MIXER SETUP field
B WORD CLOCK button
2 Move the cursor to the WORD CLOCK button of the MIXER SETUP field in the lower
part of the screen, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The WORD CLOCK popup window will appear,
allowing you to make word clock settings.
This popup window contains the following items.
1
2
LS9-32
206
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Word clock settings
● LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized
with the selected clock source. If an external device is
connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the
LS9.
1
2
3
● SRC ON (green)
LS9-32
1 Clock frequency
This indicates the frequency of the currently selected
clock source. This field will indicate “UNLOCKED”
while synchronization is lost, such as immediately
after switching the master clock.
B Clock select buttons
These buttons select the master clock source. You can
choose from the internal clock, the word clock signal
supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN connector, or
the word clock data included in the input signal from
an I/O card in a slot.
C Card type {Card type / Slot number}
This area shows the type of I/O card installed in the
slot. {On the LS9-32, this area shows the slot number
and the type of I/O card.}
3 Use the clock select buttons to select a
clock source.
This is a special status that is unique to a digital I/O
card with SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) functionality installed in the slot {slots 1/2}; it indicates that
SRC is enabled for the corresponding channel. If this
status is displayed, normal input/output with the LS9
is occurring even if the signal is not synchronized.
● UNLOCK (red)
A valid clock is not being input. If an external device
is connected to the corresponding connector, input/
output cannot occur correctly between that device and
the LS9.
● UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected
because no external device is connected or because
there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select
this connector/slot, but successful synchronization
cannot occur until a valid connection is established.
If the symbol for the port selected in step 3 has turned
light blue, and the clock frequency is shown in the
upper left of the window, this indicates that the LS9 is
operating correctly with the new clock.
You can choose one of the following clock sources.
The LS9’s internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or
44.1 kHz, respectively) will be the clock source.
Choose one of these if you want to use the LS9 as the
word clock master.
● WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock signal supplied from the rear panel
WORD CLOCK IN jack will be used as the clock
source. In this case, the LS9 will operate as a word
clock slave.
● SLOT {SLOT 1/2}
The clock data included in the digital audio input signal from a digital I/O card in the slot {slots 1/2} will
be used as the clock source. (Select this in two-channel units.) In this case, the LS9 will operate as a word
clock slave.
The status (operating state) of the clock data being
received from each port is indicated by the color of the
symbol displayed immediately above. Each color has
the following significance.
HINT
• If you use a digital I/O card that contains a sampling rate converter (e.g., MY8-AE96S), input and output can occur normally with the LS9 even when unsynchronized. In this case,
turn on the SRC button for the slot/channel that is receiving
the signal (→ p. 208).
NOTE
• If the symbol for the selected clock does not turn light blue,
make sure that the external device is correctly connected,
and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. In order to protect your speaker system, be
sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the
word clock setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the
word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that
the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right) and press
the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
● LOCK (light blue)
This indicates that a clock synchronized with the
selected source is being input. If an external device is
connected to the corresponding connector or slot,
input/output is occurring normally between that device
and the LS9. If the sampling frequency is close, this
status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
20
Other functions
● INT 48 k
● INT 44.1 k
207
Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off
Switching a digital I/O card’s SRC on/off
If a digital I/O card with SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) functionality (such as the MY8-AE96S)
is installed in the slot {slot 1/2}, you can use the SLOT SETUP popup window to turn the card’s
SRC on/off. In this window you can also check the operating status of the I/O card(s) installed in
the slot(s).
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
C SRC buttons
For digital I/O cards that contain a built-in SRC (Sampling Rate Converter), the SCR can be switched on/off
in groups of two channels.
D EMPHASIS
This area indicates whether emphasis processing is
applied to the input signals of a slot in which an AES/
EBU format digital I/O card is installed, in units of
two channels.
This indication is displayed as follows.
1
LS9-32
Description
----
No signal, or a signal without emphasis is being
input
ON
A valid digital audio signal is being input, and
emphasis is turned On for that signal
OFF
A valid digital audio signal is being input, and
emphasis is turned Off for that signal
3 To turn on the SRC that is built-into the digital I/O card, move the cursor to the corresponding SRC button and press the
[ENTER] key.
1 SLOT SETUP button
2 Move the cursor to the SLOT SETUP button
of the MIXER SETUP field in the lower part
of the screen, and press the [ENTER] key.
The SLOT SETUP popup window will appear, allowing you to make slot-related settings. This popup window contains the following items.
1
2
3
4
The SRC can be turned on/off in units of two channels.
For channels whose SRC is turned on, input/output
can occur correctly even if the input signal is not synchronized with the LS9’s clock source.
4 To close the WORD CLOCK popup window,
move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or
the × symbol in the upper right) and press
the [ENTER] key.
You will return to the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
LS9-32
1 Card type {Card type / Slot number}
This area shows the type of I/O card installed in the
slot. {On the LS9-32, this area shows the slot number
and the type of I/O card in each slot.}
B FREQ (Frequency)
This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal
being input to each channel of an MY8-AE96 or
MY8-AE96S digital I/O card, in sets of two channels.
208
Item
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using cascade connections
Using cascade connections
By cascade-connecting two or more LS9 consoles or an LS9 with an external mixer (such as the
Yamaha M7CL) you can share the buses. For example this is convenient when you want to use
an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
If you are cascading two LS9 consoles, you can use the “Cascade Link” function to link cue operations, scene recall/store operations, and fader layer selections. In this case, you can operate the
two LS9 consoles as if they were a single mixer.
Here we will explain cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two LS9
consoles are cascade-connected.
To cascade two LS9 consoles, you will install digital I/O
cards in their respective slots, and connect the output ports
of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of
the receiving unit (the cascade master).
The following illustration shows an example in which one
sixteen-channel digital I/O card for each console are
installed in the cascade slave LS9 and in the cascade master LS9, and the DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit
connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.
HINT
• You can also cascade-connect the LS9 with digital mixers that
have a Mini-YGDAI slot, such as the Yamaha M7CL or PM5D.
However, this only allows you to cascade the audio signals; linking
via control signals is not possible.
• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections
with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay from each cascade-slave will increase
according to the number of units between it and the cascade-master.
Digital audio signal
Audio signals of
unit A
Digital I/O
card
Audio signals of
A+B
Digital I/O
card
LS9 A
(Cascade slave)
LS9 B
(Cascade master)
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
MIDI
IN
Control signals for cascade link
In this example, up to sixteen buses chosen from MIX
buses 1–16, MATRIX buses 1–8, STEREO bus (L/R),
MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and
the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master
LS9. {If you’re cascade-connecting two LS9-32 consoles,
you will be able to share all buses if you install two 16channel digital I/O cards in each LS9-32 console.}
Control signals for the Cascade Link function are transmitted and received via the MIDI IN/OUT connectors. In
this type of setup, performing a cue operation, scene
recall/store operation, or fader layer selection on either
console will cause the same to occur on the other console.
Other functions
20
When using a cascade connection, you must specify the
slot(s)/channels on each LS9 console that will send and
receive audio signals. Similarly, in order to use the Cascade Link function, you must specify the port that will
transmit and receive control signals, and specify the
parameters and events that will be linked. The following
pages explain the required settings for cascade connection
and the method of operation, separately for the cascade
slave and the cascade master.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
209
Using cascade connections
3 Move the cursor to the port select popup
Operations on the cascade slave
LS9
button for the bus whose port you want to
assign, and press the [ENTER] key.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
The OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear.
[ OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for
the LS9-32 ]
2
1
1
[ OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup window for
the LS9-16 ]
LS9-32
1 CASCADE OUT button
2 In the MIXER SETUP field located at the
lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen,
move the cursor to the CASCADE OUT button and press the [ENTER] key.
1
The CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window will
appear. This window contains the following items.
1
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Port select buttons
These buttons select the output port for the selected
bus.
B Slot select tabs (LS9-32 only)
These tabs select slots 1/2.
2
3
1 Port select popup buttons
These buttons access an OUTPUT PORT SELECT
popup window where you can select the output port
for each bus.
B CASCADE LINK PORT field
When using the Cascade Link function, this specifies
the port by which control signals will be transmitted
and received between the two LS9 consoles.
C CASCADE COMM LINK field
Here you can select the parameters and events that will
be linked by the Cascade Link function.
210
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
4 Use the port select buttons {slot select tabs
and port select buttons} to select an output
port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The port will be assigned to the bus you selected in
step 3.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign output ports
to other buses.
NOTE
• You can’t assign two or more buses to the same output port. If
you select a bus to which a signal route has already been
assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled.
Using cascade connections
6 If you want to use the Cascade Link func-
tion to link parameters and events between
two LS9 consoles, proceed as follows.
1 Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the port that will transmit/receive control
signals for cascade link.
You can choose from the following items.
LS9-16
Item
---MIDI
SLOT-1–
SLOT-8
Description
No port will be used.
Rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors
Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting
serial communication, installed in the rear panel
slot
● ALL
All linkable parameters and events (including cuerelated parameters) will be linked.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cue-related parameters and events (see above)
Scene recall operations
Scene store operations
DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations
Switching the fader layer
Panel LED and display brightness (MISC
SETUP screen) operations
• Master mute group operations
7 To close the OUTPUT PORT SELECT popup
window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and
press the [ENTER] key.
LS9-32
Item
---MIDI
Description
No port will be used.
Rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors
SLOT1-1–
SLOT1-8
Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting
serial communication, installed in rear panel slot
1
SLOT2-1–
SLOT2-8
Input/output channels 1–8 of a card supporting
serial communication, installed in rear panel slot
2
NOTE
• Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot
share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog
box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
B Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select the item you want to link.
You can choose from the following items.
● OFF
Linking will not occur.
● CUE
The following cue-related parameters and events
will be linked.
• Cue enable/disable
• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE)
• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels
Other functions
20
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
211
Using cascade connections
Operations on the cascade master
LS9
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
[ INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for
the LS9-32 ]
2
1
2 In the MIXER SETUP field located at the
lower part of the SYSTEM SETUP screen,
move the cursor to the CASCADE IN button
and press the [ENTER] key to access the
CASCADE IN PATCH popup window.
The CASCADE IN PATCH popup window contains
the following items.
1
[ INPUT PORT SELECT popup window for
the LS9-16 ]
1
2
3
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Port select popup buttons
These buttons access the INPUT PORT SELECT
popup window, where you can select the input port
whose signal will be added to the bus.
B CASCADE LINK PORT field
Here you can select the port that will transmit and
receive control signals when using the Cascade Link
function to link specific operations and parameter
changes between two LS9 consoles.
C CASCADE COMM LINK field
Here you can select the parameters and events that will
be linked by the Cascade Link function.
3 Move the cursor to the port select popup
button for the bus whose port you want to
assign, and press the [ENTER] key.
The INPUT PORT SELECT popup window will
appear.
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Port select buttons
Here you can select the input port whose signal will be
added to the selected bus.
B Slot select tabs (LS9-32 only)
These tabs select slots 1/2.
4 Use the port select buttons {slot select tabs
and port select buttons} to select an input
port, move the cursor to the CLOSE button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The input port will be assigned to the bus you selected
in step 3. The signal input from this port will be mixed
with the signal of the corresponding bus inside the cascade master.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to assign input ports
to other buses.
NOTE
• You can’t assign the same input port to two or more buses. If
you select a bus to which a signal route has already been
assigned, the previous assignment will be cancelled.
212
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using cascade connections • Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
6 If you want to link specific parameters or
events between two LS9 consoles, proceed
as follows.
1 Move the cursor to the CASCADE LINK PORT
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
specify the port that will transmit/receive control
signals for cascade link.
The items you can select are the same as in the
CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window (→
p. 211).
7 To close the INPUT PORT SELECT popup
window, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in the upper right) and
press the [ENTER] key.
In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will
be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master,
and the combined signals of both buses will be output
from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function
is enabled, the specified operations or parameter
changes performed on either LS9 console will be followed by the other LS9 console.
NOTE
• Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot
share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog
box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
B Move the cursor to the CASCADE COMM LINK
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
specify the item(s) you want to link, so that they
match the settings of the cascade slave. The items
you can select are the same as in the CASCADE
OUT PATCH popup window (→ p. 211).
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such
as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the position from which the signal is
sent from an input channel.
The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
2 To make MIX bus settings, move the cursor
to the MIX button of the BUS SETUP field
and press the [ENTER] key.
The MIX BUS SETUP popup window will appear.
1
2
3
1
2
3
LS9-32
1 BUS SETUP field
B MIX button
C MATRIX button
1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing method)
This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered MIX buses will be used as stereo
channels whose main parameters are linked (STEREO) or as two monaural channels (MONO × 2).
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Other functions
20
213
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
B BUS TYPE / PRE FADER SEND POINT
For two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered
buses, this selects the position from which the signal
will be sent from the input channel. You can also
switch the MIX bus type (VARI or FIXED) here.
C PAN LINK
This specifies whether the panning at which the signal
is sent from an input channel to the stereo bus will be
linked with the TO ST PAN setting.
3 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to
specify for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses whether
they will function as STEREO (main parameters linked for the two MIX channels) or
MONO × 2 (used as two monaural channels).
4 Use the buttons of the BUS TYPE / SEND
POINT field to select the position from
which the signal of the input channel will be
sent.
In this field you can switch the MIX bus type (VARI or
FIXED). The following items can be selected for each
bus.
● VARI PRE EQ
The MIX bus will be a VARI type (adjustable send
level). Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as
an external effect send or as a foldback output. If the
MIX send point of the input channel is set to PRE, the
signal will be sent from immediately before the EQ
(attenuator).
● If the PAN LINK button is on
The PAN knob that appears in the location of the TO
MIX SEND LEVEL knob of the input channel’s
SELECTED CH VIEW screen when the send-destination MIX bus is stereo will be linked with the TO ST
PAN (BAL) knob.
● If the PAN LINK button is off
The PAN (BALANCE) knob displayed in the position
of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob in the input channel SELECTED CH VIEW screen can be operated
independently of the TO ST PAN (BAL) knob.
NOTE
• The PAN LINK button is not displayed for MIX buses whose
SIGNAL TYPE is set to MONO × 2, or MIX buses whose BUS
TYPE is set to FIXED.
6 To close the popup window and return to
the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in
the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key.
7 To make basic settings for MATRIX buses,
move the cursor to the MATRIX button of
the BUS SETUP field and press the
[ENTER] key.
The MATRIX BUS SETUP popup window will
appear.
1
● VARI PRE FADER
The MIX bus will be a VARI type. Choose this if you
want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or
as a foldback output. If the MIX send point of the
input channel is set to PRE, the signal will be sent
from immediately before the fader.
NOTE
• Even if you select VARI PRE EQ or VARI PRE FADER, input
channels whose MIX send position is set to POST will send
the post-fader signal to the MIX bus.
● FIXED
The MIX bus will be a FIXED type (send level is fixed
at nominal level = 0.0 dB).
Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as a group
output or as a bus output for recording on a multitrack
recorder. If the bus is set to MONO, the signal will be
sent from immediately before the pan/balance of the
input channel; if the bus is set to STEREO, the signal
will be sent from immediately after the pan/balance.
5 As desired, turn the buttons of the PAN
LINK field on/off.
For two MIX buses whose SIGNAL TYPE = STEREO and BUS TYPE = VARI, the PAN LINK button
is displayed in this position.
This button specifies whether the panning at which the
signal is sent from an input channel to the stereo MIX
bus will be linked with the TO ST PAN setting.
214
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
1 SIGNAL TYPE (Signal processing method)
This selects whether two adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered MATRIX buses will be used as stereo
channels whose main parameters are linked (STEREO) or as two monaural channels (MONO × 2).
8 Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to
specify for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MATRIX buses
whether they will function as STEREO
(main parameters linked for the two MATRIX
channels) or MONO × 2 (used as two monaural channels).
9 To close the popup window and return to
the SYSTEM SETUP screen, move the cursor to the CLOSE button (or the × symbol in
the upper right) and press the [ENTER] key.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the clock built into the LS9, and how to view
the date and time. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key to access the MISC SETUP
screen.
3 Move the cursor to the DATE MODE button
and press the [ENTER] key to select the
date format.
You can select from the following formats.
1
2
• MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)
• DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)
• YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
4 Move the cursor to each field of the DATE
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to specify the date.
5 Move the cursor to the TIME MODE button
and press the [ENTER] key to select the
time format.
You can select from the following formats.
LS9-32
1 DATE/TIME field
This indicates the currently specified date and time.
B DATE/TIME SET popup button
This button accesses the DATE/TIME popup window,
where you can set the date and time.
2 Move the cursor to the DATE/TIME SET
popup button in the DATE/TIME field, and
press the [ENTER] key.
The DATE/TIME popup window will appear.
1
6 Move the cursor to each field of the TIME
field, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to specify the time.
7 When you have finished making settings,
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The date, time, and display format you specified will
be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you
select the CANCEL button or the × symbol instead of
the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the
popup window will close.
20
4
Other functions
2
3
• 24Hours (hours shown in a range of 0–23)
• 12Hours (hours shown from AM 0–AM 11 and
PM 0–PM 11)
1 DATE field
Specifies the date of the internal clock.
B DATE MODE button
Specifies the format in which the date will be displayed.
C TIME field
Specifies the time of the internal clock.
D TIME MODE button
Specifies the format in which the time will be displayed.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
215
Setting the network address
Setting the network address
Here’s how to set the network address that will be required when you use the LS9’s NETWORK
connector to connect it to a Windows computer.
NOTE
• The network address can be changed only by users who have administrative privileges.
• For details on network settings, refer to the LS9 Editor installation guide which can be downloaded from the following Yamaha website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the MISC
SETUP screen.
1
2
1 IP ADDRESS field
This is a number (IP address) assigned to identify each
device on the Internet or within an LAN (Local Area
Network).
B GATEWAY ADDRESS field
This specifies the number (gateway address) that identifies a device (gateway) that allows data of differing
media or protocol to be exchanged within a network to
allow communication.
C SUBNET MASK field
This defines the number of bits (of the IP address used
within the network) that will be used as the network
address that distinguishes the network.
3
LS9-32
1 NETWORK field
This shows the values of network-related parameters.
B NETWORK SET button
This accesses the NETWORK popup window, where
you can make network-related settings.
C MAC ADDRESS field
This is the MAC (Machine Access Control) address
specified for identifying a host within a network. This
field is only for display, and cannot be edited.
2 Move the cursor to the NETWORK SET button in the NETWORK field, and press the
[ENTER] key to access the NETWORK
popup window.
1
3
D LINK MODE field
Select either 100BASE-TX (transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed:
max 10 Mbps) as the specification used for communication via the NETWORK connector.
3 Move the cursor to the LINK MODE field,
and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to
select a communication protocol for the
NETWORK connector as appropriate for the
network to which the LS9 is connected.
NOTE
• Be aware that if the specification does not match, communication will not occur correctly.
4 Move the cursor to each remaining field in
the screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/
[INC] keys to specify each address.
If you are connecting the LS9 to your computer in a
one-to-one connection, we recommend that you make
the following initial settings.
● IP address
192.168.0.128 or similar (it must not conflict with the
IP address of any other device on the network)
● Gateway address
192.168.0.1 or similar (it must not conflict with the IP
address of any other device on the network)
2
216
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
4
● Subnet mask
255.255.255.0 or similar
Setting the network address • Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs, and lamps
5 When you have finished making settings,
move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key.
The changes will be finalized, and the popup window
will close.
If you select the CANCEL button or the × symbol
instead of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close.
Specifying the brightness or contrast of the display, LEDs,
and lamps
Here you can specify the contrast and brightness of the display, the brightness of the top panel
LEDs, and the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear panel LAMP connector.
1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key to access the MISC SETUP
screen.
2 Move the cursor to a knob of the CON-
TRAST/BRIGHTNESS field, and use the dial
or the [DEC]/[INC] keys to set the following
parameters.
● CONTRAST field
• SCREEN knob
........ Specifies the contrast of the display
backlight.
HINT
• You can also adjust the contrast by holding down the [HOME]
key and turning the dial.
● BRIGHTNESS field
1 CONTRAST field
B BRIGHTNESS field
2
LS9-32
• PANEL knob
........ Adjusts the brightness of the top panel
LEDs. If a Yamaha AD8HR is connected
to an I/O card that provides a REMOTE
connector, the brightness of the
AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.
• LAMP knob (LS9-32 only)
........ Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the rear panel LAMP jack.
20
Other functions
1
• SCREEN knob
........ Specifies the brightness of the display
backlight.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
217
Using the Help function
Using the Help function
You can view Help files provided by Yamaha, or display any desired text file created by the user.
* We accept no responsibility for any damages that may result from the use of Help files created by a third
party other than Yamaha.
Loading a Help file from a USB memory
3 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.
The help file is not backed up in internal memory. Each
time you turn on the power, you must reload it from your
USB memory. It is convenient to save your help file on the
USB memory that contains your user authentication key.
1 Before you proceed, save the Help file
(extension .xml) provided by Yamaha on
your USB memory. You can download the
most recent version of the Help file from the
Yamaha website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
SAVE/LOAD button
4 Move the cursor to the file list, and use the
dial on the panel to select the help file you
want to load.
5 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and
press the [ENTER] key, and a confirmation
dialog box will appear.
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key to begin loading the file.
218
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Using the Help function
Loading a text file from a USB memory
1 Using a commercially available text editor
or the “Notepad” included with the
Microsoft Windows series, create a text file
(extension .txt) and save it on your USB
memory.
By default, the character code set of the text file will
be detected as UTF-8. However by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning
of the file, you can force recognition of the file using
that character code set. You can specify the desired
character code set when using your text editor to save
the text file. The Help function is able to display the
following text files (character code sets / languages).
Assigning the Help function to a
user-defined key
1 Before you proceed, load the Help file from
your USB memory.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code
set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set
(Japanese)
• Text files of the above languages written in the
UTF-8 character code set.
2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the
[SETUP] key repeatedly to access the USER
SETUP screen.
3 Move the cursor to the SAVE/LOAD button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear.
USER DEFINED KEYS popup button
3 Move the cursor to the USER DEFINED
KEYS popup button, and press the [ENTER]
key.
The USER DEFINED KEYS popup window will
appear.
4 Move the cursor to the file list, and use the
dial on the panel to select the text file you
want to load.
5 Move the cursor to the LOAD button and
press the [ENTER] key, and a confirmation
dialog box will appear.
6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press
the [ENTER] key to begin loading the file.
4 Move the cursor to the button for the user-
20
Other functions
defined key whose function you want to
assign, and press the [ENTER] key.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
219
Using the Help function
5 Use the panel dial or the [DEC]/[INC] keys
to select “HELP.” Move the cursor to the OK
button and press the [ENTER] key to close
the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window.
6 Move the cursor to the CLOSE button and
press the [ENTER] key to close the USER
DEFINED KEY popup window.
Viewing Help
1 Before you proceed, load the help file or
text file from your USB memory.
2 Press the user-defined key to which the
Help function is assigned; the HELP popup
window will appear.
3 Move the cursor to the desired section, and
use the panel dial to scroll the contents.
Links in the selected text will be highlighted.
4 Select a link (underlined portion) in the document, and press the [ENTER] key to jump
to the link destination. By selecting a text
link in INDEX mode and pressing the
“ENTER” key, you can switch to CONTENTS mode and scroll to the corresponding section.
Move the cursor a window link and press the
[ENTER] key (a location with an
symbol and
underlined text), you can close the HELP window and
open the corresponding window.
5 To return from CONTENTS mode to INDEX
mode, move the cursor to the INDEX button
and press the [ENTER] key.
6 As necessary, you can also scroll by using
the buttons in the tool bar.
● < INDEX button
Jumps to the table of contents.
If the cursor is at the table of contents, you can use the
panel
cursor key as an alternative.
● CONTENTS > button
Jumps to the content (article).
If the cursor is at the table of contents, you can use the
panel
cursor key as an alternative.
●
INDEX mode
button
Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed location.
●
button
Returns to the previous link in the link history.
If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an
article, you can use the panel [DEC] key as an alternative.
●
button
Proceeds to the next link in the link history.
If the cursor is at the table of contents or within an
article, you can use the panel [INC] key as an alternative.
7 To close the window, once again press the
CONTENTS mode
220
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
user-defined key to which the Help function
is assigned.
Using the Help function
■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific
panel controller • • • • • • • • • • •
■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific
controller in the LCD screen • • • • •
1 While holding down the user-defined key to
1 While holding down the user-defined key to
Panel controllers (other than the faders) will not function as long as you continue holding down the userdefined key to which the Help function is assigned.
2 If the corresponding controller has an
explanation associated with it, the HELP
popup window will appear, and you will
automatically scroll to the corresponding
item.
If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat step 1 to successively display these
explanations.
3 To close the window, once again press the
user-defined key to which the Help function
is assigned.
which you’ve assigned the Help function,
move the cursor to the on-screen controller
whose function you want to read and press
the [ENTER] key.
The on-screen buttons and tabs will not function as
long as you continue holding down the user-defined
key to which the Help function is assigned.
2 If there is a corresponding Help item, the
HELP popup window will appear and you
will automatically scroll to the corresponding item.
If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, close the HELP popup window and then repeat
step 1 to successively view these explanations.
3 To close the window, once again press the
user-defined key to which the Help function
is assigned.
20
Other functions
which you’ve assigned the Help function,
press (or turn) the panel controller whose
function you want to learn about.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
221
Initializing the LS9’s internal memory
Initializing the LS9’s internal memory
If an error occurs in the LS9’s internal memory, or if you have forgotten the password, you can
use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
CAUTION
• The entire contents of memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory. Proceed with the following
operation only if you are very sure you want to do this.
1 While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY]
key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn
on the power.
4 Move the cursor to the OK button of the
dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.
Initialization will begin.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
NOTE
• Do not press any key until initialization has been completed.
1
5 When initialization has been completed,
2
move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
3
The console will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
• If the backup battery voltage is low, or if an error occurs in the
internal memory, a warning dialog box will appear, and then
the initialization menu will appear. If the warning dialog box
appears, and you select the EXIT button to start up in normal
operating mode, Yamaha cannot guarantee that the unit will
operate correctly.
HINT
• Instead of using the EXIT button, you can also select a different button of the MODE SELECT field.
1 MODE SELECT field
B INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button
C INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button
2 According to the desired type of initializa-
tion, move the cursor to one of the buttons
in the MODE SELECT field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
● INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES button
The entire memory including scene memories and
libraries will be returned to their factory-set condition.
● INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES button
The contents of memory except for scene memories
and libraries will be returned to its factory-set condition.
3 To execute the Initialize operation, move the
cursor to the INITIALIZE button located in
the dialog box at the left side of the screen,
and press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation.
222
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the console, discrepancies may occur in the
motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.
1 While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY]
key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn
on the power.
4 Move the cursor to the START button and
press the [ENTER] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the operation.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
5 Move the cursor to the OK button of the
dialog box and press the [ENTER] key.
Each of the specified faders will move to the target
positions in the following sequence.
1
B
C
D
-∞ (push down to the minimum value)
-20 dB
0 dB
+10 dB (push up to the maximum value)
6 If there are any faders that are not in the
1
positions shown in the screen, manually
move them to the appropriate position.
7 When you have set all faders to the target
1 FADER CALIBRATION button
2 Move the cursor to the FADER CALIBRATION button and press the [ENTER] key.
The FADER CALIBRATION MODE popup window
will appear, where you can adjust the faders.
location, move the cursor to the OK button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The process will proceed to the next fader position.
8 Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for
positions 1 through 4.
9 When you have finished the calibration process and the APPLY button has appeared,
move the cursor to the APPLY button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory.
NOTE
• If the RESTART button appears when calibration ends, calibration has failed. Move the cursor to the RESTART button
and press the [ENTER] key to execute calibration once again.
10 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and
press the [ENTER] key.
The console will start up in normal operating mode.
HINT
HINT
• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu
instead of using the EXIT button.
3 Use the top panel [SEL] keys to select the
fader for which you want to perform calibration.
Fader calibration is performed semi-automatically for
the faders you specify using their [SEL] keys. Each
fader selected by its [SEL] key is shown in red in the
popup window.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
20
Other functions
• This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the
fader settings while the LS9 is started up.
223
Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)
Adjusting the input/output gain (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input/output gain.
1 While holding down the [SCENE MEMORY]
key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, turn
on the power.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu
screen will appear.
● OUTPUT PORT TRIM (fine adjustment of the
output ports) button
This makes fine adjustments in 0.01 dB steps to the
gain of the specified output port. When you press this
button, the screen will change as follows.
1
2
3
LS9-32
● SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (fine adjustment of the
1 INPUT PORT TRIM button
B OUTPUT PORT TRIM button
C SLOT OUTPUT TRIM button
output ports) button
2 In the MODE SELECT field, move the cursor
This makes fine adjustments in 0.01 dB steps to the
output port gain of the specified slot. When you press
this button, the screen will change as follows.
to one of the following buttons to select the
target you want to adjust, and press the
[ENTER] key.
● INPUT PORT TRIM (fine adjustment of the ana-
log input gain) button
This makes fine adjustments in 0.1 dB steps to the gain
of the specified analog input port. When you press this
button, the screen will change as follows.
LS9-32
3 Move the cursor to the desired knob in the
screen, and use the dial or the [DEC]/[INC]
keys to adjust the value.
LS9-32
If you move the cursor to the RESET ALL button in
the screen, and press the [ENTER] key, all knobs in
that screen will be reset to 0 dB (the factory-set default
value).
4 When you have finished making adjust-
ments, move the cursor to the EXIT button
and press the [ENTER] key.
The console will start up in normal operating mode.
HINT
• Alternatively, you can continue by selecting a different menu
instead of using the EXIT button.
224
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
EQ Library List
Parameter
Title
01 Bass Drum 1
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–3.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
100 Hz
265 Hz
1.06 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
02 Bass Drum 2
1.25
10.0
0.90
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
LPF
G
+8.0 dB
–7.0 dB
+6.0 dB
ON
F
80.0 Hz
400 Hz
2.50 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
03 Snare Drum 1
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+4.5 dB
132 Hz
1.00 kHz
3.15 kHz
5.00 kHz
1.25
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+1.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
335 Hz
2.36 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
10.0
0.70
0.10
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+2.0 dB
–7.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+1.0 dB
F
212 Hz
670 Hz
4.50 kHz
6.30 kHz
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
425 Hz
1.06 kHz
13.2 kHz
—
8.0
0.90
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+1.0 dB
+0.5 dB
F
95.0 Hz
425 Hz
2.80 kHz
7.50 kHz
1.0
—
PEAKING
H.SHELF
–4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
100 Hz
400 Hz
2.80 kHz
17.0 kHz
—
4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
35.5 Hz
112 Hz
2.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
5.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.5 dB
+0.5 dB
F
112 Hz
112 Hz
2.24 kHz
4.00 kHz
0.10
5.0
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
+8.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
85.0 Hz
950 Hz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
0.10
8.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
180 Hz
1.12 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
13 Piano 1
0.50
PEAKING
F
Q
12 Syn. Bass 2
—
L.SHELF
G
Q
11 Syn. Bass 1
0.28
H.SHELF
106 Hz
Q
10 E. Bass 2
1.25
PEAKING
–2.0 dB
Q
09 E. Bass 1
10.0
PEAKING
F
Q
08 Percussion
1.4
L.SHELF
G
Q
07 High Hat
—
H.SHELF
–0.5 dB
Q
06 Cymbal
2.2
PEAKING
F
Q
05 Tom-tom 1
4.5
PEAKING
G
Q
04 Snare Drum 2
1.4
PEAKING
1.6
8.0
2.2
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–6.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
95.0 Hz
950 Hz
3.15 kHz
7.50 kHz
Q
—
8.0
0.90
—
#
Parameter
Title
14 Piano 2
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
224 Hz
600 Hz
3.15 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
15 E. G. Clean
5.6
10.0
0.70
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
265 Hz
400 Hz
1.32 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
16 E. G. Crunch 1
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
+2.0 dB
140 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.60 kHz
8.0
4.5
0.63
9.0
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
450 Hz
3.35 kHz
19.0 kHz
0.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
950 Hz
3.35 kHz
12.5 kHz
10.0
—
PEAKING
H.SHELF
+6.0 dB
–8.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+4.0 dB
315 Hz
1.06 kHz
4.25 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
10.0
4.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
106 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.30 kHz
0.90
4.5
3.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–3.5 dB
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
300 Hz
750 Hz
2.00 kHz
3.55 kHz
—
9.0
4.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
224 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
4.5
4.5
0.125
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
0.0 dB
–5.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
355 Hz
4.00 kHz
4.25 kHz
—
7.0
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
2.8
2.0
0.70
7.0
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
F
190 Hz
1.00 kHz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
26 Male Vocal 2
9.0
PEAKING
F
Q
25 Male Vocal 1
—
L.SHELF
G
Q
24 Brass Sec.
—
H.SHELF
355 Hz
Q
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
0.16
PEAKING
+5.0 dB
Q
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
0.40
PEAKING
F
Q
21 A. G. Stroke 2
8.0
L.SHELF
G
Q
20 A. G. Stroke 1
—
PEAKING
+4.5 dB
Q
19 E. G. Dist. 2
6.3
PEAKING
F
Q
18 E. G. Dist. 1
10.0
PEAKING
G
Q
17 E. G. Crunch 2
0.18
PEAKING
0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
170 Hz
236 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
0.11
10.0
5.6
—
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
#
225
EQ Library List
#
Parameter
Title
27 Female Vo. 1
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–1.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
F
118 Hz
400 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.00 kHz
Q
28 Female Vo. 2
0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
112 Hz
335 Hz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
29
Chorus &
Harmo
—
0.16
0.20
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
30 Total EQ 1
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+6.5 dB
950 Hz
2.12 kHz
16.0 kHz
7.0
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+6.0 dB
F
95.0 Hz
750 Hz
1.80 kHz
18.0 kHz
7.0
2.8
5.6
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+1.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
67.0 Hz
850 Hz
1.90 kHz
15.0 kHz
—
0.28
0.70
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+3.5 dB
–10.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
118 Hz
315 Hz
4.25 kHz
20.0 kHz
Q
34 Snare Drum 3
2.0
10.0
0.40
0.40
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
224 Hz
560 Hz
4.25 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
35 Tom-tom 2
—
4.5
2.8
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–9.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
90.0 Hz
212 Hz
5.30 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
36 Piano 3
—
4.5
1.25
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.5 dB
–13.0 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
100 Hz
475 Hz
2.36 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
37 Piano Low
8.0
10.0
9.0
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+6.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
38 Piano High
10.0
6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+5.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
5.60 kHz
Q
39 Fine-EQ Cass
226
10.0
6.3
2.2
0.10
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–1.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
75.0 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
40 Narrator
7.0
H.SHELF
95.0 Hz
Q
33 Bass Drum 3
0.70
PEAKING
F
Q
32 Total EQ 3
2.0
PEAKING
G
Q
31 Total EQ 2
2.8
PEAKING
—
4.5
1.8
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
106 Hz
710 Hz
2.50 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
4.0
7.0
0.63
—
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
DYNAMICS Library List
DYNAMICS Library List
1
2
3
4
5
6
Title
Gate
Ducking
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
De-Esser
Comp
Type
GATE
DUCKING
GATE
GATE
DE-ESSER
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
8
Expand
Compander (H)
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
10
11
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
Type
Parameter
Value
–17
Range (dB)
–56
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
0
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
2.56
12
A. Dr. SN
COMPRESSOR
Out gain (dB)
8
3.5
Decay (ms)
331
Knee
2
Threshold (dB)
–19
Release (ms)
12
Range (dB)
–22
Threshold (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
93
Ratio ( :1)
2
Hold (ms)
1.20 S
Attack (ms)
0
Decay (ms)
6.32 S
13
A. Dr. SN
EXPANDER
Out gain (dB)
Threshold (dB)
–11
Knee
Range (dB)
–53
Release (ms)
Attack (ms)
0
Hold (ms)
1.93
Decay (ms)
400
Threshold (dB)
–8
Range (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
1
14
A. Dr. SN
COMPANDER-S
0.5
2
151
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
11
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
10
Release (ms)
128
–20
Hold (ms)
0.63
Threshold (dB)
Decay (ms)
238
Ratio ( :1)
2
–8
Attack (ms)
2
Threshold (dB)
Frequency (kHz)
2.00
15
A. Dr. Tom
EXPANDER
Out gain (dB)
5.0
Threshold (dB)
–8
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Release (ms)
749
Attack (ms)
30
Threshold (dB)
–24
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
2
2
Attack (ms)
38
16
A. Dr. OverTop
COMPANDER-S
Out gain (dB)
2
–3.5
Release (ms)
250
Threshold (dB)
–23
Width (dB)
54
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Release (ms)
842
Threshold (dB)
–12
Attack (ms)
1
3.5
Ratio ( :1)
2
Knee
2
Attack (ms)
15
Release (ms)
70
Out gain (dB)
4.5
Threshold (dB)
–10
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Release (ms)
470
Out gain (dB)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Release (ms)
Compander (S)
Title
Threshold (dB)
Width (dB)
9
#
–26
Knee
7
Value
Threshold (dB)
17
E. B. Finger
COMPRESSOR
2
Threshold (dB)
–12
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
6
Attack (ms)
1
250
18
E. B. Slap
COMPRESSOR
6
Out gain (dB)
4.0
Threshold (dB)
–8
Knee
hard
Ratio ( :1)
4
Release (ms)
133
Attack (ms)
25
Threshold (dB)
–10
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Width (dB)
24
Attack (ms)
Release (ms)
180
Threshold (dB)
–24
19
Syn. Bass
COMPRESSOR
9
Out gain (dB)
3.0
Knee
hard
Ratio ( :1)
3
Release (ms)
250
Attack (ms)
9
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Out gain (dB)
5.5
Attack (ms)
17
Out gain (dB)
1.0
–11
Knee
hard
3.5
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB)
–18
–1.5
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
7
Attack (ms)
Knee
2
Release (ms)
58
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
1
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
192
20
21
Piano1
Piano2
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Appendices
#
7
6.0
2
174
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
227
DYNAMICS Library List
#
22
Title
E. Guitar
Type
COMPRESSOR
Parameter
A. Guitar
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Strings2
COMPRESSOR
20
Attack (ms)
7
Attack (ms)
15
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Out gain (dB)
COMPRESSOR
BrassSection
COMPRESSOR
Syn. Pad
COMPRESSOR
30
31
SamplingPerc
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
4
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Width (dB)
15
Threshold (dB)
–10
Threshold (dB)
–20
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
5
Attack (ms)
31
Out gain (dB)
2.0
Out gain (dB)
1.5
33
Solo Vocal1
COMPRESSOR
Knee
2
1
Release (ms)
238
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–11
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
2
Attack (ms)
33
Out gain (dB)
1.5
34
Solo Vocal2
COMPRESSOR
Attack (ms)
26
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
2
342
3
Release (ms)
749
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–12
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
93
Out gain (dB)
1.5
35
Chorus
COMPRESSOR
39
Out gain (dB)
2.5
226
–33
–17
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
76
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Click Erase
EXPANDER
Out gain (dB)
Knee
2
2
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
36
331
Attack (ms)
Knee
4
1.35 S
2
1
2.0
2
Release (ms)
186
Release (ms)
284
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
–14
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
18
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
4.0
37
Announcer
COMPANDER-H
Out gain (dB)
1
–2.5
Width (dB)
18
Release (ms)
226
Release (ms)
180
Threshold (dB)
–13
Threshold (dB)
1
–9
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
3
Attack (ms)
58
Attack (ms)
20
Out gain (dB)
2.0
38
Limiter1
COMPANDER-S
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
1
–3.0
90
Release (ms)
238
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
0
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Ratio ( :1)
∞
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
8
–2.5
39
Limiter2
COMPRESSOR
Attack (ms)
3.91 s
0
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
18
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
238
Release (ms)
319
Threshold (dB)
–14
Threshold (dB)
–18
3.5
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
2
Attack (ms)
94
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Out gain (dB)
3.5
40
Total Comp1
COMPRESSOR
Knee
4
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
35
Release (ms)
447
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
–16
Ratio ( :1)
4
Ratio ( :1)
6
Attack (ms)
8
Attack (ms)
11
Out gain (dB)
6.0
41
Total Comp2
COMPRESSOR
Out gain (dB)
8.0
Knee
hard
Knee
Release (ms)
354
Release (ms)
* At fs=44.1 kHz
228
COMPANDER-S
163
Knee
29
Hip Comp
Release (ms)
Knee
28
32
261
Knee
27
2.5
–23
Release (ms)
Release (ms)
Strings3
Value
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
26
Parameter
3.5
Knee
25
Type
Ratio ( :1)
Ratio ( :1)
Strings1
Title
Threshold (dB)
Knee
24
#
–8
Knee
23
Value
Threshold (dB)
1
180
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters
Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide
DYNAMICS section 1. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types: GATE,
DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander
Soft), and DE-ESSER. An output channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types:
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S (Compander
Soft).
■ GATE
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
RANGE (dB)
–∞, –69 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold
level.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen
below the threshold.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value
is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• Time Series Analysis
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
HOLD
ATTACK
DECAY
Output Level
Input Signal
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
■ DUCKING
Time
Time
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an
announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a
specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen
below the THRESHOLD level.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required
for the level to change by 6 dB.
• Time Series Analysis
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
HOLD
ATTACK
DECAY
Appendices
Output Level
Input Signal
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
Time
Time
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
229
Dynamics Parameters
■ COMPRESSOR• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also
be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level
never actually exceeds the threshold.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal
level relative to change in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has
been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold,
creating a more natural sound.
• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Input signal
Output Level
KNEE
Output Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level
Time
Time
■ EXPANDER • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger
signal level exceeds the threshold.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below
the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change
by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings,
expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)
THRESHOLD
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
Input Signal
Output Level
KNEE
Output Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
230
Input Level
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Time
Time
Dynamics Parameters
■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Output Level
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
WIDTH
0dB
Input Level
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0 dB and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width . . . . Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is
essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain
once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The
value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
–18.0 to 0.0 (181 points)
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
1–90 (90 points)
This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The
expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.
WIDTH (dB)
■ DE-ESSER • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.
Parameter
Range
Description
–54 to 0 (55 points)
Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies.
FREQUENCY
1kHz – 12.5kHz (45 points)
Cutoff frequency of the HPF used to detect the high frequencies.
Appendices
THRESHOLD
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
231
Effect Type List
Effect Type List
Title
Description
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Room reverberation simulation
with gate
Title
Type
Description
Rev→Chorus
REV→CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series
Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel
Rev→Flange
REV→FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed for vocals, with
gate
Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Rev→Pan
REV→PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in series
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Delay+Er.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
Gated early reflections
Delay→Er.
DELAY→ER.
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
Gated reverse early reflections
Delay and early reflections in
series
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Simple mono delay
Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel
Delay→Rev
DELAY→REV
Delay and reverb in series
Dist→Delay
DIST→DELAY
Distortion and delay in series
Multi Filter
MULTI FILTER
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/
octave)
Freeze
FREEZE
Simple sampler
Stereo Reverb
ST REVERB
Stereo reverb
M.BAND DYNA.
Multi-band dynamics processor
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
Simple stereo delay
Mod.Delay
MOD.DELAY
Simple repeat delay with modulation
Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed left/
right feedback
Chorus
CHORUS
Chorus
M.Band Dyna.
FLANGE
Flanger
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that
produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal
chorus
Phaser
PHASER
16-stage stereo phase shifter
Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
Auto-panner
Tremolo
TREMOLO
Tremolo
HQ. Pitch
HQ.PITCH
Mono pitch shifter, producing
stable results
Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shifter
Rotary
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulation
Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
Ring modulator
Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
Modulated filter
Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion
Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar amp simulation
Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter
Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase
shifter
Rev+Chorus
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in parallel
Flange
232
Type
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
REV-X Hall
REV-X HALL
REV-X Room
REV-X ROOM
REV-X Plate
REV-X PLATE
New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation,
smooth decay, and provides a
spaciousness and depth that
enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs;
REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and
REV-X PLATE.
Effects Parameters
Effects Parameters
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb
simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
REV TIME
Range
0.3–99.0 s
Description
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb
begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time
ratio
■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early
reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
Type-A, Type-B
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right
reflection spread)
Reflection density
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time
ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right
reverb spread)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
0.0–100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections and reverb
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections
and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all
early reflections)
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Gate opening speed
HOLD
*1
Gate open time
DECAY
*2
Gate closing speed
LO. RATIO
E/R DLY
*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 =
live)
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb
begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–
right reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
INI. DLY
■ MONO DELAY
*1.
(Max. value depends on tempo setting)
■ STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values
for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback
ratio
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
Appendices
■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE,
REVERB PLATE
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
233
Effects Parameters
■ MOD. DELAY
■ ECHO
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback
loop.
Parameter
DELAY
Range
Description
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
Parameter
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
L→R FBG
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback
gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
R→L FBG
–99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback
gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
■ DELAY LCR
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine/Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
*1.
Range
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*2.
Parameter
Range
Description
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY R
NOTE FBL
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. D L
NOTE FBR
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. D R
DELAY L
0.0–2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0–2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
*1.
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ CHORUS
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
FREQ.
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY L
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY C
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY R
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
NOTE C
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter
*1.
234
Description
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
Effects Parameters
■ FLANGE
■ PHASER
Two input, two output flange effect.
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
FB. GAIN
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0–100
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
Lowest phase-shifted frequency
offset
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
PHASE
0.00–354.38
degrees
Left and right modulation phase
balance
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
STAGE
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1.
*1.
■ SYMPHONIC
■ AUTOPAN
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
Modulation speed
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
DIR.
*1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
Appendices
*1.
Modulation speed
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
235
Effects Parameters
■ TREMOLO
■ DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
PITCH 1
–24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
Channel #1 level (plus values
for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)
PAN 1
L63 to R63
Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
FB. G 1
–99 to +99%
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
MODE
1–10
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values
for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)
PAN 2
L63 to R63
Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE 1
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine Channel
#1 delay
NOTE 2
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine Channel
#2 delay
*1.
■ HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1–10
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine DELAY
NOTE
Pitch shift precision
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
ROTATE
STOP, START
Rotation stop, start
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation speed (see SLOW and
FAST parameters)
SLOW
0.05–10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
0–100
Overdrive level
ACCEL
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
LOW
0–100
Low-frequency filter
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
■ RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
OSC, SELF
OSC FREQ
0.0–5000.0 Hz
Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation
speed
FM DEPTH
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation
depth
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FM FREQ
*1.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or
input signal
SOURCE
FM NOTE
236
Range
Effects Parameters
■ MOD. FILTER
■ DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left-channel modulation and
right-channel modulation
phase difference
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
OFFSET
RESO.
Parameter
Range
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency
change
Filter type: low pass, high pass,
band pass
DECAY
*1
Filter frequency change decay
speed
0–100
Filter frequency offset
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type
0–20
Filter resonance
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LEVEL
0–100
Output Level
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
*1.
■ DYNA. FLANGE
■ DISTORTION
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion,
OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
DST TYPE
Parameter
Range
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency
change
DECAY
*1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Delay time offset
DIR.
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
■ AMP SIMULATE
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
Parameter
AMP TYPE
Range
*1
Description
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion,
OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
BASS
0–100
Bass tone control
MIDDLE
0–100
Middle tone control
TREBLE
0–100
High tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
CAB DEP
0–100%
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Appendices
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMBDX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
237
Effects Parameters
■ DYNA. PHASER
■ REV→CHORUS
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency
change
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DECAY
*1
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency
offset
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
Decay speed
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
■ REV+CHORUS
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
*1.
Reverb time
■ REV+FLANGE
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Parameter
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV/CHO
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance (0% =
all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
HPF
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
Parameter
Range
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
Description
Range
Description
Reverb time
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/FLG
0–100%
Reverb and flange balance (0% =
all reverb, 100% = all flange)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1.
*1.
238
Description
Reverb time
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
■ REV→FLANGE
■ REV→SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in
series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
Parameter
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb,
100% = all reverb)
REV.BAL
0–100%
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb,
100% = all reverb)
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
HPF
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
MOD. DLY
FB. GAIN
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1.
Description
Reverb time
*1.
■ REV→PAN
■ REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in
parallel.
Parameter
Range
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
REV.BAL
0–100%
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,
100% = all reverb)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
Panning direction
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
NOTE
*1.
DIR.
*1
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
Appendices
REV/SYM
Reverb time
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan
effect.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
239
Effects Parameters
■ DELAY+ER.
■ DELAY→ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in
parallel.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in
series.
Parameter
Range
Description
Range
Description
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/ER
0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all
early reflections)
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay
balance (0% = all early reflected
delay, 100% = all delay)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
*1.
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
240
Parameter
DELAY L
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Effects Parameters
■ DELAY+REV
■ DELAY→REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback
ratio
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback
ratio
DLY/REV
0–100%
Delay and reverb balance (0% =
all delay, 100% = all reverb)
DLY.BAL
0–100%
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% =
all delay)
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY L
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
■ DIST→DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion,
OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
MOD.NOT
E
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance (0%
= all distortion, 100% = all
delayed distortion)
*1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
*2.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
Parameter
DELAY L
241
Effects Parameters
■ MULTI FILTER
■ STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter
Range
Description
Range
Description
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage,
Plate
Reverb type
TYPE 1
LPF, HPF, BPF
FREQ. 1
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
LEVEL 1
0–100
Filter 1 level
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
RESO. 1
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
TYPE 2
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb
spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
FREQ. 2
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
LEVEL 2
0–100
Filter 2 level
RESO. 2
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
0–100%
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
E/R BAL.
TYPE 3
Balance of early reflections and
reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =
all early reflections)
FREQ. 3
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 3 frequency
HPF
0–100
Filter 3 level
THRU, 21.2 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LEVEL 3
RESO. 3
0–20
Filter 3 resonance
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
■ FREEZE
■ M. BAND DYNA.
One input, two output basic sampler.
Parameter
Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
REC DLY
PLY MODE
TRG LVL
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is
started by pressing the REC and
PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,
Record-Ready mode is engaged by
pressing the REC button, and
actual recording is triggered by the
input signal.
–1000 to +1000
ms
Recording delay. For plus values,
recording starts after the trigger is
received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is
received.
MOMENT,
CONTI., INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample
plays only while the that the PLAY
button is pressed. In CONT mode,
playback continues once the PLAY
button has been pressed. The
number of times the sample plays
is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is
triggered by the input signal.
–60 to 0 dB
TRG MASK 0–1000 ms
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal
level required to trigger recording
or playback)
Once playback has been triggered,
subsequent triggers are ignored for
the duration of the TRG MASK
time.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with
individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the
low band is increased. For
negative values, the opposite
will occur. When set to 0, all
three bands are affected the
same.
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output
level
CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
CMP. RAT
Compressor ratio
1:1 to 20:1
CMP. ATK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
CMP. REL
*1
Compressor release time
CMP. KNEE 0–5
Compressor knee
CMP. BYP
OFF/ON
Compressor bypass
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
START
*1
Playback start point in milliseconds
EXP. THRE
–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB
Expander threshold
END
*1
Playback end point in milliseconds
EXP. RAT
1:1 to ∞:1
Expander ratio
LOOP
*1
Loop start point in milliseconds
EXP. REL
*1
Expander release time
LOOP
NUM
0–100
Number of times the sample plays
EXP. BYP
OFF/ON
Expander bypass
–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Limiter threshold
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
LIM. THRE
Playback pitch shift
LIM. ATK
0–120 ms
Limiter attack
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift fine
LIM. REL
*1
Limiter release time
LIM. KNEE
0–5
Limiter knee
LIM. BYP
OFF/ON
Limiter bypass
MIDI TRG
OFF, C1–C6, ALL
PLAY button can be triggered by
using MIDI Note on/off messages.
START
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–131000
Loop start point in samples
*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
242
Parameter
REV TIME
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Effects Parameters
■ M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
L-M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M-H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output
level
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Low band threshold level
MID THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Mid band threshold level
HI. THRE
–54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
High band threshold level
RATIO
1:1 to 20:1
Compression ratio
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack time
RELEASE
*1
Compressor release time
KNEE
0–5
Compressor knee
BYPASS
OFF/ON
Bypasses the compressor
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm.
Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and
provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your
location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and
REV-X PLATE.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.28–27.94 s*1
INI. DLY
0.0–120.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
LO.FREQ
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb
spread)
ROOM
SIZE
0–28
Size of room
DECAY
0–53
Gate closing speed
HPF
THRU, 22.0 Hz–
8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
1.00 kHz–
18.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reverb time
Appendices
*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the
ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type
and ROOM SIZE setting.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
243
Effects and tempo synchronization
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some of the LS9’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types
of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will
change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will
change according to the tempo.
• Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC:.............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .....These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.:.......DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the
way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is
relevant only for modulation-type effects.
• How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making
adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and
DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the
correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.
If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set
If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note
DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
= 250 x (120/121)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or
TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.
• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is
an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were
changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way
between store and recall, the LS9 does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no
longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
244
= 1/48
= 1/24
= 1/16
= 1/12
= 3/32
= 1/8
= 1/6
= 3/16
= 1/4
= 3/8
= 1/2
= 3/4
= 1/1
= 2/1
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Scene/
Effect
Scene
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 2
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Preset#
Scene/
Effect
Scene
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Preset#
Scene/
Effect
Scene
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Preset#
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
Scene
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 1
245
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 3
246
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
Scene/
Effect
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Scene
Preset#
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
000
No Assign
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 4
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program
Change#
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program
Change#
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
Scene/
Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 5
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 13
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 6
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Preset#
No Assign
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 15
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 8
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 14
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 7
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 16
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
Preset#
No Assign
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 9
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
RACK5
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 10
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
RACK6
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 11
Scene/Effect
RACK7
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
Appendices
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
■ Preset Bank/Ch# 12
Program Change#
001
002
003
:
128
Scene/Effect
RACK8
Preset#
001
002
003
:
128
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
247
Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table
■ Bank/Ch#
Program
Change#
248
Scene/
Effect
User#
Program
Change#
Scene/
Effect
User#
Program
Change#
001
044
087
002
045
088
003
046
089
004
047
090
005
048
091
006
049
092
007
050
093
008
051
094
009
052
095
010
053
096
011
054
097
012
055
098
013
056
099
014
057
100
015
058
101
016
059
102
017
060
103
018
061
104
019
062
105
020
063
106
021
064
107
022
065
108
023
066
109
024
067
110
025
068
111
026
069
112
027
070
113
028
071
114
029
072
115
030
073
116
031
074
117
032
075
118
033
076
119
034
077
120
035
078
121
036
079
122
037
080
123
038
081
124
039
082
125
040
083
126
041
084
127
042
085
128
043
086
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Scene/
Effect
User#
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
NO ASSIGN
Parameter 1
0
ON
INPUT
LOW Q
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C)
INPUT
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
LOW G
LOW MID Q
LOW MID F
LOW MID G
INPUT EQ
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID F
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
HIGH F
INPUT
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
LPF ON
INPUT
CH 1–CH 32
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
INPUT ATT
ON
CH 1–CH 32{64}
INPUT HPF
HIGH Q
HIGH G
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT
ON
INPUT
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
LOW Q
BALANCE
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–STEREO R
ON
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
LOW G
TO STEREO
ON
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
LOW MID F
TO MONO
ON
LCR
MIX SEND
CSR
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MIX TO MTRX
LOW MID G
HIGH MID Q
OUTPUT EQ
HIGH MID F
HIGH F
HIGH G
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
LOW TYPE
MIX 1 LVL L –
MIX 16 LVL L
HIGH TYPE
MIX 1/ 2 PAN –
MIX 15/16 PAN
HIGH LPF ON
LOW HPF ON
MIX 1–MIX 16
OUTPUT ATT
OUTPUT
PAN
ON
MTRX1 POINT –
MTRX8 POINT
ATTACK
MTRX1 ON – MTRX8
ON
RANGE
MTRX1 LVL H –
MTRX8 LVL H
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 16
STEREO L–MONO(C)
THRESHOLD
HOLD H
MIX 1–MIX 16
INPUT DYNA1
HOLD L
DECAY/REL H
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
DECAY/REL L
MTRX1/2 PAN –
MTRX7/8 PAN
RATIO
MTRX1 POINT –
MTRX8 POINT
GAIN H
MTRX1 ON – MTRX8
ON
KNEE/WIDTH
MTRX1 LVL H –
MTRX8 LVL H
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
HIGH Q
MTRX1 LVL L – MTRX8
LVL L
ST TO MTRX
LOW MID Q
MIX 1 PRE – MIX 16
POINT
TO MONO ON
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
LOW F
HIGH MID G
TO ST ON
MIX TO ST
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
ON
MIX 1 ON – MIX16
ON
MIX 1 LVL H –
MIX 16 LVL H
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
HIGH MID G
FREQ
PAN/BALANCE
Parameter 2
LOW F
INPUT
CH ON
DIRECT OUT
Parameter 1
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
FADER L
INSERT
Mode
—
FADER H
PHASE
Parameter 2
Appendices
Mode
GAIN L
STEREO L–MONO(C)
MTRX1 LVL L – MTRX8
LVL L
MTRX1/2 PAN –
MTRX7/8 PAN
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
249
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
INPUT DYNA2
RELEASE L
RATIO
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
OUTPUT
DYNA1
RELEASE L
RATIO
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
BYPASS
EFFECT
MIX BAL
RACK5–8
PARAM 1 H –
PARAM 32 L
ON A
GEQ
ON B
GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31
RACK1–8
GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31
MUTE MASTER
RECALL SAFE
250
ON
MASTER 1–MASTER 8
ON
CH 1–CH 32{64}
STIN1L–STIN4R
MIX 1–MIX 16
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
RACK1–8
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Control change parameter assignments
Control change parameter assignments
■ PRESET
Control
Change#
Parameter 2
Control
Change#
1
CH 1
64
CH 1
2
CH 2
65
CH 2
3
CH 3
66
CH 3
4
CH 4
67
CH 4
5
CH 5
68
CH 5
6
CH 6
69
CH 6
7
CH 7
70
CH 7
8
CH 8
71
CH 8
9
CH 9
72
CH 9
10
CH10
73
CH10
11
CH11
74
CH11
12
CH12
75
CH13
76
14
CH14
77
CH14
15
CH15
78
CH15
16
CH16
79
CH16
17
CH17
80
CH17
18
CH18
81
CH18
19
CH19
82
CH19
20
CH20
83
CH20
21
CH21
84
CH21
22
CH22
85
CH22
23
CH23
86
CH23
24
CH24
87
13
Mode
FADER H
Parameter 1
INPUT
Mode
CH ON
Parameter 1
INPUT
Parameter 2
CH12
CH13
CH24
25
88
26
89
CH 1
27
90
CH 2
91
CH 3
29
92
CH 4
30
93
CH 5
31
94
CH 6
28
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
33
CH 1
95
CH 7
34
CH 2
102
CH 8
35
CH 3
103
CH 9
36
CH 4
104
CH10
37
CH 5
105
CH11
38
CH 6
106
39
CH 7
107
40
CH 8
108
CH14
41
CH 9
109
CH15
42
CH10
110
CH16
43
CH11
111
CH17
44
CH12
112
CH18
CH13
113
CH19
46
CH14
114
CH20
47
CH15
115
CH21
48
CH16
116
CH22
49
CH17
117
CH23
50
CH18
118
51
CH19
119
52
CH20
53
CH21
54
CH22
55
CH23
56
CH24
FADER L
INPUT
INPUT
CH12
CH13
CH24
NO ASSIGN
Appendices
45
PAN/BALANCE
57
58
59
60
NO ASSIGN
61
62
63
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
251
Control change parameter assignments
Control
Change#
Mode
Parameter 2
Control
Change#
1
66
2
67
3
68
4
69
5
70
6
71
7
72
8
73
9
74
10
75
11
76
12
77
13
78
14
79
15
80
16
81
17
82
18
83
19
84
20
85
21
86
22
87
23
88
24
89
25
90
26
91
27
92
28
93
29
94
30
95
31
102
33
103
34
104
35
105
36
106
37
107
38
108
39
109
40
110
41
111
42
112
43
113
44
114
45
115
46
116
47
117
48
118
49
119
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
252
Parameter 1
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Mode
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
NRPN parameter assignments
INPUT
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
INPUT
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
From
(HEX)
0000
0060
007E
00DE
013E
019E
01FE
025E
02BE
031E
04FE
0514
052A
0540
0556
056C
0582
0598
05B6
0616
0634
0694
06F4
0754
07B4
0814
0874
08D4
0AB4
0ACA
0AE0
0AF6
0B0C
0B22
0B38
0B4E
To
(HEX)
0047
007D
00C5
0125
0185
01E5
0245
02A5
0305
0365
0513
0529
053F
0555
056B
0581
0597
05AD
05FD
0633
067B
06DB
073B
079B
07FB
085B
08BB
091B
0AC9
0ADF
0AF5
0B0B
0B21
0B37
0B4D
0B63
MIX TO ST
0B64
0B6B
INPUT
INPUT
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
0B6C
0BCC
0C2C
0C4A
0CAA
0D0A
0D6A
0DCA
0E2A
0E8A
0EEA
10CA
10D2
10DA
10E2
10EA
10F2
10FA
1102
112A
1132
113A
1142
114A
1152
115A
1162
0BB3
0BEB
0C49
0C91
0CF1
0D51
0DB1
0E11
0E71
0ED1
0F31
10D1
10D9
10E1
10E9
10F1
10F9
1101
1109
1131
1139
1141
1149
1151
1159
1161
1169
Parameter
FADER
INPUT to Mix9–16
LEVEL
MIX1–16, STEREO
LR to MATRIX LEVEL
ON
INPUT to Mix9–16
ON
MIX1–16, STEREO
LR to MATRIX ON
MIX1–8 to STEREO
ON
PHASE
INSERT ON
INPUT to Mix9–16
PRE/POST
INPUT57–64 to
Mix1–8 LEVEL
INPUT57–64 to
Mix1–8 ON
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
FREQ
MIX1–2
MIX3–4
MIX5–6
MIX7–8
From
(HEX)
118A
1192
119A
11A2
11AA
11B2
11BA
11C2
11EA
11F2
11FA
1202
120A
1212
121A
To
(HEX)
1191
1199
11A1
11A9
11B1
11B9
11C1
11C9
11F1
11F9
1201
1209
1211
1219
1221
ON
1232
1239
ON
123A
1241
ON
1242
1249
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN
HIGH ONLY/FULL
INPUT49–64
DYNAMICS2
FILTER FREQ
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
EQ INPUT, MIX,
MATRIX, STEREO LR HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
ATT
HPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
INPUT DYNAMICS1
RANGE
HOLD
DECAY/RELEASE
ON
ATTACK
INPUT DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD
RELEASE
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR DYNAMICS1 RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
PAN/BALANCE
INPUT
MIX9–10
INPUT to Mix9/10– MIX11–12
15/16 PAN
MIX13–14
MIX15–16
MATRIX1, 2
MATRIX3, 4
MIX1–16, STEREO
LR to MATRIX PAN
MATRIX5, 6
MATRIX7, 8
MIX1–8 to STEREO
MIX TO ST
PAN
BALANCE
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR
124A
125A
126A
127A
128A
1304
1382
1400
147E
14FC
157A
15F8
1676
16F4
1772
17F0
186E
18EC
196A
19E8
1A66
1AE4
1B44
1BA4
1C04
1C64
1CC4
1D24
1DA2
1E20
1E9E
1F1C
1F9A
2018
2096
20F6
2156
21B6
2216
2336
234C
2362
2378
1259
1269
1279
1289
1299
1381
13FF
147D
14FB
1579
15F7
1675
16F3
1771
17EF
186D
18EB
1969
19B1
1A65
1AE3
1B2B
1B8B
1BEB
1C4B
1CAB
1D0B
1DA1
1E1F
1E9D
1F1B
1F99
2017
2095
20DD
213D
219D
21FD
225D
234B
2361
2377
238D
238E
2395
2396
23B3
Parameter
INPUT57–64 to
MIX1–8 PRE/POST
INPUT57–64 EQ
INPUT57–64 HPF
INPUT57–64 to
MIX1–8 PAN
INPUT57–64 to
STEREO
INPUT57–64
RECALL SAFE
INPUT57–64 to
MONO
INPUT49–64
DYNAMICS1
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
NRPN parameter assignments
253
NRPN parameter assignments
Parameter
RACK5–8(EFFECT)
RACK1–3(GEQ)
FADER
254
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM1
PARAM2
PARAM3
PARAM4
PARAM5
PARAM6
PARAM7
PARAM8
PARAM9
PARAM10
PARAM11
PARAM12
PARAM13
PARAM14
PARAM15
PARAM16
PARAM17
PARAM18
PARAM19
PARAM20
PARAM21
PARAM22
PARAM23
PARAM24
PARAM25
PARAM26
PARAM27
PARAM28
PARAM29
PARAM30
PARAM31
PARAM32
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MONO(C)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
From
(HEX)
26B4
26BC
26C4
26CC
26D4
26DC
26E4
26EC
26F4
26FC
2704
270C
2714
271C
2724
272C
2734
273C
2744
274C
2754
275C
2764
276C
2774
277C
2784
278C
2794
279C
27A4
27AC
27B4
27BC
27C4
27CA
27D0
27D6
27DC
27E2
27E8
27EE
27F4
27FA
2800
2806
280C
2812
2818
281E
2824
282A
2830
2836
283C
2842
2848
284E
2854
285A
2860
2866
286C
2872
2878
287E
28E4
To
(HEX)
26B7
26BF
26C7
26CF
26D7
26DF
26E7
26EF
26F7
26FF
2707
270F
2717
271F
2727
272F
2737
273F
2747
274F
2757
275F
2767
276F
2777
277F
2787
278F
2797
279F
27A7
27AF
27B7
27BF
27C9
27CF
27D5
27DB
27E1
27E7
27ED
27F3
27F9
27FF
2805
280B
2811
2817
281D
2823
2829
282F
2835
283B
2841
2847
284D
2853
2859
285F
2865
286B
2871
2877
287D
2883
28E8
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MONO(C)
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
From
(HEX)
28EA
292A
296A
29AA
29EA
2A2A
2A6A
2AAA
2BEA
2BF0
2BF6
2BFC
2C02
2C08
2C0E
2C14
2C2A
2C30
2C70
2CB0
2CF0
2D30
2D70
2DB0
2DF0
To
(HEX)
2929
2969
29A9
29E9
2A29
2A69
2AA9
2AE9
2BEE
2BF4
2BFA
2C00
2C06
2C0C
2C12
2C18
2C2E
2C6F
2CAF
2CEF
2D2F
2D6F
2DAF
2DEF
2E2F
MATRIX SEND
2F30
2F34
MIX TO ST
2F36
2F3D
MONO(C)
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
HPF ON
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
2F46
2F4C
2F8C
2FCC
300C
304C
308C
30CC
310C
325E
3264
326A
3270
3276
327C
3282
3288
328E
3294
329A
32A0
32A6
32AC
32B2
3440
3480
34C0
34E4
2F4A
2F8B
2FCB
300B
304B
308B
30CB
310B
314B
3262
3268
326E
3274
327A
3280
3286
328C
3292
3298
329E
32A4
32AA
32B0
32B6
347F
34BF
34E2
3506
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R HPF
FREQ
3640
367F
MONO(C)
DYNAMICS1
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
3680
3686
368C
3692
3698
369E
36A4
3684
368A
3690
3696
369C
36A2
36A8
Parameter
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R to Mix1–8
LEVEL
MONO(C) to Matrix
LEVEL
ON
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R to Mix1–8
ON
MONO(C) to Matrix
ON
MIX9–16 to STEREO ON
INSERT
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R to MIX1–8
PRE/POST
MONO(C) EQ
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R EQ
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LRC EQ
NRPN parameter assignments
To
(HEX)
36E9
3729
3769
37A9
382E
3834
383A
3840
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R to MIX1–8
PAN
MONO(C) to
Matrix1–8 PAN
MIX9–16 to STEREO ON
MIX TO ST
3842
3849
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
ON
CSR
ON
3852
3858
385E
3864
386A
3870
3876
387C
3882
3888
388E
3894
389A
38A0
38A6
38AC
38B2
38B8
38BE
38C4
38CA
38D0
38D6
38DC
38E2
38E8
38EE
38F4
38FA
3900
3906
390C
3912
396A
39C2
3857
385D
3863
3869
386F
3875
387B
3881
3887
388D
3893
3899
389F
38A5
38AB
38B1
38B7
38BD
38C3
38C9
38CF
38D5
38DB
38E1
38E7
38ED
38F3
38F9
38FF
3905
390B
3911
3969
39C1
3A01
RACK4–6(GEQ)
LCR IN, MIX
DIRECT OUT
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R to STEREO
MUTE MASTER
RECALL SAFE
ON
3A02
3A41
ON
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
+48v 1
+48v 2
+48v 3
+48v 4
+48v 5
+48v 6
+48v 7
+48v 8
3A5A
3A66
3B06
3B16
3B26
3B36
3B46
3B56
3B66
3B76
3B86
3B96
3BA6
3BB6
3BC6
3BD6
3BE6
3BF6
3A61
3AEA
3B0B
3B1B
3B2B
3B3B
3B4B
3B5B
3B6B
3B7B
3B8B
3B9B
3BAB
3BBB
3BCB
3BDB
3BEB
3BFB
HA
HPF1
HPF2
HPF3
HPF4
HPF5
HPF6
HPF7
HPF8
From
(HEX)
3C06
3C16
3C26
3C36
3C46
3C56
3C66
3C76
To
(HEX)
3C0B
3C1B
3C2B
3C3B
3C4B
3C5B
3C6B
3C7B
ON
3C86
3CC5
3CC6
3CD6
3D06
3D36
3D66
3D76
3D86
3D96
3D98
3D9A
3D9C
3DD4
3E0C
3E44
3E7C
3EB4
3EB8
3EBC
3EC0
3EC4
3EC8
3ECC
3ED0
3ED4
3ED8
3EDC
3EE0
3EE4
3EE8
3EEC
3EF0
3EF4
3EF8
3EFC
3F00
3F04
3F08
3F0C
3F10
3F14
3F18
3F1C
3F20
3F24
3F28
3F2C
3F30
3F34
3CD5
3CF5
3D25
3D55
3D75
3D85
3D95
3D97
3D99
3D9B
3DD3
3E0B
3E43
3E7B
3EB3
3EB7
3EBB
3EBF
3EC3
3EC7
3ECB
3ECF
3ED3
3ED7
3EDB
3EDF
3EE3
3EE7
3EEB
3EEF
3EF3
3EF7
3EFB
3EFF
3F03
3F07
3F0B
3F0F
3F13
3F17
3F1B
3F1F
3F23
3F27
3F2B
3F2F
3F33
3F4E
Parameter
HA
INPUT1–56, STIN
1L–4R to MONO
MIX to MONO
ON
ON
SLOT OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
OMNI OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
DIGITAL OUT DELAY TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
RATIO
INPUT1–48, STIN
KNEE/WIDTH
1L–4R DYNAMICS1
GAIN
HIGH ONLY/FULL
INPUT1–48, STIN
1L–4R DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
RACK7–8(GEQ)
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
EQ
ATT
Appendices
MIX1–2
MIX3–4
MIX5–6
MIX7–8
MATRIX1,2
MATRIX3, 4
MATRIX5, 6
MATRIX7, 8
From
(HEX)
36AA
36EA
372A
376A
382A
3830
3836
383C
Parameter
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
255
Mixing parameter operation applicability
Mixing parameter operation applicability
This table indicates how the behaviors of each of the input channel and output channel parameters are
affected by Stereo, Link, Recall Safe, and User Level settings.
■ Input Channels
Parameter
HA
NAME,
ICON
Stereo
*3
O
LINK
RECALL SAFE
USER LEVEL
INPUT HA
INPUT HA
INPUT HA
INPUT NAME
INPUT NAME
LCR
O
INPUT ALL
Insert On
O
INPUT ALL
Direct Out
On/Level
O
INPUT ALL
On
O
INPUT ON
INPUT ON
Fader
O
INPUT FADER
INPUT FADER
Pan/
Balance
O
Att
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
HPF
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
EQ
O
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT
DYNAMICS1*1
INPUT
DYNAMICS2*1
INPUT
DYNA1
INPUT
DYNA2
Dynamics1
O*1
Dynamics2
O*1
Mute
Assign
To Mix
ON
To Mix
LEVEL
To Mix
PRE/POST
To Stereo/
Mono
Cue
Key In Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
INPUT ALL
INPUT ALL
O
O
O
INPUT
MIX ON*2
INPUT
MIX SEND*2
INPUT MIX
ON
INPUT MIX
SEND
O
INPUT ALL
O
INPUT ALL
O
O
O
O
O
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
FADER/ON
INPUT
PROCESSING
INPUT
PROCESSING
STORE
*1 Except for Key In Source
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–16 individual Send
Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 ST IN 1–4 only.
■ MIX Channels
Parameter
NAME, ICON
LCR
Insert On
On
Fader
Pan/Balance
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Mute Assign
To Mix ON
To Mix LEVEL
To Matrix On
To Matrix LEVEL
To Matrix POINT
To Stereo/Mono
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
Stereo
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE
MIX NAME
MIX ALL
MIX ALL
MIX ON
MIX FADER
MIX ALL
MIX EQ
MIX EQ
MIX DYNA1
MIX ALL
WITH MIX SEND
WITH MIX SEND
MIX to MATRIX ON
MIX to MATRIX SEND
MIX ALL
MIX ALL
*1 Except for Key In Source
256
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MUTE ASSIGN
WITH MIX SEND
WITH MIX SEND
MIX FADER/ON
MIX FADER/ON
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
STORE
■ MATRIX Channels
Parameter
NAME, ICON
Stereo
RECALL SAFE
MATRIX NAME
Insert On
O
MATRIX ALL
On
O
MATRIX ON
Fader
O
MATRIX FADER
Pan/Balance
O
MATRIX ALL
Att
O
MATRIX EQ
Dynamics1
O*1
EQ
O
Mute Assign
O
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX ALL
To Matrix On
WITH MATRIX SEND
To Matrix LEVEL
WITH MATRIX SEND
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
O
O
O
O
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MATRIX
FADER/ON
MATRIX
FADER/ON
MATRIX
FADER/ON
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MATRIX
PROCESSING
MUTE ASSIGN
WITH MATRIX
SEND
WITH MATRIX
SEND
STORE
*1 Except for Key In Source
■ STEREO, MONO Channels
Parameter
Stereo
*2
RECALL SAFE
STEREO, MONO
NAME
NAME, ICON
Insert On
O
STEREO, MONO ALL
On
O
STEREO, MONO ON
Fader
O
STEREO, MONO
FADER
Pan/Balance
O
STEREO, MONO ALL
Att
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
Dynamics1
O
STEREO, MONO
DYNA1
EQ
O
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO ALL
STEREO, MONO to
MATRIX ON
STEREO, MONO to
MATRIX SEND
Mute Assign
O
To Matrix On
O
To Matrix LEVEL
O
To Matrix POINT
O
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Fade Time
O
O
O
O
*1 Except for Key In Source
*2 STEREO channel only.
STEREO, MONO ALL
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
MUTE ASSIGN
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO
PROCESSING
STORE
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
Function
NO ASSIGN
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
LED
—
—
RECALL
—
Recall the currently selected scene
STORE
—
Store to the currently selected scene
SCENE +1, LIST UP
SCENE +1 selects the next scene number. LIST UP scrolls
the scene list upward by one. Simultaneously pressing
[SCENE ▲] and [SCENE ▼] keys will return to the current
scene number. After scene 300, wrap around to scene
000.
▲
Dark
Flash
SCENE
Explanation
No assignment
▼
SCENE -1, LIST DOWN
SCENE -1 selects the previous scene number. LIST UP
scrolls the scene list upward by one. Simultaneously pressing [SCENE ▲] and [SCENE ▼] keys will return to the current scene number. After scene 000, wrap around to scene
300.
INC RECALL
—
Recall the scene of the next existing number
DEC RECALL
—
Recall the scene of the previous existing number
DIRECT RECALL
SCENE #000–#300
Directly recall the scene of the specified number
RECALL UNDO
—
Lit if UNDO is possible
STORE UNDO
—
Lit if UNDO is possible
Execute STORE UNDO
LATCH
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch TALKBACK on/off
UNLATCH
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Turn TALKBACK on while pressed
SELECTED CH
ASSIGN
—
Lit if assignment is
the same
When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment
state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a
SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on/
off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the
[SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
OSCILLATOR ON
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch the OSC on/off
When this turns on, the OSC popup window will appear
SELECTED CH
ASSIGN
—
Lit if assignment is
the same
When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment
state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a
SEL key of an output channel to switch the assignment on/
off, and its state will be remembered. During this time, the
[SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
—
—
Flash
Clear all CUE settings together
MONITOR ON
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch MONITOR on/off
Execute RECALL UNDO
TALKBACK
OSCILLATOR
CUE CLEAR
MONITOR
EFFECT BYPASS
SELECTED CH
ASSIGN
—
Lit if assignment is
the same
When you press this key, the previously-stored assignment
state will be applied. While holding down this key, press a
SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off, and its state will be remembered. During this
time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
SOURCE SELECT
STEREO L/R,
MONO(C), LCR, 2TR
IN L/R, INPUT 15/16
{31/32}, PLAYBACK
OUT, DEFINE
Lit if the selected
monitor source is on
Recall the selected signal to the monitor
DIMMER ON
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch the monitor dimmer function on/off
MONO MONITOR
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch MONO MONITOR on/off
MONITOR ON MAS—
TER FADER
ON: lit, OFF: dark
If this is on, you can use the master fader to control the
monitor level, and the ON key to switch the monitor output on/off
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Bypass the specified effect
Blink in synchronization to the tempo
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen
RACK 5–8
—
CURRENT PAGE
—
RACK 5–8
—
TAP TEMPO
MUTE MASTER
METER
Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect
MUTE GROUP 1–8
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off
PEAK HOLD ON
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Turn the meter PEAK HOLD function on/off
STEREO/MONO(C)
SEL
—
MONO (C): lit, STEREO: dark
Switch the top panel STEREO L/R METER function
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
TALKBACK ON
257
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
Function
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
LED
Explanation
When storing a page:
Flash
PAGE BOOKMARK
—
PAGE CHANGE
When showing a
memorized page:
Blink
Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the
key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (press and release the key within two secWhen not showing a onds). Popup windows can also be memorized. In the case
memorized page: Lit of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized.
Not memorized:
Dark
CH SELECT
CLOSE POPUP
—
Flash
Close the displayed popup window
INC, DEC
—
Flash
Increment/Decrement the channel selection
SET [+48V]
—
SET [Ø]
—
SET [PRE SEND]
—
SET [TO STEREO]
—
While pressing: Lit
SET [TO MONO]
—
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off.
SET [TO LCR]
—
SET [INSERT ON]
—
SET [DIRECT OUT]
—
While pressing: Lit
Hold down this key and press the SELECTED CH encoder
to return to the default value. You can also return to the
default value by moving the cursor to the knob or fader in
the LCD screen, then holding down this key and pressing
the [ENTER] key.
While pressing: Lit
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the
fader of that channel to nominal level. You can also push a
SELECTED SEND encoder to set the send level to nominal
level. You can also return to nominal level by moving the
cursor to the knob or fader in the LCD screen, then holding down this key and pressing the [ENTER] key.
SET BY SEL
SET DEFAULT
VALUE
—
—
SET NOMINAL
LEVEL
—
SENDS ON FADER
MIX1–16, MATRIX1–
—
8
Blinks in SENDS ON
FADER mode
Recall the Sends On Fader function to the selected MIX or
MATRIX
GEQ
FADER ASSIGN
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Turn the GEQ Fader Assign function on/off.
—
—
Same as the indicaPLAY/PAUSE, STOP, FF/
tion for the correNext, REW/Previous,
sponding LCD
REC
button
Recorder transport functions
AUTOREC
While pressing: Lit
Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be
closed, and then recording will continue with a new file.
TRANSPORT
RECORDER
HELP
258
DIRECT PLAY
Song title or file name
of audio files
While pressing: Lit
Start playback of a specified audio file from the begining
only once.
The audio file to be played must be saved in the SONGS
folder within the YPE folder. Please note that you won’t be
able to specify a file that is in the root directory or another
folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE
LIST screen will change to \YPE\SONGS\.
—
—
ON: lit, OFF: dark
Switch the Help function on/off
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Functions that can be assigned to user-defined keys
Function
PARAMETER 1
PARAMETER 2
MASTER
—
OVERVIEW
CH1–16, CH17–32,
{CH33–48, CH49–64 ,}
STIN, MIX, MATRIX,
ST/MONO, CUSTOM
FADER LAYER CH1–16,
{CUSTOM FADER
LAYER CH17–32}, CUSTOM FADER LAYER
STIN
LED
Explanation
SELECTED CHANNEL —
PATCH EDITOR
INPUT PATCH, OUTPUT PATCH, INPUT
INSERT PATCH, OUTPUT INSERT PATCH,
DIRECT OUT PATCH,
PATCH LIST
RACK EDITOR
RACK, RACK1–8
METER
INPUT METER, OUTPUT METER, CUSTOM
FADER LAYER
GROUP/LINK
MUTE GROUP, CHANNEL LINK
SCENE
SCENE MEMORY,
RECALL SAFE, FADE
TIME
LS9 EDITOR
Flash
Access the LS9 EDITOR screen
Appendices
LIBRARY
DYNAMICS LIBRARY,
INPUT EQ LIBRARY,
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY,
EFFECT LIBRARY, GEQ
LIBRARY
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
259
MIDI Data Format
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the LS9 is able to understand, send, and receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data
(8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is
ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored)
1.2 NOTE ON
(9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is
ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE
(Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]
(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x
110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is
ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE
Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the
settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that
can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on
page 249.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE
Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number
(62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the
specified parameter.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you
operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the
parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to
control changes” on page 249.
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you
operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h,
63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx
CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that
can be assigned to control changes” on page 249.
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor
because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will
match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
00
0vvvvvvv vv
1011nnnn Bn
20
0vvvvvvv vv
Control change
Control number (00)
Control Value (0-127)
Control change
Control number (32)
Control Value (0-127)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
260
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
paramSteps
add
mod
curValue
= paramMax–paramMin + 1;
= paramWidth / paramSteps;
= paramWidth–add * paramSteps;
= paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps
paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than
16,384 steps
paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than
2,097,152 steps
paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control
value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control
value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle)
* 128;
if ( rxValue > paramWidth)
rxValue = paramWidth;
param = ( rxValue–mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
1011nnnn Bn Control change
01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
00000110 06 Data entry MSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB
STATUS
1011nnnn Bn Control change *
DATA
00100110 26 Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not
be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly
whether or not the status byte is omitted.
STATUS
DATA
MIDI Data Format
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE
(Cn)
Reception
If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be
echoed from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE
Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages
are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene
memory and effect library are recalled according to the settings of the
[PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
Transmission
If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according
to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory and effect
library are recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH]
channel.
If the recalled scene memory and effect library has been assigned to more than
one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for
each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to LS9 Editor
because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will
match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select
messages will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1 MMC
< MMC STOP >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000001
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
01
F7
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000010
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
02
F7
(F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four
times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
STATUS
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized
(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of
400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Play(MCS)
End of exclusive
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000011
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
03
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Deferred Play(MCS)
End of exclusive
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped,
starts recording.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
EOX
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00000110
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
06
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Record strobe
End of exclusive
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing,
pauses.
STATUS
ID No.
Device ID
COMMAND
11111110 FE Active sensing
EOX
2.4 SYSTEM RESET
End of exclusive
< MMC PAUSE >
11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING
Stop(MCS)
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
2.2 TIMING CLOCK
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
2.1 SONG SELECT
STATUS
11110011 F3 Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127)
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
EOX
(F3)
Real time System exclusive
< MMC PLAY >
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory
recorder.
System exclusive message
11110000
01111111
0ddddddd
00000110
00001001
11110111
F0
7F
dd
06
09
F7
System exclusive message
Real time System exclusive
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
Pause(MCS)
End of exclusive
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
11111111 FF System reset
Appendices
STATUS
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
261
MIDI Data Format
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
3.2 BULK DUMP
Command
rx/tx
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 12 mm … mm dd
dd … ee F7
F0 43 2n 3E 12 mm … mm dd dd F7
rx/tx
rx
Function
BULK DUMP
DATA
BULK DUMP
REQUEST
The LS9 uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
Module Name(mm)
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Mixer Setup
Outport Setup
Monitor Setup
MIDI Setup
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Layer (Current)
Custom Fader Layer (Admin)
Custom Fader Layer (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
Data Number(dd)
*1) *14) *15)
*2) *7) *8)
*3) *9) *10) *11)
*4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11)
*5) *12)
*6) *13)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
*1) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
*2) 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only)
*3) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only)
*4) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only)
*5) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*6) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–57 Request Only)
*7) 512–575 Input 1–64,
*8) 576–583 STIN 1L–4R,
*9) 768–783 MIX 1–16,
*10) 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8 (LS9-32 only),
*11) 1280–1282 STEREO L–C,
*12) 512–519 GEQ 1–8,
*13) 512–515 EFFECT 1–4,
*14) 512 Current Data,
*15) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH]
matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a
PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified
parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device
Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which
CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER
CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be
transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 12 … F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 12 … F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
262
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
function
LS9 native parameter change
rx/tx
LS9 native parameter request
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
4.1.1
Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding
parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the
[CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
Category
DATA
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
rx/tx
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a LS9.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE
COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary
complement, and set bit 7 to 0.
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time
when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk
Dump Request.
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of
7-bit data.
rx/tx
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
0ccccccc
F0
43
1n
3E
12
cc
System exclusive message
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
eh
el
ih
il
ch
cl
dd
:
F7
Element no High.
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
Element no Low.
Index no High.
Index no Low.
Channel no High.
Channel no Low.
Data
End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding
parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is
received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA Category
DATA
EOX
4.1.3
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
0ccccccc
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
12
cc
eh
el
ih
il
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
4.2.2
Function Name
FUNCTION NAME
Store
Recall
Unknown Factor Store
Unknown Factor Recall
Store Undo (only Scene)
Recall Undo (only Scene)
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
Element no High.
Element no Low.
Index no High.
Index no Low.
4.2.3
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Scene
Input EQ
Output EQ
Dynamics
GEQ
Effect
0x01
00000001
Channel no Low.
End of exclusive
Function
“LibStr__“
NAME
Current Scene/Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
“LibUnStr“
4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL –
4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding
parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH]
when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA CATEGORY
FUNCTION NAME
MODULE NAME
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
01001100
01101001
01100010
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
Channel no High.
Data category
DATA CATEGORY
“LibStr__”
“LibRcl__”
“LibUnStr”
“LibUnRcl”
“LibStrUd”
“LibRclUd”
F0 System exclusive message
43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
3E Digital mixer
12 LS9
00 OTHER DATA
"L" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Number High
nl Number Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
F7 End of exclusive
“LibRcl__“
“LibUnRcl“
SCENE
Number
1- 300
*5)
channel*1)
INPUT EQ LIB
41- 199
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
4- 199
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
42- 199
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
GEQ LIB
1- 199
*6)
EFFECT LIB
58- 199
*7)
SCENE
1- 300
0
INPUT EQ LIB
41- 199
0
OUTPUT EQ LIB
4- 199
0
Dynamics LIB
42- 199
0
GEQ LIB
1- 199
0
EFFECT LIB
58- 199
0
SCENE
0- 300
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
1- 199
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
1- 199
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
1- 199
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
GEQ LIB
0- 199
*6)
EFFECT LIB
1- 199
*7)
SCENE
0
*5)
INPUT EQ LIB
0
*1)
OUTPUT EQ LIB
0
*2) *3) *4)
Dynamics LIB
0
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
GEQ LIB
0
*6)
EFFECT LIB
0
*7)
“LibStrUd“
SCENE
0
0
“LibRclUd“
SCENE
0
0
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
tx
*1) 0:CH1–63:CH64
64:ST IN 1L–71:ST IN 4R
*2) 256:MIX1–271:MIX16
*3) 512:MATRIX1–519:MATRIX8
*4) 1024:STEREO L–1026:MONO(C)
*5) 512:will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0:RACK1–7:RACK8 If a GEQ is mounted in RACK 1–8.
*7) 0:RACK5–3:RACK8 If an effect is mounted in RACK 5–8.
*8) 1280:CH 1–1343:CH 64
1344:STIN 1L–1351:STIN 4R
(Dynamics2)
Appendices
4.1.2
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
263
MIDI Data Format
4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT –
4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE –
4.3.1
4.4.1
Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding
memory/library title will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER
CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER
CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
4.3.2
F0
43
1n
3E
12
00
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
OTHER DATA
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
ff (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
sh number -source start High
sl number -source start Low
eh number -source end High
el number -source end Low
dh number -destination start High
dl number -destination to start Low
F7 End of exclusive
Function Name
FUNCTION NAME
Copy
Paste
Clear
Cut
Insert
Edit Undo
4.3.3
System exclusive message
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
0fffffff
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0sssssss
0sssssss
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
EOX
11110111
264
Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding
memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received.
”LibCpy__”
”LibPst__”
”LibClr__”
”LibCut__”
”LibIns__”
”LibEdtUd”
Source
start
Valid
–
Valid
Valid
–
–
Source
end
–
–
–
–
–
–
Destination
start
–
Valid
–
–
Valid
–
Module Name
MODULE NAME
SCENE LIB
“SCENE___“
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
“INEQ____“
“OUTEQ___“
“DYNA____“
“GEQ_____“
“EFFECT__“
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
function
Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert,
EditUndo
Only Copy
Only Copy
Only Copy
Only Copy
Only Copy
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
F0
43
1n
3E
12
00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
OTHER DATA
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000001
01110100
01110010
01100010
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
0000dddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
EOX
11110111
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"A" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Scene/Library number High
nl Scene/Library number Low
eh Element High
el Element Low
ih Index High
il Index Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
dd Data28–31bit
dd Data21–27bit
dd Data14–20bit
dd Data7–13bit
dd Data0–6bit
F7 End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH]
immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
OTHER DATA
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"A" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Scene/Library number High
nl Scene/Library number Low
eh Element High
el Element Low
ih Index High
il Index Low
ch Channel High
cl Channel Low
F7 End of exclusive
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
Module Name
MODULE NAME
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
“SCENE___”
“INEQ____”
“OUTEQ___”
“DYNA____”
“GEQ_____”
“EFFECT__”
number
0-300 (0:response only)
1-199 (1-40:response only)
1-199 (1-3:response only)
1-199 (1-41:response only)
0-199 (0:response only)
1-199 (1–57:response only)
Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
When LS9 receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will
be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.
Top number is requested number or more.
-ExampleSCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number:0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
LS9
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000001
01110100
01110010
01100010
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
EOX
11110111
4.4.3
F0
43
3n
3E
12
00
4.5.1
size
16
16
16
16
16
16
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
F0
43
1n
3E
12
00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
OTHER DATA
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000101
01111000
01101001
01110011
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0sssssss
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"E" (ASCII CODE)
"x" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"s" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nn Data Status (0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data)
nh Request Number High
nl Request Number Low
nh Top Number High
nl Top Number Low
nh End Number High
nl End Number Low
F7 End of exclusive
Appendices
4.4.2
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
265
MIDI Data Format
4.5.2
Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
DATA
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
Receive
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH]
immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
System exclusive message
Number High
Number Low
Channel High
Channel Low
End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
4.6.2
Function Name
Digital mixer
Function
“ColUnStr“
LS9
OTHER DATA
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"b" (ASCII CODE)
"E" (ASCII CODE)
"x" (ASCII CODE)
"i" (ASCII CODE)
"s" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
nh Request Number High
nl Request Number Low
F7 End of exclusive
4.6.3
Number
Setup
0
User Defined Key
0
Program Change
0
Control Change
0
number
“SCENE___“
“INEQ____“
“OUTEQ___“
“DYNA____“
“GEQ_____“
“EFFECT__“
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
58-199
4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE –
Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
F0
43
1n
3E
12
00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
OTHER DATA
01001100 "C" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01010101
01101110
01010011
01110100
01110010
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
Module Name
Module Name
Mixer Setting
Outport Setting
Monitor Setting
MIDI Setting
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference(Current)
Preference(Admin)
Preference(Guest)
User Defined Keys(Current)
User Defined Keys(Admin)
User Defined Keys(Guest)
Custom Fader Layer(Current)
Custom Fader Layer(Admin)
Custom Fader Layer(Guest)
User Level(Current)
User Level(Guest)
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
"o" (ASCII CODE)
"l" (ASCII CODE)
"U" (ASCII CODE)
"n" (ASCII CODE)
"S" (ASCII CODE)
"t" (ASCII CODE)
"r" (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE –
4.7.1
Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect
will function immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
OTHER DATA
01001101 "M"
01101111
01100100
01000110
01111000
01010100
01110010
01100111
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0eeeeeee
0ppppppp
EOX
11110111
4.7.2
F0
43
1n
3E
12
00
"o"
"d"
"F"
"x"
"T"
"r"
"g"
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
ee Effect number (0:RACK5–3:RACK8)
pp Release:0, Press:1
F7 End of exclusive
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Freeze Play button
”FRZPLAY_”
Freeze Record button ”FRZREC__”
channel
0:RACK5, 2:RACK7
0:RACK5, 2:RACK7
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
266
tx/rx
tx
tx
tx
tx
Module Name
MODULE NAME
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
GEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
4.6.1
EOX
01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE)
01101001
01100010
01000101
01111000
01101001
01110011
01110100
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0nnnnnnn
0nnnnnnn
EOX
11110111
4.5.3
F0
43
3n
3E
12
00
nh
nl
ch
cl
F7
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL –
4.9
4.8.1
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the
corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.
If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed
to be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00000000
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
OTHER DATA
01000011 "C"
01101000
01101100
01010000
01101001
01110010
01000011
01110000
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
DATA
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
EOX
11110111
4.8.2
F0
43
1n
3E
12
00
"h"
"l"
"P"
"i"
"r"
"C"
"p"
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
mm (ASCII CODE)
sh Source Channel Number H *1)
sl Source Channel Number L *1)
dh Destination Channel Number H *1)
dl Destination Channel Number L *1)
F7 End of exclusive
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering
data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and
time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed,
the transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
DATA
EOX
4.9.2
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00010010
00100001
F0
43
1n
3E
12
21
System exclusive message
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
11110111
mm
mm
mm
dd
:
F7
ADDRESS UL
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
REMOTE LEVEL METER
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Data1
End of exclusive
Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device
number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be
echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. the corresponding
metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of
time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be
immediately stopped [disabled].
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
Module Name
MODULE NAME
Pair On (with Copy)
Pair On (with Reset Both)
Pair Off
Receive
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
”PAIRONCP”
”PAIRONRS”
”PAIROFF_”
*1) 0:CH1–63:CH64
256:MIX 1– 271:MIX 16
512:MATRIX 1–519:MATRIX 8
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00010010
00100001
F0
43
3n
3E
12
21
System exclusive message
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7
ADDRESS UL
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
LS9
REMOTE LEVEL METER
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive
Appendices
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
DATA
CATEGORY
FUNCTION
NAME
LEVEL METER DATA
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
267
Warning/Error Messages
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Meaning
xxx Parameters Copied.
Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Initialized.
Parameter xxx was initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted.
Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources!
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to
assign more than this.
Cannot Bookmark This Popup.
This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
Cannot Recall to Different Parameter Type! You attempted to recall a library of a different type.
268
Cannot Recall!
Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
Cannot Select This Channel.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.
Cannot Store!
Failed to store a scene memory or library.
Cannot Undo!
You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available.
Couldn’t Access File.
File on the USB memory could not be accessed for some reason.
Couldn’t Write File.
File could not be saved from the USB memory.
Current User Changed. [xxx]
Current user was changed to [xxx].
Directory Not Empty!
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory.
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the RACK screen to a different screen.
External HA Connection Conflict!
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA differs
from when the scene was stored.
File Access is Busy!
The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB memory is being accessed.
File Already Exists!
The USB memory already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting
to save, rename, or create.
File Error [xx]!
Internal file access error
File Protected!
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB memory is write-protected.
Help File Not Found!
Can’t find HELP file.
Illegal Address!
The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Network.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been
damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.
Illegal Storage Format!
The USB memory could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window to a different screen.
Loading Aborted.
Loading from USB memory was aborted.
Low Battery!
The backup battery voltage is low.
Maximum Number of Audio Files
Exceeded!
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded.
Memory Error! All Memories were
Initialized.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to failure
of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Data Overrun!
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full!
To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
No Access From Recorder!
In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than YPE/SONGS/.
No Controllable Knob.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you
operated.
No Corresponding Help Items.
A section in the HELP data cannot be found.
No Response from External HA.
No response from an external AD8HR.
Page Bookmarked.
The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Password Changed.
The password has been changed.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!
Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha dealer.
Processing Aborted.
Processing was interrupted.
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
Operation of the JPN button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing.
Saving Aborted.
Saving to the USB memory has been interrupted.
Scene #xxx is Empty!
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that
it cannot be recalled.
Scene #xxx is Protected!
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
Scene #xxx is Read Only!
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Meaning
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port.
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
There was a song file that could not be identified. It is possible that the song being used for DIRECT
PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK is different than the song that was specified.
Song File Not Found!
The file assigned to SCENE LINK or to the DIRECT PLAY user defined key does not exist.
Storage Full!
The file could not be saved because there is not enough space on the USB memory.
Storage Not Found!
The USB memory could not be recognized.
Storage Not Ready!
Access is not possible because the USB memory is not ready.
Sync Error! [xxx]
The LS9 is not synchronized with the [xxx] signal.
Tap Operation Ignored.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.
This Operation is Not Allowed.
This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.
Too Large Files! Loading Failed.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is
307,256 bytes.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare.
More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then compare with Flex15GEQ.
Too Many EQ Bands Used! Cannot Paste!
More than 15 bands are used, when trying to copy 31band GEQ and then paste to Flex15GEQ.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
The I/O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity.
Unsupported File Format!
The file you attempted to load from the USB memory is of an unsupported format.
USB: Data Framing Error!
Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.
USB: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.
USB: Rx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port.
USB: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the USB connector output port.
USB Currently Active for Recorder
function!
Since the USB memory recorder is recording or playing back, functions such as Save/Load cannot be
used.
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!
The recorder cannot oparate, since mixer scene memory/library data is being saved or loaded in USB
memory.
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!
Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB memory processing.
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory capacity ran out while the USB memory
recorder was operating.
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB memory was disconnected while the USB memory
recorder was operating.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB
device.
Excessive current has occurred at the USB connector.
Disconnect the USB memory that is connected to the USB connector.
Recorder was halted because synchronization with the word clock was lost.
Wrong Audio File Format!
The format of the audio file is invalid.
Wrong Password!
The password you input was incorrect.
Wrong Word Clock!
The LS9 cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD
CLOCK screen is not appropriate.
You Cannot Create User Key.
The current user does not have permission to create a user key.
Appendices
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
269
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
270
Power does not turn on, panel LEDs
and the LCD display do not light
❍ Are the LCD contrast and panel brightness adjusted appropriately? You can adjust the LCD contrast by
holding down the [HOME] key and turning the dial.
❍ Is the LS9’s POWER switch turned on?
❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer.
Sound is not input
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 44)
Is a signal being input from the external device?
Is the input port patched to an input channel? (→ p. 99)
Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57)
Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 115)
Could insert be turned on even though it has not been specified correctly? (→ p. 101)
Is the [ON] key indicator of the input channel lit?
Is the fader of the input channel raised?
Sound is not output
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (→ p. 44)
Is the [ON] key indicator of the STEREO channel lit?
Is an output port patched to the output channel? (→ p. 95)
Could LCR be on, and the CSR value be set to 1.0? (→ p. 58)
Sound is not output from headphones
or the MONITOR OUT jacks
❍ Is the [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume?
Sound is not loud enough
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57)
Is the fader of the input channel raised?
Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting? (→ p. 115)
Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting? (→ p. 117)
Is the EQ attenuator raised? (→ p. 115)
Is the fader of the output channel raised?
Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels. (→ p. 155)
Sound is distorted
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 206)
Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (→ p. 47, 57)
Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high?
Could the fader of the STEREO channel be raised too high?
Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting? (→ p. 115)
Sound is output even though it is not
patched to an output channel
❍ Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out? (→ p. 103)
❍ Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out? (→ p. 101)
The volume of a specific channel rises
and falls
❍ Could GATE/COMP be set to ducking? (→ p. 117)
Operating a fader does not control the
level as you expect
❍ Is SENDS ON FADER selected and INPUT TO MIX FADER and so on active in the panel?
Only the sound of a specific channel is
heard from the MONITOR OUT or
PHONES jack
❍ Could a [CUE] key be on?
Noise occurs from an externally
connected recorder or other device
❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (→ p. 206)
❍ Could the input signal be unsynchronized?
❍ Could oscillator or talkback be turned on? (→ p. 151, 153)
High frequency range is attenuated
❍ Could emphasis be applied? This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the
emphasis data. (→ p. 206)
❍ Could EQ be applied? (→ p. 115)
An input signal is being input, but
there’s no monitor output
❍ Is the dimmer applied?
❍ Is the MONITOR C assigned even though its output port has not been connected to external device.
Not enough headroom, especially
when EQ boost is applied
❍ Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level. (→ p. 115)
Signal is delayed
❍ Check whether the delay setting for each channel is set correctly. (→ p. 95)
Turning a SELECTED SEND encoder
does not change the send level to the
MIX/MATRIX bus
❍
❍
❍
❍
Can’t save scene memory or library
data
❍ Are you attempting to save the data to a read-only scene/library or a protected scene? (→ p. 129)
Can’t save to USB memory
❍
❍
❍
❍
Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data
❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? (→ p. 178)
❍ Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? (→ p. 178)
❍ Has an event been assigned for the program change? (→ p. 180)
When you recall a scene, some
channels/parameters are not updated
❍ Could that channel or parameter be set to Recall Safe? Could Focus be turned off in the scene you
recalled? Could user level restrictions have been specified? (→ p. 139, 140, 192)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Is the MIX/MATRIX turned on?
Is the MIX/MATRIX [ON] turned on?
Is the MIX bus set to VARI type? (→ p. 213)
If the send point is set to POST, could the fader have been lowered?
Is the USB memory protected?
Does the USB memory have enough free capacity to save the data?
When formatting the USB memory, format it in FAT32 or FAT16 format.
Could the recorder be playing back?
Troubleshooting
You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT
PARAM screen, but it is automatically
defeated
❍ This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display. (→ p. 170)
When you recall a scene, it takes a
certain amount of time for the faders to
stop
❍ Could you have specified a fade time? (→ p. 143)
The panel LEDs or LCD display are too
dark / too bright
❍ This can be adjusted in the MISC SETUP screen. (→ p. 217)
Signal level of a specific frequency is
low
❍ Could the EQ gain be turned down excessively?
❍ Routing a signal through a GEQ or effect will delay it relative to other signals. If this signal is mixed with
the signal via a different signal path, a comb filtering effect will cause the level of a specific frequency
to be decreased.
Can’t control an external head amp
(AD8HR)
❍
❍
❍
❍
Is the external head amp connected to the specified port?
Is the audio output signal of the external head amp being input via an I/O card to SLOT 1–3?
Is the input port of the external head amp set correctly?
Could there be a problem with the cable that connects the LS9 and external head amp? Are you using
a D-sub 9-pin cross cable?
❍ Refer to LS9 Editor installation guide on our web site.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
In the LCD display, there are some
black points (unlit) or white points
(always lit).
❍ Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs and not a malfunction.
Appendices
Can’t control the LS9 by LS9 Editor.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
271
General Specifications
General Specifications
Signal Delay
Less than 2.5 ms (INPUT to OMNI OUT @Fs=48kHz)
Dimensions (WxHxD)
LS9-16:
LS9-32:
480 x 220 x 500 mm
884 x 220 x 500 mm
Net Weight
LS9-16:
LS9-32:
12.0 kg
19.4 kg
Power Requirements
LS9-16:
LS9-32:
95 W, 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz
170 W, 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Temperature Range
Operating:
Storage:
+10˚C to +35˚C
-20˚C to +60˚C
Included Accessories
Owner’s Manual, AC Power Cord, Dust Cover (only LS9-32)
Optional Accessories
mini-YGDAI cards, Gooseneck Light LA1L (for LS9-32), Rack Mount Kit RK1
AC Power Cord Length
250 cm
Conditions
Frequency Range
Sampling Frequency
External Clock
Fader
Max.
Unit
50.88
kHz
Digital Input Fs = 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
10
* The jitter of input
clock is less than 1ns.
Digital Input Fs = 39.69–50.88 kHz
20
Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz
Word Clock: INT 48 kHz
44.1
ns
kHz
48
Accuracy
Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
50
ppm
Jitter
Word Clock: INT 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
5
ns
Travel (Stroke)
Resolution: 1,024 steps, +10 to -138, -∞ dB for all faders
Position Error
Moving Time
272
Typ.
Jitter of PLL *
Frequency
Sampling Frequency
Internal Clock
Min.
39.69
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
100
±1.5
From end to the other end, Under normal software control
0.3
mm
sec
Input/output characteristics
Input/output characteristics
❏ Analog Input Characteristics
Input Terminals
GAIN
Actual Load
Impedance
For Use With
Nominal
3 kΩ
50-600Ω Mics &
600Ω Lines
-62 dB
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
+10 dB
Input Level
Nominal
Max. before
clip
-82 dBu
(61.6 µV)
-62 dBu
(0.616 mV)
-42 dBu
(6.16 mV)
-10 dBu
(245 mV)
+10 dBu
(2.45 V)
+30 dBu
(24.5 V)
Sensitivity
*1
Connector
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced) *2
*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dBu (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are maximum position.)
*2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)
* In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.
* All input AD converters are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling.
* +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switch.
❏ Analog Output Characteristics
Actual Source
Impedance
For Use With
Nominal
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
75 Ω
600 Ω Lines
PHONES OUT
15 Ω
Output Terminals
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
Gain Switch
Output Level
*3
Nominal
Max. before
clip
+24 dB
(default)
+4 dBu
(1.23 V)
+24 dBu
(12.3 V)
+18 dB
-2 dBu
(616 mV)
+18 dBu
(6.16 V)
8 Ω Phones
—
75 mW *4
150 mW
40 Ω Phones
—
*4
150 mW
65 mW
Connector
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced) *1
Stereo Phone
Jack (TRS)
(Unbalanced) *2
XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)
PHONES OUT stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND)
There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.
The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max.
* In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.
* All output DA converters are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling.
❏ Digital Input Characteristics
Terminal
2TR IN DIGITAL
Coaxial
Format
Data Length
Level
IEC-60958
24 bit
0.5 Vpp/75 Ω
Format
Data Length
Level
IEC-60958
Consumer Use
24 bit
0.5 Vpp/75 Ω
Connector
RCA Pin Jack
❏ Digital Output Characteristics
2TR OUT DIGITAL
Coaxial
Connector
RCA Pin Jack
Appendices
Terminal
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
273
Input/output characteristics
❏ I/O Slot Characteristics
The rear panel provides one slot (LS9-16) or two slots (LS9-32) in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can be installed.
The following types of card can be used.
Card Name
Function
Input
Output
The number of available cards
LS9-16
LS9-32
MY8-AD24
Analog In
8In
—
1
2
MY8-AD96
Analog In
8In
—
1
2
MY8-ADDA96
Analog In/Out
8In
8Out
1
2
MY8-AE
AES/EBU
8In
8Out
1
2
MY8-AE96
AES/EBU
8In
8Out
1
2
MY8-AE96S
AES/EBU
8In
8Out
1
2
MY8-AEB
AES/EBU
8In
8Out
1
2
MY8-AT
ADAT
8In
8Out
1
2
MY8-DA96
Analog Out
MY8-TD
TASCAM
MY4-DA
Analog Out
MY4-AD
Analog In
MY16-AE
AES/EBU
16In
16Out
1
2
MY16-AT
ADAT
16In
16Out
1
2
MY16-TD
TASCAM
16In
16Out
1
2
MY16-CII
CobraNet
16In
16Out
1
2
—
8Out
1
2
8In
8Out
1
2
—
4Out
1
2
4In
—
1
2
Only Slot 1 has a serial interface (LS9-32).
Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on mini-YGDAI cards.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
❏ Control I/O Characteristics
Terminal
MIDI
WORD CLOCK
Format
Level
IN
MIDI
—
OUT
MIDI
—
—
TTL/75Ω terminated
BNC Connector
BNC Connector
IN
OUT
NETWORK (Ethernet)
USB
LAMP (LS9-32 only)
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
DIN Connector 5P
—
TTL/75Ω
100Base-T
100Base-T
USB 1.1 Host
USB *1
USB A Connector (Female)
—
0V–12V
XLR-4-31 type *2
*1. Bus-powered hubs are not supported.
*2. 4pin=+12V, 3pin=GND, Supported lamp: max. 5W
274
Connector
DIN Connector 5P
RJ-45
Electrical characteristics
Electrical characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator: 150 ohms
❏ Frequency Response
Input
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz@20Hz–20kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1kHz
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
8Ω
PHONES OUT
❏ Gain Error
Input
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
Internal Oscillator
Internal Oscillator
Typ.
Max.
GAIN: max.
-1.5
0.0
0.5
GAIN: max.
-3.0
0.0
0.5
RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
❏ Total Harmonic Distortion
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
Min.
Unit
dB
Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz@1kHz
Output
8Ω
PHONES OUT
Input
Conditions
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Input level: -62dBu, GAIN: max. → Output level:
+4.0dBu (Typ.)
-2.0
0.0
2.0
Input level: +10dBu, GAIN: min. → Output level:
+4.0dBu (Typ.)
-2.0
0.0
2.0
Full scale output, Output level: +24.0dBu
-0.5
0.0
0.5
-30dBFs, Phones level control: max. → Output
level: 0dBu (Typ.)
-0.5
0.0
0.5
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
dB
Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
8Ω
PHONES OUT
Conditions
+4dBu@20Hz-20kHz, GAIN: max.
0.1
+4dBu@20Hz-20kHz, GAIN: min.
0.05
Full scale output @1kHz
0.02
Full scale output @1kHz, Phones level control:
max.
0.2
Unit
%
* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18dB/octave filter @80kHz
❏ Hum & Noise
Input
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz, EIN = Equivalent Input Noise
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
-62
Rs=150Ω, GAIN: min.
Master fader: nominal, One channel fader: nominal
-84
-79
All Inputs <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
600 Ω
Rs=150Ω, GAINs: min.
Master fader: nominal, All channel faders: nominal
-67
All Inputs <LS9-32>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
Rs=150Ω, GAINs: min
Master fader: nominal, All channel faders: nominal
-64
—
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
Residual output noise, Stereo Master: off
-86
—
PHONES OUT
Residual output noise, Phones level control: min.
-86
8Ω
Unit
-128
EIN
Rs=150Ω, GAIN: max.
Master fader: nominal, One channel fader: nominal
dBu
❏ Dynamic Range
Input
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
—
Fs = 44.1kHz or 48kHz
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
AD + DA, GAIN: min.
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
108
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
DA Converter
110
Max.
Unit
dB
Appendices
* Hum & Noise are measured with a 6dB/octave filter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation.
* Dynamic range is measured with a 6dB/octave filter @12.7kHz; equivalent to a 20kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation.
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
275
Electrical characteristics
❏ Crosstalk@1kHz
From
To
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
INPUT n
INPUT (n-1) or (n+1)
CH 1-16 {1-32}, Adjacent inputs, GAIN: min.
-80
OMNI OUT n
OMNI OUT (n-1) or (n+1)
OMNI OUT 1-8 {1-16}, Input to output
-80
Unit
dB
❏ Maximum Voltage Gain@1kHz
Input
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
Output
RL
OMNI OUT 1-8 <LS9-16>
OMNI OUT 1-16 <LS9-32>
600 Ω
Conditions
Min.
Rs=150Ω, Input GAIN: max.
Typ.
Max.
86
Unit
dB
❏ Phantom Voltage
Output
INPUT 1-16 <LS9-16>
INPUT 1-32 <LS9-32>
276
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Conditions
hot & cold: No load
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
46
48
50
V
Mixer Basic Parameters
Mixer Basic Parameters
❏ Libraries
❏ Output Function
Name
Number
Scene Memory
Preset 1 + User 300
Total
301
Function
Attenuator
Parameter
–96 to +24 dB
Input EQ Library
Preset 40 + User 159
199
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Output EQ Library
Preset 3 + User 196
199
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Dynamics Library
Preset 41 + User 158
199
Effect Library
Preset 57 + User 142
199
GEQ Library
Preset 1 + User 199
200
4Band Equalizer
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
❏ Input Function
Insert
Function
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Parameter
Phase
Normal/Reverse
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Attenuator
–96 to +24 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
HPF
4 Band Equalizer
Slope= 12 dB/Oct
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Key In:
Low Shelving (Low Band)
Type I/Type II
Direct Out
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
MIX1-16/MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C)
(8ch block)
Fader
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On
On/Off
Mute Group
8 Groups
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Oscillator
Direct Out Point:
Pre HPF/Pre EQ
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
Decay= 5 msec to 42.3 sec (Release)
Dynamics 1
Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Insert
(only ch1-32)
Dynamics 1
Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
❏ Output Port
Function
Parameter
Releace= 5msec to 42.3 sec
Out Port Delay
Range= –70 dB to 0 dB
Out Port Phase
Normal/Reverse
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Attenuator
–96 to +24 dB
0 msec to 600 msec
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In:
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Type:
Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
❏ Processor
Function
Parameter
GEQ
31 bands x 4(8) systems
Effects
Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 4 systems
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Dynamics2
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In:
Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out13-16
Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)
Fader
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On
On/Off
Mute Group
8 Groups
16 sends
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes
Mix Send Point:
Appendices
Mix Send
Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
LCR Pan
CSR= 0% to 100%
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
277
Pin Assignment
Pin Assignment
2 3
1
278
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
❏ LAMP (LS9-32 only)
4
Pin
Signal Name
1
NC
2
NC
3
GND
4
+12V
Dimensions
Dimensions
220
500
LS9-16
25
430
25
480
220
500
LS9-32
834
25
884
Unit : mm
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves
the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications,
equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Appendices
25
European models
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 16A
Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
279
Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately)
Attaching the RK1 rackmount kit (sold separately)
You can attach the optional RK-1 rackmount kit to the LS9-16 or LS9-32 and mount it in a rack or an
installed system.
1
2
Make sure that the power is turned off.
Remove screws “A” and detach the side pads.
NOTE
• Keep the side pad screws together with the pads you removed.
A
Side pad
A
3
A
A
At the locations indicated by the arrows, tighten the screws to attach the rackmount hardware.
The mixer can be attached at either of two angles, as shown in the following illustration.
4
Attach the hardware to the other side in the same way.
CAUTION
• When attaching the RK1 rackmount kit, make sure that the power is turned off. You must use the screws
that are included with the RK1.
280
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA
[ Digital Mixing Console ]
Model LS9-16/32 MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Date :8-Aug-2006
Version : 1.0
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
Memorized
x
x
**************
1, 3
x
x
Memorized
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
Note
Number
x
: True voice **************
0 - 127
x
Velocity
Note ON
Note OFF
x
x
o 9nH, v=1-127
x
After
Touch
Key's
Ch's
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Bank Select
Data Entry
NRPN LSB,MSB
Assignable Cntrl
o 0 - 127
**************
o 0 - 127
0 - 300
Assignable
o *1
o *1,*2
x
x
x
x
o
x
System
: Clock
Real Time: Commands
x
x
o
x
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local ON/OFF
Mes- :All Notes OFF
sages:Active Sense
:Reset
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
Pitch Bend
Control
0,32
6,38
98,99
1-31,33-98,
102-119
Effect Control
Change
: True #
System Exclusive
Common
Aux
Notes:
: Song Pos.
: Song Sel.
: Tune
Recorder Control
Effect Control
Appendices
Prog
Change
*1 :Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request.
*2 :MMC
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO
o : Yes
x : No
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
281
Index
Index
Numerics
2TR IN DIGITAL jack .........................................25
2TR OUT DIGITAL jack .....................................25
A
AC IN connector.................................................25
Adjusting faders ...............................................223
Adjusting input/output gain...............................224
Administrator ....................................................187
Analog input connections ...................................41
Analog output connections.................................42
Assigning a name...............................................34
B
Block Diagram................................ End of Manual
BRIGHTNESS field ..........................................217
Buttons ...............................................................32
C
Calibration function ..................................223, 224
Cascade connections.......................................209
CH CLEAR screen ...........................................128
CH COPY screen .............................................126
CH LINK screen ...............................................124
CH MOVE screen.............................................127
[CHANNEL JOB] key .........................................19
Channel link .....................................................124
Channel module section.....................................17
Channel parameters
Copying.....................................................126
Initializing ..................................................128
Moving ......................................................127
COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H) ........231
COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S).........231
COMPARE button ..............................................39
COMPRESSOR ...............................................230
Connections .......................................................41
Console lock.....................................................197
Constant display area ........................................30
CONTRAST field..............................................217
Control changes ...............................................183
Cooling fan vent .................................................25
COPY button ......................................................39
Cue function .............................................145, 148
[CUE] key .........................................................149
282
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
CUE screen ..................................................... 149
Cursor ............................................................... 32
[CUSTOM FADER] key ..................................... 91
Custom fader layer ............................................ 91
D
Data entry section ............................................. 22
DE-ESSER ...................................................... 231
DEF button ........................................................ 38
Digital input/output connections ........................ 43
Dimensions ..................................................... 279
DIRECT field ..................................................... 82
Direct output .................................................... 103
Display ........................................................ 20, 30
DISPLAY ACCESS section ......................... 19, 29
DUCKING........................................................ 229
DYNA field......................................................... 82
Dynamics ........................................................ 117
[DYNAMICS 1] encoder .................................... 21
[DYNAMICS 2] encoder .................................... 21
DYNAMICS Library List................................... 227
Dynamics parameter ....................................... 229
E
Effect Type List ............................................... 232
Effects ............................................................. 166
Editing parameters ................................... 170
Freeze ...................................................... 173
Inserting ................................................... 168
Mounting .................................................. 158
Send/return .............................................. 167
Tap tempo ................................................ 172
Effects and tempo synchronization ................. 244
Effects Parameters.......................................... 233
Electrical characteristics.................................. 275
EQ ................................................................... 115
EQ field ............................................................. 82
EQ [HIGH]/[HIGH MID]/
[LOW MID]/[LOW] keys.................................. 22
EQ Library List ................................................ 225
EQ [Q]/[FREQUENCY]/[GAIN] encoders .......... 21
Equalizer ......................................................... 115
Error Messages ............................................... 268
EXPANDER .................................................... 230
External head amp .......................................... 175
Index
F
K
Fade function ...................................................143
FADER field .......................................................82
Fader layer.........................................................27
Firmware versionn .............................................14
Focus function .................................................139
Front panel.........................................................26
Functions that can be
assigned to user-defined keys ......................257
Keyboard window...............................................34
Knobs.................................................................32
GATE ...............................................................229
General Specifications.....................................272
GEQ.................................................................161
Graphic EQ ......................................................161
31BandGEQ .....................................161, 163
Flex15GEQ .......................................161, 164
Inserting ....................................................161
Mounting ...................................................158
Grounding screw................................................25
Guest ...............................................................187
H
HA field ..............................................................82
[HA GAIN] encoder ............................................21
HA settings ........................................................47
Head amp settings.............................................47
Headphone output jack......................................26
Help function....................................................218
[HOME] key ...........................................22, 27, 82
I
Initializing internal memory ..............................222
INPUT channels...........................................13, 53
Input channels .............................................13, 53
Head amp settings......................................57
Sending to MIX bus ....................................62
Sending to STEREO bus ............................50
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus................58
INPUT jacks.......................................................24
Input patching ....................................................99
Input/output characteristics..............................273
Insert connections............................................101
INSERT field ......................................................82
Internal clock....................................................215
IP address........................................................216
LAMP connector (LS9-32 only)..........................25
LAYER section.............................................19, 27
LCR mode....................................................58, 71
Level Diagram.................................End of Manual
LIB button...........................................................35
Libraries .............................................35, 120, 174
List window ........................................................32
Login ................................................................189
LS9 Editor ........................................................216
LS9-16 ...............................................................11
LS9-32 ...............................................................11
M
MAC address ...................................................216
MATRIX buses.................................................213
MATRIX channels ........................................13, 67
[METER] key......................................................19
METER screen.................................................155
Meters ..............................................................155
MIDI .................................................................177
MIDI Data Format ............................................260
MIDI Implementation Chart ..............................281
MIDI IN/OUT connectors....................................25
MISC SETUP screen .......................................206
MIX bus types (VARI/FIXED).............................14
MIX buses ........................................................213
MIX channels ...............................................13, 67
Sending to MATRIX buses .........................75
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus................71
MIX/MATRIX SELECT section...........................20
MMC ................................................................186
Monitor function .......................................145, 146
[MONITOR] key .................................................19
MONITOR screen ............................................146
MONO channels ..........................................13, 67
MUTE field .........................................................82
Mute group.......................................................121
MUTE GROUP screen.....................................121
Mute safe .........................................................123
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Appendices
G
L
283
Index
N
Network address ..............................................216
NETWORK connector ................................25, 216
O
OMNI OUT jacks ................................................24
Oscillator ..........................................................153
OSCILLATOR screen.......................................153
Output channels ...........................................13, 67
Output patching..................................................95
Overview ..............................................................9
P
[PAN] encoder....................................................21
PAN field ............................................................82
Parameter changes..........................................185
Password .................................................188, 191
PASTE button ....................................................39
PATCH field .......................................................82
PHONES LEVEL control ....................................26
PHONES OUT jack ............................................26
Pin Assignment ................................................278
Playback...........................................................110
Popup windows ..................................................31
POWER switch...................................................25
Power user .......................................................187
Preferences......................................................194
Program changes.............................................180
R
[RACK 1-4] key ..................................................19
[RACK 5-8] key ..................................................19
RACK screen ...........................................161, 167
Rear panel....................................................11, 23
Recall Safe function .........................................140
RECALL SAFE screen .....................................140
Recorder ..........................................................105
[RECORDER] key ..............................................19
RECORDER screen.........................................106
Recording.........................................................108
S
SAVE/LOAD popup window.............................199
SCENE FADE screen ......................................143
SCENE FOCUS screen ...................................139
SCENE LIST screen ........................................129
284
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
Scene memory ................................................ 129
Clearing.................................................... 137
Constant display area ................................ 30
Copying/pasting ....................................... 136
Cutting...................................................... 138
Initializing current scene............................. 45
Inserting ................................................... 138
Recalling .................................................. 131
Sorting and renaming............................... 134
Storing...................................................... 129
[SCENE MEMORY] key .................................... 19
SCENE PLAYBACK LINK screen ................... 113
SELECTED CH VIEW screen ..................... 31, 82
Selected channel............................................... 30
SELECTED CHANNEL section................... 21, 81
Adjusting send levels ................................. 84
Assigning to mute group ............................ 89
Basic operations......................................... 29
Direct output settings ................................. 88
Dynamics settings ...................................... 87
HA settings................................................. 85
HPF/EQ settings ........................................ 87
Insert settings............................................. 88
Output patching.......................................... 86
Pan/balance ............................................... 86
Recall Safe settings ................................... 88
Sending signal to MIX bus ......................... 62
Turning a channel on/off ............................ 89
[SELECTED SEND] encoder ............................ 21
SEND field......................................................... 82
SENDS ON FADER mode .......................... 65, 78
[SETUP] key...................................................... 19
Slots ............................................................ 24, 44
ST IN channels............................................ 13, 53
ST IN section..................................................... 17
ST/MONO mode ......................................... 58, 71
STEREO channels ...................................... 13, 67
STEREO MASTER section ............................... 18
Stereo meter / Cue section ............................... 20
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses......................... 75
SYSTEM SETUP screen................................. 205
Index
T
Talkback ..........................................................151
TALKBACK screen ..........................................151
TITLE LIST screen...........................................110
Tool buttons .......................................................35
Top panel...............................................12, 15, 27
Troubleshooting ...............................................270
U
USB connector...................................................22
USB memory
Editing files ...............................................201
Formatting ................................................204
Loading .....................................................200
Saving.......................................................199
USB memory recorder .....................................105
User .................................................................187
User authentication keys .................187, 188, 192
User defined keys ............................132, 196, 257
USER DEFINED KEYS section .........18, 132, 196
User level.................................................187, 192
USER SETUP screen ..............................187, 205
V
Virtual rack.......................................................157
VIRTUAL RACK screen...................................158
W
Appendices
Warning ...........................................................268
Word clock ...........................................14, 46, 206
WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors ..................25
WORD CLOCK popup window ..................46, 206
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
285
286
LS9-16/32 Owner’s Manual
■ LS9-16/LS9-32 Block Diagram
MIX
1 2 ...15 16
M
O
N
O MATRIX
L R (C) 1 2 ... 7 8
ST
CUE
CASCADE OUT
LR
MIX CASCADE OUT1-16
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CASCADE IN
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C)
SLOT 1-16
{SLOT1 1-16}
{SLOT2 1-16}
CASCADE
IN
SELECT
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX CASCADE OUT1-8
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE CASCADE OUT LR
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
TALKBACK
INPUT 1-16{32}
INPUT
SELEECT
ON
MIX 1-16
+48V MASTER
OSCILLATOR
ON
OSC
METER
LEVEL
+48V
[INPUT]
[1-16{32}]
INPUT
1
2
3
INPUT
PATCH
METER
+
-
AD
INPUT 15,16{31,32}
GAIN/TRIM
2TR IN
CH
INSERT OUT 1-32
CH
INSERT IN 1-32
2TR IN L,R
2
To MONITOR SELECT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
METER
PRE HPF
METER
INSERT
HPF
ATT
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32]POST EQ{16}
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48,49-56,57-64]POST EQ{32}
To MIX
To MIX
SLOT {SLOT1}
{SLOT2}
{SLOT2 1-16}
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
To MIX
VARI
STEREO
ON
RACK1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
ON
SLOT 1-16
{SLOT1 1-16}
16
16
RACK2 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK3 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK4 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK5 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK6 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK7 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
PRE EQ
METER
PRE HPF
METER
HPF
8
PRE HPF
ATT
PRE EQ POST EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX13-16 OUT
ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
METER RACK IN
LEVEL
PAN
ON
To MIX
To MIX
VARI
STEREO
MONO(C)
MIX2,4...16
ST R
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
Flex15GEQ
16
RACK1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK2 (same as RACK1)
RACK2 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK3 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK3 (same as RACK1)
RACK3 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK4 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK4 (same as RACK1)
RACK4 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
METER RACK IN
METER RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
Flex15GEQ
METER RACK OUT L
METER RACK OUT R
EFFECT
EFFECT CUE
RACK5 IN
A(L)/B(R)
CH INSERT IN 1-32
To CH INSERT IN
MIX INSERT IN 1-16
To MIX INSERT IN
RACK5 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK6 (same as RACK5)
RACK6 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK7 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK7 (same as RACK5)
RACK7 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
RACK8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK8 (same as RACK5)
RACK8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
3
STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
To STEREO INSERT IN
MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8
To MATRIX INSERT IN
POST ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
To MATRIX
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE FADER
METER
ON
LEVEL
PAN
POST ON
METER
STEREO
INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)
STEREO
INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
LR MONO
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
PRE EQ
METER
LEVEL
ON
MATRIX2,4...8
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
PAN
ON
PAN LINK
MIX1,3...15
ON
MIX2,4...16
POST PAN R
ON
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
BAL
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX
INSERT OUT 1-8
MATRIX
INSERTIN1-8
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ
To STEREO OUT L+C,R+C
POST ON
VARI
PRE FADER / POST ON
STEREO OUT L+C
STEREO OUT L
To MATRIX
PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE EQ
METER
ATT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
KEYIN CH1-32{64}
KEYIN ST IN1L-4R
KEYIN CUE
SELECT
ON
KEYIN CUE
EFFE CT CUE
EFFECT CUE
SELECT
ON
RACK 5-8 OUT L/R
RECORDER CUE
SELECT
ON
RECORDER IN L/R
RECORDER CUE PLAYBACK OUT L/R
STEREO OUT R+C
STEREO OUT R
4BAND
EQ
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
PRE FADER
METER
ON
MATRIX OUT 1-8
INSERT
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
To RECORDER IN PATCH
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
POST ON
CUE TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
CUE L
MONO
METER CUE L
METER CUE R
OUTPUTS
DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)
CH INSERT OUT 1-32
MIX INSERT OUT 1-16
STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8
DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)
DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C),L+C,R+C
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)
[PHONES]
CUE LOGIC
PHONES LEVEL
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
METER
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
METER
SLOT OUT
ATT TRIM
SLOT{SLOT1}
16
SLOT OUT
{SLOT2}
16
[SLOT
{SLOT1,SLOT2}]
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
METER OMNI OUT
ATT TRIM
DA
8{16}
DELAY
(MAX:600ms)
METER
2TR OUT
2
PLAYBACK OUT
METER
RECORDER IN
RECORDER
IN
PATCH
METER
2
1
3
DECODER
or
ENCODER
[OMNI OUT](1-8{16})
COAXIAL
ATT TRIM
OUTPUT
PATCH
2
+
-
DIT
PLAYBACK OUT
[2TR OUT DIGITAL]
To INPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
ATT
RECORDER CUE
RECORDER CUE
USB
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
2TRD L,R
INPUT 15,16{31,32}
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
USB MEMORY RECORDER
DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}
MIX OUT 1-16
STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C),L+C,R+C
MATRIX OUT 1-8
MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
DA
2
To OUTPUT PATCH
To RECORDER IN PATCH
POST ON
METER
LEVEL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
CUE R
PHONES OUT LR
To OUTPUT PATCH
To RECORDER IN PATCH
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
EQ OUT
DYNA OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
PRE EQ POST EQ
CUE R
ON
MIX CASCADE OUT 1-16
STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1-8
CUE CASCADE OUT L,R
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
To RECORDER IN PATCH
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
CUE L
8
INSERT
MATRIX1-8
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
ON
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
4BAND
EQ
BAL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
MATRIX1,3...7
POST ON
ON
ATT
POST ON
METER
LEVEL
CUE ON
CSR
ON
PRE FADER
METER
DYNA OUT
EQ OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
ST L
MONO(C)
TO LCR
LCR
POST PAN L
LCR
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
PRE EQ POST EQ
PAN MODE
ST R
POST ON
PAN
LR MONO
PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
LEVEL
PRE FADER
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
POST ON
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
ON
32
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX13-16 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16) POST EQ
TO LCR
CUE ON
METER RACK OUT A
METER RACK OUT B
MIX OUT1-16
CSR
ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
(13-16)To KEYIN
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To MONITOR SELECT
To RECORDER IN PATCH
ON
INSERT
ST L
METER RACK OUT
METER RACK IN L
METER RACK IN R
MATRIX
INSERT OUT
1-8
ON
CUE R
FIXED
STEREO
31BandGEQ
RACK2 IN
A(L)/B(R)
RACK6 IN
A(L)/B(R)
LEVEL
CUE L
To MIX
RACK1
RACK5
STEREO
INSERT OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX2,4...8
INSERT
METER RACK IN A
METER RACK IN B
MIX
INSERT OUT
1-16
ON
MIX1,3...15
ON
FIXED
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
CH
INSERT OUT
1-32
LEVEL
ON
POST PAN R
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To MIX
LEVEL
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
MATRIX1,3...7
ON
ON
GATE
COMP
DUCK
COMPAND
EXPAND
DE-ESSER
COMP
KEYIN CUE
Keyin Filter
4BAND
EQ
RACK
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
MONO(C)
PAN LINK
POST PAN L
EQ OUT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
{SLOT2 1-16}
MATRIX OUT
1-8
CUE ON
ST L
POST ON
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
VARI
RACK1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PRE EQ POST EQ
POST ON
METER
PRE FADER
METER
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
4BAND
EQ
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
CSR
BAL
ST IN 1L-4R
SLOT 1-16
{SLOT1 1-16}
MIX OUT
1-16
LCR
ATT
INSERT
INSERT
IN
PATCH
RACK
IN
PATCH
PAN MODE
TO LCR
DYNA OUT
EQ OUT
METER
METER
GR METER
ST R
VARI
METER METER
[SLOT
{SLOT1,SLOT2}]
ON
INSERT
POST ON
FIXED
STEREO
To CASCADE IN
SELECT
LR MONO
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
TO MONO TO ST
LEVEL
FIXED
To MIX
To OUTPUT PATCH
To RECORDER IN PATCH
DIRECT OUT 1-32{64}
LEVEL
POST ON
METER
PRE FADER
METER
EQ OUT
DYNA1OUT
DYNA2OUT
METER
METER
METER
GR METER
GR METER
PRE EQ POST EQ
PRE HPF
PLAYBACK
OUT L,R
ON
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER
PAN
32
{64}
SLOT IN SLOT IN
PRE EQ
METER
HPF LPF
INSERT POINT
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
PLAYBACK OUT
INSERT POINT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT
CH 1-32{64}
To MONITOR SELECT
2TR IN DIGITAL
MIX
INSERT OUT 1-16
MIX
INSERT IN 1-16
ON
INPUT
1-16{32}
METER
COAXIAL
[2TR IN DIGITAL]
Sine Wave
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
2TRD L,R
INPUT 15,16{31,32}
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT
L,R
STEREO OUT
MONO(C)
MIX OUT1-16
MATRIX OUT1-8
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX:8ch)
MONITOR L
MONO
METER MONITOR L
MONITOR R
METER MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO(C)
METER MONITOR MONO(C)
PHONES L
To PHONES OUT
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
MONITOR OUT L
DIMMER
HA
To RACKIN PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
MONITOR SELECT
+48V
MONITOR OUT R
MONITOR OUT MONO(C)
ON
TALKBACK ON
MONITOR DIMM ON
+MONO(C)
MONITOR LEVEL
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
To OUTPUT PATCH
■ LS9-16/LS9-32 Level Diagram
Analog
Analog
Digital
GAIN
dBu
+30
+24
+20
dBFS
0
1
-10
2
3
4
5
6
-20
-10
-40
-20
-50
-30
-60
-40
-70
-30
-50
-80
-60
-90
-70
-100
-80
-110
-90
-120
-100
-130
-110
-140
-120
-150
-130
-160
-140
-170
-150
-180
-160
-190
-170
-180
-190
-200
-210
AD
INPUT
PATCH
ø
HPF
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
(x4)
DYN
1
DYN
2
INSERT
LEVEL
ON
PAN
BUS
Adder
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
(x4)
DYN
MASTER
LEVEL
/ BAL
MASTER
ON
OUTPUT
PATCH
DELAY
ø,ATT,
TRIM
Analog
Analog
DA
Bit
0
+10
+4
0
Digital
Digital
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
dBu
1 Max. Input [+30dBu]
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
CASCADE IN
1 Nominal Input [+10dBu]
Digital Clipping Level
[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]
[0dBFS = Full Scale]
+10
+4
0
PHONES
Max Output
(150mW@8Ω)
Nominal Output
(75mW@8Ω)
[The position of the level
control is 10dB lowered
from Max]
-10
-20
-30
-40
2 Max. Input [-42dBu]
OMNI OUT1-16/8
[Default setting]
-50
-60
2 Nominal Input [-62dBu]
-70
1 INPUT 1-32/16 (GAIN MIN.)
-80
2 INPUT 1-32/16 (GAIN MAX.)
-90
-100
-110
-120
-130
-140
-150
30
31
36
Nominal Output
[+4dBu]
OUT
27
28
29
34
35
+30
+24
+20
CASCADE OUT
24
25
26
32
33
Max. Output
[+24dBu]
-160
Max. DSP Noise Floor
-170
-180
-190
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ASIA
POLAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
SWEDEN
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex
Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-466-5551
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii
Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia
Tel: 495 626 0660
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
BRAZIL
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2303
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2303
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2303
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA26
Yamaha Pro Audio global web site:
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
C.S.G., Pro Audio Division
© 2006-2011 Yamaha Corporation
102POTO-H0
Printed in Japan
WH39070
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising